sya atee yee Ad ste DH BAS bil) " ee feted Nii de BAW PU le be Th rin) bd Nity ab vy Mf) Layee fs i nt Panett iat anh ‘iy ele y ver pits monn eRe a Hf ; Wr rt ewe Le yd pad fi} “ MOOR tt An pa baal cia ee a ‘) ' ’ a path eeimeday i ae } rin BRM MERAY ASTRA a Rian area eae itt oe Wty aa i TU state ys ba WM Agvet at ey cian igh me id mie re nt he HALA ATS he vabtanw in MAP NPAC ie ab ae DOA Mra Nery “LEW ta Rit RRA Oe se int ites a mat he i | cele (a bohm Pat Wels SY Tit nf ‘) i f MH wit ny A wha Pu ’ Me Ththe i } b if, it id iy i ' uh Wate i ri tagate Pee ae bai} Vea ‘ sun ti iH sit ie, ia He " f en ea ide At yy " iN Ognilaay vig. den ay \ a alate eae ie A mgndegant a CULAR nee iat ii Steers Werrent Cr Tntied ws he ‘9 vee Dit ; HM if, Hf Ft Pdeathend meee es 7 Sala Dante he i4ag hoje ie ai id? on dyetegy) Itrtasa) ity ' i {? ir be Hep Pe De yi ata iets att yi) 434) Ne Aaice A ; {| r it t Ne NeHeD bit y; ig } ; 1 a Si, sy 7 Et iat ttt a fy: 1 " gete pend ‘ iis Ht i Mige tatters EMy, a | nits 4, } } : Poa ati 4 ity be rap : y ae ih hy ; oF ‘ tia) Bet 4 4 patenig uf ee oe 4) he aaa e + ‘ i! , ate e were q 13) i) i” ‘4 she at right ard at y ‘ na i haha it i i fy aaa dae 1 iia iat Ba Can ann net SU aati ee i ‘a VV iy ph de BO Ye ee ‘ + habit Wy : 43 “ HY ia nea) ; enn! att 0 Hiya! ie ‘Nit ify Pedi Weyl eythane nt Hotty, Hat ih a et Matton alee ' ' NOVA PVE : hhueyle ( 4 i) Rea CHa Han be ‘ha nO eee ; Peet et | if iv i) Lia Mit Ret el } f ’ j Te my ie j teote wie os rit a mY ie ' ies Ut tH Mal cit i i" it ay i \ aT ura ms Wah eae PPT beast alt ; id +" yeahs i i vl nit { iV nf ie oe r i + HE a ee a ae ie roti be a i he i! I 4} ih ie Mled eit Ishii un i ] Hh ih ia ait Ry “4 Tie Mr th Sa aaee alley 4 108 athe woud hi nul ratte rh eh ah \ ly Ht lite tie Hi in iH he ieee ae i} Nid Ps Wp i ae ah a iid vial a i ag alia ii Vid } i be ng Md el ivan FAA ar Mil + viene siti if Sth Bitar a} iit rr vicars le Hy ay Ge if ia sh Mi ha Hite aah ei} ah ait a ca an ait mye eh jut wat i ete HET , ie iin HI, it 40 en iit +h ua et" i fainie re Sivas ef} a ra alan i ite Hi) i Pee uf ip He ‘ Cu i‘ Paden Ae it if int bea i iY fete At aia jj 4 ek RD HEA MSAGREAREH A i a CHL a eit Ret i Au ah Nit fi Orta Add ria { Ay ac nit ne ‘ll mT DR AR y iain ofthe “} Ai aN fi] Hi ra TOE Ni MTA AR a An net, HAV AT Oe SEAT EEAY hats 10 Wy (inte Ne ea itt i fe ue i Hh fee uns ‘y i hed Hah ‘ if : My tC iit iat = a eA see Sone ar oeee: SS = = er <= aa =. — or} heal | : uy ye eee ‘ Tia te Ade i) 4 aa hae DEA AMS LE talbaircs tiie hte eR bea obi EOy! ite in ri iy | aa ; 1 ap 1 i t taf EMR aT tala Auk Se leeatSPeaR Ya LM Foe fi ae ; ditt NN arsine tian Pras te ena Hes cin ath ; hee k u 5 a wlee ay Pa tn be ‘ i ; tat) ih Sala yeeies } ; fi Rear PAE hay eM EL 9 ) ae ee Atl PHO ite did KHRE SCaT Lue ob are 68 Kg! LM dian Hi mi ini i fe a i bal He uy » ah ey fiieg Pht) Cee y ‘4 Reel fi Wii | te Wihs h ne (3 iH Th dist Hats gi be hehe phMaly ski Hey He a tay We ata i a Uae i iW fia anit Bit te, wit hae ait nds T VMaew ests e bl i 7) r ie if HER ee 4) cit Mn ith TERY Oe bet ie Pee TPAPR ETS it ilheghh ii ‘ nek f isis) a ais \ Hera ay eeigtie dain hy bina lita te ie ea a act iaeat oh Pl, /- ah ALP AD i rite) if wield i i " Wy gd SER ys Ata 4 yi ! iM 4 Wothd 7 i ert na Weis ni iis iii allel cau aga nya a t pees : vit Pati bt) 5] i sein yeu AAA { ‘) Ny | \! F ait Pie Yh aie) i tealintilt ans , [ +h in vi Pe Hie re as 4 i OEP DANE LR ER Pete py alt EM ata ease iu iis py ' ’ py WV P debe ide wedfowen Wy be palate y 4 Wet! Wit fy RAR AT r aeitte Arable! Ham J Wy + il dt i shia Ara ' : (AD ae Deh ve Ca eee ey ‘ ; f ry bieted ihe ha ae HY yaad Ceara tan AM aa ae itis a hd vei henine ieirae iid tye ? se ne re * ie tet Hele Hy r ROT CRRA Ae wht hi hati ria et Atty \s He Mer aaa ete Mian) Pte t) ae wines tte Ay hs fy ales Lait CA ee ' ee ttle hanes Ha Matai til Hite Maing Par Utah peeled RA 79! | ype vale ital! si iy didnt irae way i He Wyre Ay nia qe 4 Hh DN miannannt tah on sy Li 1 ’ } Oe “ ratty ! yer " Py r) ‘tibe aw I yar Md 4) , i ate 4 He Re sain ht Peary Wert tt Heed "ia }i i itil a ene Hy , the ’ P ty Ay sal bet irun ben beater ae Bl te Mase i eaeihe AN dW We yah ait Hat Pee bea rir ee POU REM tre WAL wa , a] 7 ¢ uaa nau aes be arrity Pam ngiay nde Hi" et ay ‘ rhe whe wit ha eyes wa ; ety my) Vas pw ge ae be aid 4 f ys wy yA Hi ‘ ripe ad id csr ol tats " Mahe erent ea eas Cea LP yehe a i t / ‘I eaten PARE AL (ty wa u roy nie * prih were” Heo ts Piet lb dd . > 7 » ACES LIBRARY ppsatauacatacacncsasmncaaioansn nay | BiBRARY OF Illinois State LABORATORY OF NATURAL HISTORY, URBANA, ILLINOIS. e>.4u301 ox 4 ows > <2 8009 Return this book on or before the Latest Date stamped below. x ox (27 UR 3 o\ ( De G Wink Co \/ WS ete = vs Bo SURG Sy —— 8 BOO L161—H41 CN I eI Noy SS ) LT $ EME NSH caoX Lo ¥ TRANSACTIONS AND PRUUBEDINGS REPORT OF THE ROVAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED). ———_{ >———_ 8 i ee ge al [Wire TWENTY-NINE PLATES AND SEVENTY-EIGHT FIGURES IN THE TExtT. ] EDITED BY WALTER HOWCHIN, E.G.S. Adelaide : W. C. RIGBY, 74, KING WILLIAM STREET. DECEMBER, 1907. Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from Europe and America should be addressed ‘‘per W. C. Rigby, care Messrs. Thos. Meadows & Co., 34, Milk Street, Cheapside, London.” Royal Society of South Australia (INCORPORATED). Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY SIR GEORGE R. LeHUNTE, K.C.M.G. — ip — OFFICERS FOR 1907-6. President : JOSEPH C. VERCO, M.D., F.R.C.S. Vicc=Presidents: PROF. E. H. RENNIE, M.A., D.Sc. REV. THOMAS BLACKBURN, B.A. tbon. Treasurer: WALTER RUTT, C.E. bon. Secretary and Sealbolder: G. G. MAYO, C.E. Members of Council: W. B. POOLE. EK. ASHBY. W. HOWCHIN, F.G.S. (Eaitor and Representative Governor). SAMUEL DIXON. W. H. SELWAY. R. S. ROGERS, M.A., M.D. Auditor : J. S. LLOYD, F.I.A.S.A. SOG | yai32 CONTENTS. ACESLIBRARY Cops aa PAGE Basgepow, H.: Anthropological Notes on the Western Coastal Tribes of the Northern Bp tN a Plates i. to D2 ee or. i Rogers, Dr. R. S.: A New Microtis. Plate xx. , fig. ois 63 Mawson, D.: The Phosphate Minerals from Elder Rock. Plate xx., fig. 2. 65 Geological Features of Part of Ky re Penin- sula 71 The Wadella Springs and Associated Bog Iron-ore Deposit _... ri Bragee, Prof. W. H.: A Comparison of Some Forms of Elec- tric Radiation m 79 —_—_—_—_—_—_-————. The Nature of Réntgen- Rays” 94 Verco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian Marine Mol- : lusea, with Deser iptions of New Species. Part v. 4 9g Basoe, ror. W. H., and Dr. W. T. Cooxz: The Ionisation Curve of Methane ah LG Lower, O. B.: New Species and Genera of Austr alian 1 Lepi- doptera. No. xxiii... Baie Naat Mawson, D.: Mineralogical ‘Notes. Plate xxi. 119 RoGeERS, ‘Dr. R. S.: Three Species of Orchid hitherto Unre- corded in South Australia. Plate xxii. .. 125 Lea, A. M.: Descriptions of Australian Curculionidee, with ‘Notes on previously-described Species. Part v. ... 1S ea Lower, O. B.: New Australian bal a with Synony- mic pes. WO. SXiIV., .. 169 ~ Baxer, W. H.: Notes on South Australian Decapod Crus- tacea. Part v. Plates xxiii. to xxv. 173 Meyrick, E., and O. B. Lower: Revision of the Australian Psychidee : 1927 Rogers, Dr. R. S.: ‘Three New Species of Orchid. Plate XXVi. 209 Verco, Dr. J. ‘C.: Notes on South Australian Marine Mol- lusca, with Descriptions of New i Sta Part vi. Plates xxvil. and xxvill. Pp 213” Biacksurn, Rev. T.: Further Notes on Australian ‘Coleop- tera, with Descriptions of New Genera and Species. XXXVil. Spe ee 34 aa ee seinen Braee, Prof. W. H.. and J. P. V. Mapsen: The Quality of the Secondary Ionisation due to B Rays .. 300 Verco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian “Marine Mol- lusea, with Descriptions of New Species. Part vil. Plate’ Xxix. 3 he oe tee ae aan Se eh ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS a. cy ae =e Bat tee eel © ANNUAL REPORT 38 ee ee eas bg cs Peet BALANCE-SHEET eth irs oe sat leis DS DoNATIONS TO THE LIBRARY ae pts ae Aad et eG List oF FeE.ttows, Evc. _... aS ray on WS ay ok APPENDICES. Proceedings, Annual Report, etc., of the Field Naturalists’ Section. ... 340 Nineteenth Annual Report. of the Native Fauna and Flora Protection Committee of the Field Naturalists’ Section 343 Annual Report, ete., of the Malacological Section ... 346 Annual ogehed etc., of the Microscopical Section .. ae aoe Index .. he os Ded Bits du oie Me) OO “ : on a es “4 ae a mae) sj 3 nH *4 OFF Pals - “isnt tek suet . , Bi) as (a) i he ah as ‘idee : Gita ‘Bsiead i * seme Ader riateht ‘iG Oe ith cain. nSan gst aie ee yak it, (53,0 I i aed Gale 4a. EN ck ee Las. Neirtir? jen ' fre * é we Fg 7 ' ad « ae ee. ee Ah oa ui eee rs r r i “ we ’ ‘ ' t = dies frevtier eh, «Benge Speer icy? alice ft aa a Vt wey Pete pet sie y j vf) Caliper ir iF bate : us ] . es “iS 1G Be ryhi tae, WD 4) £ ee yD f —_ — 7 uy. , a a dh Sa Mt halt) i } Oy i ae ad , 4 \ ’ oe 9 ne hig! Ne ¥. cos eG Tt it BAT ow a i AW de lated ; } Sy Ass f- Srvia re ea ut (pe wT ite § ~y | Ai (Hy Ay wotuet® laa oe, TO) arts (Powe is Wee) ee moitaciiel ath toy? i 1 Mien , fs 9 ee bibs Cede ) ed : : ttt RL ' Hn? 3 ; ile) Voie ‘Vy ee a es aa ii ; ¢ Gil sa. He eS pis a yo'> aan “ ieie earn roy 7d , rm owind ee ae 7 ret | 5 a, Se éilewdenk oe 4 im ~e it F 7 , . +4 ss. SD J a he % . iver ¥ ; abasts. + LH Awe oy Oe vi iy 7 A icon f F i f A oD = r > ae det ; el wine nig die hal oe eT FE Ca ae x) wilt pe vor ‘oe i ‘Wa ay A 2 j - we wit 43 e ree rt? iff ; if 2 ie * . Bvt bh vt ; Pes yt re f Cis r ty if ary é : 2 ad ‘i "eee oh Fi LA y°. jot vin a ime 1 a a - tf ; t wr ‘ i. x! - t¥ fe & - i.* ae a, » tee | ' : te ts / : : ‘\ \? we 4\x ($2 ¢ : ! 4 si é ' ’ ree a i oft aa? Y ree ! a itr ‘ ts ‘ pl tet - boa S ze bi Rye Th & ge ak ae Ves , ; P ; ap Rey if om C i Me wv + ) ° 2 . esatlavirtay, bier off andi sg tat hwl ads. 4 yan oe ee winkt hive Bits eA a We id ? My Nini igor wailed! tied divi? enht bo ie tests bin 4 late tx x <«, Moone, te OMe vor Th . i oe hy 4h 1 yy ANTHROPOLOGICAL NOTES ON THE WESTERN COASTAL TRIBES OF THE NORTHERN TERRITORY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. By Herspert Basepow. [Read October 2, 1906.] Puatss L, to XIX. The following facts, relative to the characteristics and customs of several native tribes of the Northern Territory, I gathered while acting as Assistant to the Government Geo- logist, Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, on geological explorations dur- ing 1905. The accompanying figures are reproductions of my original field-sketches. The tribal distribution, and, simultaneously, the extent of tribal territory, of the native population of the north- western coastal districts of the Northern Territory vary directly as the natural resources of the particular locality. The Daly River, as an example, is bordered by fertile flats on either side, with’ numerous backwaters, or billabongs, that teem with abnormal game. Hence it is that, along the lower reaches of that river, a number of distinct tribes are congregated within a comparatively small area; while west of it, in the absence of any considerable fresh-water stream, two coastal tribes are spread over a great stretch of com- paratively poor country. | The Larrekiya,* the best known, on account of Port Darwin being included within their domain, occupy a territory extending southwards between the Howard River on the east and the Finniss on the west, a subdivision or clan, the Marri, having a local distribution near the mouth of the Blackmore River and forming the southern boundary at about twenty-five miles inland. The Larrekiya further separate themselves into coastal and inland groups, the former being called the Binnimiginda, the latter the Gun- majyerrumba. * This is how the pronunciation appears to me. I am aware that other authors have alluded to the tribe, and adopted slight variations in their spelling. Vide Foelsche: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. v., 1882 (Larrakeah:); Coppinger: Voyage of the “Alert,’’? 1883 (Larikia);.Curr: The Australian Race, 1886, vol. i. (Larrakia and Larragea); Mackillop: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xvii., 1893 (Larrikiya); Parkhouse: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xix., part 1, 1895, and Austr. Assoc. Adv. Science, vol. vi., 1895 (Larrakv’a, Larrakiha, Larrikia, Larrakeeha, and Larree- keeyah ). A 2 They are joined on the west by a coastal tribe, the WVogait,* who claim country across the Daly River to about Cape Ford, and on the east by the Wulnat tribe. Between the Wogait and Larrekiya, and passing south of the former to the Daly River mouth, lies the country of a small tribe, the Sherait, or ‘““Paperbark natives,’ closely related to the Larrekiya. East of the Sherait border the Gunerakan. The Ponga-ponga tribe lives to the south of the Ilogait, on the Daly River; and still further south the Mulluhk-Mulluk,? a powerful tribe, holds a large area, which is subdivided and allotted to individual dependent clans, as the Vyiramé, on the west bank of the river, south-west of Mount Litchfield, and the Aomorrkir, living on the same bank, south of the Djiramé. With a more local distribution, the M/arranunga, another strong tribe, occupies the country around Hermit eal. The Jlogaits are bordered on the west by the Berrin- gin, whose domain extends from Cape Ford to a point about 184} miles north of Point Pearce, known to them as Allait- perra. They are bordered on the south by either a distinct tribe or subdivision of their own, known as the Kujera, who were not seen personally. The Gimmu are the next on the west, extending, roughly, to the boundary of Western Aus- tralia. Southwards from Port Darwin, along the mining centres, the original tribes have been disarranged by European and Asiatic interference, and it is difficult to secure authentic information concerning their former possessions and rites. One large tribe, called the Awurrai§ has existed south of the Larrekiya, extending from Mounts Charles and Gun south te about the latitude of Mount Wells. To the south-east, beyond the Mary River, are the Agiwallem, the valley in which Burrundie now stands forming neutral ground. The tribes east of the Adelaide River were not visited ; but through the kindness of Mr. F. E. Benda, Secretary to the Hon. Minister controlling the Northern Territory, I have received the names of tribes of the MacArthur River district, which were collected by the late Cornelius Power, Corporal of Police, stationed at Borroloola. The majority of these names, allowing for slight phonetic variations, have * Various synonyms for this tribe exist, such as Waggqait, Waadqgite, Worgite, and Waqgote. * Sometimes written Woolner. ft Knut Dahl spells this name Mollak Mollak: rans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol: xtx.,, 1895, ». 122. § Awdrra of Parkhouse: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A.;- vol. xix., 1895; and Austr. Assoc. Adv. Science, vol. vi., 1895. 3 already been published by Messrs. Spencer and Gillen,* but I, nevertheless, reproduce them here, in confirmation of the statements of these writers. In this list I adhere to the original spelling by Power, which is according to the English pronunciation ; while the names in parentheses, immediately following, are those given by Spencer and Gillen in the system of orthography established by the Royal Geographical Society of London. The Anyoola tribe (Anula) inhabits the McArthur River district, from about Borroloola to the coast, as well as the Pellew Islands at the river mouth. The Korrawa (Karawa) is a very large tribe, living abeut the watersheds of the Robinson and Calvert Rivers. The Binbinga (Binhinga), a peaceful tribe, occupies the McArthur River district for forty miles south of Borroloola. The Godangce (probably a branch of the Gnanji), adjoins the Binhinga on the east. The Yumpia (Umbaia) lives in country extending south of the Binhinga, to the tablelands. Both this tribe and the former are noted for cattie-killing. The Alowa (Allaua) territory lies west of the Binhinga, in the Limmen River district. The Marra (Mara) is a large tribe, occupying the Lim- men River, north of the A//aua, to the coast, and west of the Anula. The Wi/longera (Wilingura) is a small and peaceable tribe, to the south of the J/ara. The Angee and Anga (no doubt branches of the Vganyj) are small, hostile tribes, living south and west of the Allaua, at the head of the Wickham River. The Chingaleey (Tyngilli) holds territory to the west, and the Laytha to the south, of the Umbara. « The Goonanderry is distributed along the Robinson and Calvert Rivers, south of the Aarawa; and, lastly, the lanee tribe borders the Goonanderry, on the south, and extends to the head of the Nicholson River. Although the dialects of the Larrekiya, Wogait, and Sherait are distinct. it is usual for members of any one tribe to be familiar with the languages of the other two, the Wogaits, in addition, having a fair knowledge of that of the Berringn. The Mulluk-Mulluk dialect is that most gene- rally understood among ‘the various tribes grouped near the * The Northern Tribes of Central Australia, London, 1904. + See also A. G. B. Ravenscroft: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., wor. xv., 1892, p. 121. A2 4 territory of the latter. Short comparative vocabularies of four tribes are appended. The Larrekiya and Wogait are, so far as my observation went,” friendly with one another, and tribal intermarriage is not infrequent. Amongst the Larrchkiya, given that a man marries the daughter of his mother’s sister—the husband of this (his aunt) is unnya to him, she being ngalling to him, and halle- dik to his unnya. The daughter of his ngalling then becomes his halledik, and he is ngaw to her. If by the union of wnnya and halledik the offspring is a female, she is w/lmirruk to the former and nguille to the latter. This u/lmiirruk becomes the ° property of the corresponding male offspring of his sister, and is to him nugganyi; ullmiirruk of unnya thereby becom- ing hailedik of unnya’s nugganyi. The female offspring of this union is allitmit to unnya, and may be given to the cor- responding offspring of the male child of the nugganyi’s sis- ter. 7 According to the legends of the Larrekiya it happened many years ago that a baby boy rose suddenly from the ground out of the burrow of a bandicoot (Perameles sp.). He was seen by the people of the Larrekiya, who invited him to come to their camp, but he refused. Some time after, when he had become a man, they again met him. Again he was asked to join the Larrekiya men in camp, but once more he declined. Thereupon the men became angry, and dragged him to a waterhole, and threw him into it. The stranger immediately sank, and five bubbles of air arose to the sur- face as he disappeared. The men sat down and watched the water, when suddenly the face of the man reappeared. The Larrekiya hurled a spear at him, and he was killed, because he had no father and no mother, but was an accomplice of the evil spirit, who, it is asserted by the old men of the iVogait, makes a big fire, from which he takes an infant and places it at night in the womb of a lubra, who must then give birth to the child. In the ordinary course of events, if a man, when out hunting, kills an animal or collects any other article of diet, he gives it to his gin, who must eat it, believing that the re- spective object brings about the successful birth of a picca- niny. * Of., “ . . . the Waggait, whom both the Ldrraki’a and Awdrra detest . . .’’ T. A. Parkhouse: Austr. Assoc. Adv. Science, vol. vi, 1895, p. 688. + Parkhouse explains this apparent marriage within the blood-tie, by stating that the relationship is not so close, the line of descent only and not the number of degrees being indi- cated: Aastr. Assoc. Adv. Science, vol. vi., 1895, p. 641. | 5 In other words, conception is not regarded as a direct result of cohabitation. The child, on no account, must par- take of the particular food until it has successfully teethed. At childbirth the navel cord is twisted off. What may be the consequence of this treatment is the fact that abnor- mal swellings were frequently seen in the region of the navel in grown-up individuals. During the menses of a woman the man must not re- ceive any food from her, or she from him; otherwise it 1s believed that a serious illness will result on either side, which no medicine-man could alleviate. If, however, by accident or misunderstanding, food has passed from man to woman, or vice versa, the medicine-man may be summoned, who removes the pain by gestures and by pretending to remove an offend- ing body by sucking, eventually shewing a piece of meat covered with blood to the sufferer. If a medicine-man has a bad case of sickness to deal with, he pulls out a few hairs from his armpit, burns them, and places the ashes in the nostrils of the patient, over which he holds his hands in the shape of a funnel and blows thereon. When a dugong has been captured by the men, all women are kept at a distance, and not allowed to witness the cutting- up of the spoil; but they may subsequently take part in the feast. If they were present all the flesh would pass from their bodies, and they would become barren. The aborigines make the statement that when they kill a dugong (which is said to be often done by forcing small rods into its nostrils) it wails and whines pitifully like a human being. The female animal, further, is said to carry her young on her fin like a lubra carries her infant,* and, Swimming with the other fin, suckles it. When tired, she changes about from one fin to the other. According to their traditions, long ago a blackfellow ate a certain berry, when some of the juice squirted into his eves. The pain was intolerable, and he became blind. In his agony he tossed himself about until he fell, and began to rolf down the hill-slope on which he had been sitting. His body continued rolling over and over until he reached th2 cliffs on the coast, and fell into the sea. The rolling motion continued until he was graaually converted into the form of a dugong. ; * Cf. Keppel’s remark on the motherly affection of the fe- ee fe UeoNe: A Visit to the Indian Archipelago, 1853, vol. ii., p. 179. 6 FUNERAL CEREMONIES. When a man dies, the corpse is kept for a day, and paint- ed over with ochre. The fat of the deceased is rubbed over the bodies of the mourners, the gins included. In former days the general custom, now only retained by the furthest-out tribes, was to construct a platform of boughs and bark in the forks of trees, upon which the body was left unti all the soft parts had been re- moved by birds of prey.* See pls. v. and vi. A bone7y (radius) of the left arm of the deceased is then taken, tied io a necklace, and worn round the neck of a relative, who thereby is supposed to acquire the strength and qualities of the deceased. The remaining bones of the skeleton are wrapped up in paper-bark (Melaleuca leucodendron) and buried. The bodies of old men and old gins are buried in the ground without having been previously placed in a tree. The interment is carried out by four men, who stand above the grave (which is about 5 feet deep), and hand the corpse to two men down below. The latter place it in a recumbent posture on its right side, with the legs tucked upwards, and the head resting upon the hands. The female mourners gash their scalps with the points of yam-sticks, and scar the backs of one another. See pls. ili. and vii. The men cut their upper arms and thighs transversely with stone knives, or gash their foreheads with the sharp edges of their spear-throwers. Both parties cover their bodies and hair with pipeclay and ashes. Songs of wailing are sung by both males and females, those of the women resembling the sounds expressed by :— Neejoan, Ho ho un un. * Cf. J. WL. Stokes: Discoveries in Australia, 1846, vol. li., p. 295, et seq., and plate; EK. J. Eyre: Journs. Expedition; of Discovery into Central Australia, 1845, vol. ii., p. 345, and plate; H. Keppel: A Visit to the Indian Archipelago, 1805,, sol. 1.,: . p.) 181,” and: “plate” | J. | aa eee frans. | Phily > Sos" *S. As, 1879; "ip. 84.) i a ieee Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. v., 1882, p. 5; Curr: The Australian Race, 1886, vol. i., pp. 255 and 272; W. G. Stretton: Trans. Roy. Soe., S.A... vol. xvii., 1893, pn. 237; T.Al Parkhouse: | Amegae Assoc. Adv. Science, vol. vi., 1895, p. 6483; W. E. Roth: Ethno- logical Studies among the N.W. Central Queensland Aborigines, Brisbane, 1897, p. 165, pl. xxiii., fig. 406; T. Worsnop: The Pre- historic Arts, Manufactures, Works, Weapons, etc., Adelaide, 1892, p. 66, pl. xxxiv. + Cf. Spencer and Gillen: The Northern ‘Tribes of Central Australia, 1904, cap. xvii. The Port Essington natives are said to have carried all the bones about with them in baskets. Foelsche: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. v., 1882, p. 6. T The response on part of the men is equivalent to long-drawn : He e 6, He ec 6, He-e 0; the m’ and wn, above, and the 6, below, sounding like sobs. Seeds of the Cycas media* are collected, and stored in water for three days, when the mourners congregate and feast upon them. After the body has been interred a sign-post is erected at some distance from the mound upon which the spear- thrower of the deceased is stuck into the ground. It consists of an upright pole,+ to the top of which a bundle of grass is fixed; just beneath it is fastened a cross-piece, projecting to unequal lengths on either side, round each end of which is wrapped a bundle of grass; the whole resembling in appear- ance a scarecrow with outstretched arms. The longer of these horizontal arms has inserted into it a rod which points directly to the site of the grave. Suspended from the end of the opposite arm are feathers or paper-bark, in such a way that they swing in the wind, and so serve to attract the atten- tion of passers-by, who can recognize the spot, and pay their respects to the departed. In the meantime the main camp has removed from the locality. During the mourning ceremony the spears of the de- ceased are placed across a frame, consisting of two branches of trees resting in the forks of two pairs of upright stems driven in the ground. In the Mulluk-Mulluk, when a man dies outside his tribal country he is buried immediately. A circular space is cleared for a radius of about eight feet, in the centre of which the deceased is interred. Over this a mvund of earth is made, which is covered with sheets of paper-bark, kept in place by three or four flexible wands stuck into the ground at their ends, and passing over the mound transversely to its length. Stones are laid along the border of the grave, and one or two upon the mound. See fig. 1. * Foelsche onions the eating ioe yams Thi the mourn- ing ceremony of children: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., ‘vol. v. 1882, p. 5. + Similar, no qonnt, to the valved pole described by Foel- sche: Trans. Roy. Soc., 8.A., vol. v., 1882, vp. 5. 8 The corpses of well-nourished children up to the age of two or three years were primarily disposed of by eating them,7 but this custom is not at the present day strictly adhered to by the semi-civilized peoples. ‘Every native believes in his re-incarnation after death in the form of some living being which is always held in respect t by him. This belief, however, did not appear to be general amongst the Larrekiyas that were questioned. PERSONAL MUTILATIONS. Female infants are subjected to mutilation by removal of two joints of the right forefinger.} In the western tribes, Ginmu, the finger is cut off with a stone knife. Elsewhere it is amputated at a later age by binding tightly round the joint a ligature made of cobwebs of a spider that lives in the mangroves, the limb withering away gradually. It appears, also, that in certain instances the joints are removed by biting, and in the Il’ogait the amputated segment is buried in an anthill. The operation takes place without cere- mony, and does not seem to be strictly adhered to by the lat- ter tribe. A singular case came under notice in the Ginmu tribe, where a young girl had had the two joints of her finger imperfectly removed, and upon the mutilated stump a horny growth, which resembled a diminutive finger-nail, had grown. When a child of either sex has reached the age of about six years its nasal septum is perforated. The operation is performed by an old man, who seizes the septum with thumb and forefinger, draws it forward, and pinches a hole through it with the nails. Through the perforation a small, sharpened bone of a kangaroo is inserted, and the hole made larger by gradually expanding it with a peg. During the operation another man holds his hands firmly over the ears of the child, which is thus not supposed to perceive the pain. When the hole is large enough, a single small smooth segment of bamboo is inserted by passing it over the kangaroo bone. The child must sleep upon its back until the wound has healed. The bamboo is replaced from time to time by a larger one, and if, by chance, the rod should become fixed by clotting of blood or otherwise, a strong blade of grass is inserted between the * Cf. Foelsche: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. v., 1882, p. 5. ft Cf. Parkhouse: Austr. Assoc. Adv. Science, vol. vi., 1895, p. 640, second paragraph. _ Cf. Foelsche: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. v., 1882) os 7; Mackillop: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xvii., 1893, p. 257. Dr. W. E. Roth informs me that. the practice of mutilating the little finger is still in vogue in Queensland, and in early days was preva- lent down the coastline, certainly as far south as Sydney. ) rod and edge of the hole, and, being held by either end, drawn round the rod circumferentially to scrape or saw through the adherent parts. The operation takes place without any particular ceremony, and men and women, alike, may be present. The nose-stick is not usually worn except during corrobborees, and when neighbouring tribes are’ visited.” See pl. 11. Bamboo nose-stick: Zar., Damorrenelle; il0g., Widja- dol; Sher., Yinnung delluk. ; Wooden nose-rod: JLar., Mamalolma; Il’og., Barrong nget. Bopy Scars. As a very general rule, the raised cicatrices are less pro- nounced than in Central Australia, and are, except in certain cases, developed to a less extent in the coastal than the inland tribes. In the Larrekiya low cicatrices are favoured; abnor- mally-developed scars being associated with an early death. Among the Larrekiya and \Wogait it was noted that the chest incisions, particularly in the case of the younger gene- ration, were not treated, as is generally the custom, by the application of ashes into the wound. The scarring of a Ilogait boy is for the purpose of pre- paring him for the rite of initiation. If he can endure the cutting or scarring of his chest with fortitude, and without showing signs of pain, he is ready for the ceremony of circum. cision. In the Ginmw tribe the scarring (geri) of a boy is done at an early age by degrees, commencing on the upper arm, and ending on the chest, with the same object in view as amongst the Iogaits, viz., to make him hardy before circum- cision. Among members of this tribe were noted one initi- ated youth with upper-arm scars and two chest incisions, another with four of the latter, a man with two chest and ten abdominal scars (the latter being interrupted centraily), a warrior with - twenty-five abdominal and chest scars, and red-ochred bands across either shoulder. A girl about eight or nine years of age was cica- tricised in the manner shown in fig. 2. The asymmetrical character of the abdominal! sears is possibly related to the age and sex Fig. 2. of the child. Two joints of her right index finger had been removed. _ ™* Stokes mentions that the Port Darwin blacks ‘had a piece of bamboo, eighteen inches long, run through the cartilage of the nose.”’ Discoveries in Australia, vol. ii., p. 19. 10 Another form of self-mutilation which men or women may inflict upon themselves at any time is produced by the application of the heated end of a fire-stick four or five times to the upper arm, and diagonally down the middle of the chest from either side. See pl. 1i. This also gives rise to elevated scars. Firsr INITIATION CEREMONY OF THE LARREKIYA YOUTH— THE BoLuieEr. When the Lurrekiya boy is to be initiated, his body is decorated with bands of white that are made by sticking on to him vegetable down from the seed-pods of a large tree, locally called the silk-cotton tree (Bombatt malabatrica), and feathers. A horseshoe-shaped band is thus formed, pass- ing from ear to ear, down the cheeks, and below the chin ; the upper ends of this figure being connected by a horizontal band passing across the nose below the eyes. A similar band extends in front from shoulder to shoulder, above the nipples, and from this, two bands pass downwards over the abdomen and thigh to the knee, where each unites with a circle round the jcint. From both shoulders a white line is drawn along the upper arm to the plaited arm-girdles at the elbow; additional bracelets being worn at the wrists. Round nis forehead is tied a band, known as gulumbaua, made of numerous twisted strands of opossum-fur, woven closely together, and coated with pipeclay. See pl. 1. The ends of the strings of this band are tied together at the back of the head by means of human-hair twine. Underneath the galambaua, at the centre of the forehead, is inserted a plume of feathers of the Nankeen night-heron (.Vycticorax caledoni- cus) or emu, attached to an ironwood stick, the plume being downwards, while from either side of the head a fur-tassel (Gwiydrum gauliipmagga) is hang by string. Identical appen- dages are fastened to the armlets. A necklace made of seg- ments of grass stems threaded together (mangulma) is worn, and a broad belt (danbidjuluw) of stringybark ( Hucalyptus sp.), which, by virtue of its coiled form, can be adjusted to a waist of any size. The latter is made secure by tying the outer overlapping end with fur string, which is then wound con- tinuously and spirally round the belt for its whole length and back again, thus producing a lattice-like effect. See pl. ii. The usual human-hair belt (herelgma) is tied over this, and from it the pubic tassel (doi-ira) is hung. The boys—several pass through the ordeal at the same time—are separated, and made to sit in a row before the old men, holding their eyes shut with their right hand. The war- riors, with the variety of spear afterwards to be described as it mallgirrima poised, stamp their feet in front of the boys uttering harsh cries of drr-re! drr-re! and géra! On the con- clusion of this performance the boys, upon a given signal, look at the men. This finishes the first part of the ceremony. For the next few months the boys, who are now styled Béllier, are kept away from the women and camp. They are led away into the bush by the men, whom they must assist by gathering food, and in other ways. At intervals they are submitted to severe blows between the shoulders by the old men in charge, and given to understand that they must, on peril of death, preserve strict silence as to all that has passed. Upon his return to camp, the Béllicr usually has additional cicatrices inflicted upon his upper arm and thigh. The Larrekiya does not circumcise, though they say that in early days the rite was practised until, at one ceremony, a subject died from the effects. Their belief is, now, that if anyone of the Larrekiya were to be circumcised he would die.* The Melville Island natives, also, do not circumcise.+ THE INITIATION CEREMONY OF THE WoGait YOUTH. At the initiation of a Iogait, after his fortitude has been tested by scarring the chest, he is thrown on his back over the legs of four men, who sit close together two and two, facing one an- other, with their legs alternately spaced, so that the toes of one are next to the buttock of the man oppo- site; the legs of the four men form- ing, collectively, a continuous plat- form.{ This stage is shown in fig. 3. A fifth man then sits upon the vic- Fig. 3. tum’s chest, facing the operator ; while another holds his head. The boy is gagged with a bundle of fur, which further serves the purpose of allowing him to bite upon it during his pain; his ears are stuffed, and his hands kept at his sides. The operator, smeared all over with pipe-clay, approaches from behind, and, kneeling upon the boy’s thighs, draws the: prepuce well for- ward, and cuts it off with a quartz flake. The wound is * Cf., “A reason was given for the custom falling into desuetude that the skin became too tender.’’ Parkhouse: Austr. Assoc. Adv. Science, vol. vi., 1895, pv. 643. + Vide Foelsche: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. v., 1882, ty hee I “‘In the ceremony of the Aggrakundi, a tribe south of the Awarrai, eight men lay on the ground, their faces in their folded arms, head and feet alternating, the backs forming a platform. Uvon the buttocks the boy was laid. . . .’’—Park- house, op. cit., p. 645. 12 covered with paper-bark and ashes,* and the sufferer, who usually faints during the operation, is led away to the bush for about three weeks. Upon his return to camp he shows the operated part first to his mother, and then to the girl who has been selected as his wife; these scar their heads with a pointed yam-stick. The excessive degree of excitement and fear apparently makes the lad practically unconscious to pain, and after the event he is usually quite oblivious to what has happened. The detached prepuce (garijet barre) is held against the bellies of those who have been present at the operation, then placed in a small dilly-bag (garad), and worn round the neck of the operator until the wound has healed, when it is thrown into the fire. The cutting-flake used for the operation is em- bedded at one end in the wax of wild bees, which is heated and moulded round a bamboo. Into the groove thus pro- duced the stone is thrust, and firmly embedded by squeezing the wax with the hand. Although the Larrekiyas do not circumcise, yet when a performance of this nature is about to take place amongst the lV ogaits, invitations to be present are sent to the former tribe, and the members of the two hold a joint corrobboree. The following are some of the chants of this joint corrob- boree : — 1. Narraya injala, bannaya injala, bannaiyaka injala bana; injala bannaiyaka injala, bannaya injalé bana. . Narraya kaninba, larrambana kanimba, larranbar- raya kaninba, larrambana kanimba. 3. Anna yan na na ranga bana na ya ni ba, en kara bana, kara gan dorne, di di di di. bo The corresponding accompaniment that is blown into the wooden trumpet or anbi of the Wogaits, sounds, in the first chant, like: — Didnodiddé diduadu didnadiddé diduadu - - - - - - - - : ------ didnarib ; in the second : — Didjuadeldo, didjuadeldo - - - - - - did jnadelrip ; and in the third : — Tid ja ru du, tid ja ru du, tid ja ru du - - - - None of the north-western coastal tribes cited practise the rite of sub-incision, but it is well known that the tribes border- et Cf. Knut Dahl: Trans. Hay. ben S.A, vol, xix., 1895, p. 122. 13 ing the Gulf of Carpentaria,* such as the Anwla, Mara, and Binhinga, do so+ to the same extent as in the Central Austra- lian tribes. The rite was not observed in the tribe at the mouth of the Victoria River.{ THe INITIATION CEREMONY OF THE LARREKIYA GIRL. Although the girls of the Larrekiya and \Wogaits are given away to men at a very early age, no cohabitation must take place until after the ‘“‘smoking ceremony” of the girl, which is known as Médnniugu by the Larrekiyas, and Nitkur- rum by the Wogaits. When the menses have commenced she must undergo the following ceremony, which takes place at night-time, and at some distance from the main camp, though not necessarily out of sight of it. Men do not attend, but may witness the proceedings from the camp at a distance. The girl, being decorated after the fashion of the Béllier, is seized from behind by an old gin (under whose care she has been), who places her hands upon the novice’s shoulders. See fig. 4. Another woman places her hands upon the shoulders of the old gin in a similar manner, and the same thing repeated by the array of females taking part in the function, one stand- ing behind the other A chant, a long-drawn, continuous “Ya, Ya, Ya,’ 1s commenced; the old gin at this stage, stamping on the ground with her feet, moves forward and pushes the girl in front of her, Fig. 4. while all the other women respond simi- larly, and follow in a line. This chant suddenly ceases, and is replaced by another sounding like “Yen da min,” the old gin stopping at this stage and imparting three smart blows upon the girl’s back. pe W.G. Stretton: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xvii., 1893, Pp. 22. + Cf. Foelsche: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. v., 1882, p. 17 Tribes inhabiting the western coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria, between the Roper and Nicholson Rivers, have a practice of slitting the penis along the urethra: Spencer and Gillen: The Northern Tribes of Central Australia, 1904, p. 1383. From the Urabunna in the south, right through the centre of the continent to the western shores of the Gulf of Carpentaria, sub-incision is practised upon the young men. a Cf. MacKillop: Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xvii, 1893, Dp. e . 14 The stamping motion, and the “Ya, Ya, Ya,” are com- menced afresh, to be again changed to “Yen da min” and three blows on the girl’s back. This procedure is kept up for the greater part of the night. At the first glimpse of day the second item in the pro- gramme is started; it consists of the washing of the girl in the sea.* She is led to the water, and all taking part in the ceremony wade out with her to some depth. On gaining deeper water the whole party go through a grotesque “‘goose- waddle-like” dance, flapping their arms, which are kept bent at the elbows, alternately at either side, and, in so doing, splashing the water up over their bodies with the production of a peculiar hollow-sounding noise. Another refrain is now chanted: ‘A -/é-/é-lé,” and when the last syllable has sounded all the bathers dip under the surface of the water, the same thing being repeated many times. The third part of the programme, following directly upon the washing, is the smoking of the young gin. A fire is made on shore, and when a good blaze has been secured, a large heap of green grass and _ leaves, previously steeped in water, is piled upon it. On this the old gin seats herself, and on her lap, with legs astride, the young gin. More grass and leaves are piled on the heap, and the vast volumes of smoke that are generated com- pletely hide both women from view. The object is that the smoke shall thoroughly play upon the genitalia of the girl, the process being facilitated by the manipulation of the old gin upon whose lap she is seated. This event finished, the principal ceremony of initiation is concluded, and the novice is led into the bush by the old women, returning with them to camp the same day. Through the period the girl’s diet is restricted during the pleasure of the old gin. She is not allowed to eat snake, dugong, monitor (Varanus sp.), turtle, etc., but may have crab. No cohabitation takes place between the young gin and her husband for about four months after her initiation, but at each recurrence of the menses she cleanses herself with water, without repetition of any ceremony. The man must not receive food from her during these periods, as otherwise he would become subject to severe pains in the stomach, and become readily susceptible to injury. If, for instance, in their excursions hostile blacks were encountered, he would * It is interesting to note a similarity of these proceedings recorded from the western islands of North Australia: Reports Cambridge Anthropological Expedition, Torres Straits, vol. v., 1904, chap. vi., pp. 201 et seq. : 15 be certain to become the victim of any spear thrown by them. A subsequent secret corrobboree of initiation, about which very little is known, takes place several years later, and cor- responds to the J/ollinya ceremony of the men, which is described below. In conformity with the absence of sub-incision among these western tribes, the corresponding mutilation of the female is not in vogue. Seconp INITIATION CEREMONY OF THE LARREKIYA YOUTH— THe MOLLINYA. Some years after the Béllier ceremony comes the -I/ol- linya, after which the subject becomes entitled to join in the discussions of the old men. On this occasion the youth is under the care of an old man, and is decorated in a somewhat similar way as in the first ceremony. The broad, white fore- head band, or galambaua, marked transversely with four stripes of red ochre, and the similar appendages from head, elbow, and waist are worn. He carries, in addition, a plume of cockatoo feathers, known as biamérre, in his hair. See pl. 11. The performance—at which only the old men (all initiated Mollinyas) are present, while no mention of the ceremony is made to the women—commences soon after sundown, and ends before midnight. The youth, in the presence of his guardian, must remain silent, and with downcast eyes. . fase tha ei 5 7? 77 77; Se Mh 77 RE A ede? Tel komt fai bss! Ye PGES ara >, TT H, 77 nae) i, ae Zn 1 5 AEP \ ity ks \ y RUM sa NN ky \ ee ap LP 11 Hussey « Gillingham, Printers, Adelaide. 231 FURTHER NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW GENERA AND SPECIES. XXXVITI. By the Rev. T. Buacxsurn, B.A. [Read October 1, 1907. | HYDROPHYLLID A. CERCYON. I attribute the following species to Cercyon with no little doubt whether it ought not to be treated as the type of a new allied genus. But as its distinctive structural charac- ters may perhaps be regarded as simply modifications of the Cercyon type, I have ventured to include it provisionally in Cercyon. Its tarsi are shorter and stouter than in any other Cercyon known to me, but notably longer than those of Mega- sternum; the basal joint of the hind tarsi only very slightly longer than the 2nd joint. The 3rd joint of the maxillary palpi is much shorter than the 4th. The middle part of the metasternum is an abruptly-elevated flat and brilliantly nitid area of obcordate shape, the rest of the segment opaque owing to the presence of very fine confluent sculpture. The mesosternal keel is long and well defined, but very narrow ; linear in fact. The prosternal keel is normal. The elytra are without any trace of striation. I do not find any other dis- tinctive character likely to be generic. C. kingense, sp. nov. Ovale; nitidum; piceo-nigrum, anten- nis (clava excepta) palpis pedibusque rufis, corpore sub- tus et elytris apicem versus plus minusve rufescenti- bus; exemplorum nonnullorum prothorace rufescenti ; capite pronotoque crebre (hujus lateribus magis sparsim) subtiliter punctulatis; elytris haud striatis, subcoriaceis et puncturis subtilissimis sed perspicuis sat crebre impres- sis; prothorace fortiter transverso, antice parum angus- tato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, angulis omnibus obtusis ; carina mesosterni perangusta sat elongata, prosterni sat elevata; tarsis sat brevibus sat robustis, articulo basali quam 2" parum longiori. Long., 1-14 1.; lat., $1. (vix.). Under a microscope the coriaceous appearance of the elytra is seen to be caused by a reticulation of sharply-defined scratches. King Island (Mr. A. M. Lea). 232 CRYPTOPHAGUS. C. tasmancus, sp. nov. Elongatus; parallelus; modice con- vexus ; pubescens ; totus ferrugineus; antennis sat robus- tis, articulis 9° 10° que fortiter transversis (hoc quam ille nonnihil longiori nonnihil latior1) ; capite pronotoque crebre subtilius punctulatis; hoc leviter transverso, ante scutellum plus minusve gibbo, utrinque ad angulum anti- cum tuberculum sat magnum ferenti, lateribus parum arcuatis haud dentatis, angulis posticis sat rectis; elytris crebre subtilius punctulatis, circa scutellum sat fortiter gibbis. Maris tarsis heteromeris, anticis sat dilatatis; femine tarsis pentameris simplicibus. Long., 1 1.; lat., 4 1. Resembles C. gubbipennis, Blackb., in the gibbosity of the elytra around the scutellum, but differs from it, inter alia, by the presence of a conspicuous tubercle immediately within the anterior angles of the pronotum, and by the much finer and closer puncturation of the elytra. Tasmania (Mr. A. M. Lea). MYRABOLIA. M. longicorns, Blackb. Two specimens from Tasmania sent by Mr. Lea differ from the type in their very small size (scarcely exceeding 1 1. in length), and by the anterior sinu- ation of the sides of the pronotum being scarcely traceable. It is possible that they represent a distinct species. M. parva, Blackb. A Tasmanian example of Myrabola, sent by Mr. Lea, is of distinctly narrower build than the type, and its prothorax is a little more strongly transverse. These differences are, perhaps, sexual. TROGODERMA. T. rigua, Er. Among the King Island Coleoptera lately taken by Mr. A. M. Lea are two specimens of a Trogoderma, which in all probability represent this species. They agree very well with Erickson’s description in every respect except the pilose markings of the elytra, and are evidently abraded. Rigua is described as having four fasciz and an apical spot formed of white pilosity on its elytra. In one of the examples before me there is a subbasal white fascia, exactly as described, and obscure traces of white pilosity in other parts, which may well be the remains of fascie. In the other example there is scarcely any trace of fasciz, but there are some white hairs close to the apex, which are likely to be the remains of a white spot. I am fairly confident in making this identifica- tion because 7’. mgua is described as presenting some charac: ters unusual among the Australian 7’rogodermata which are 233 well marked in this insect, especially that of the large three- jointed antennal club and the very close puncturation of the _pronotum. I have seen no 7rogoderma but this one having -antennz agreeing with Erickson’s description. In my tabu- lation of the Australian species of T’rogoderma (Trans. Roy. $oc.; S.A., 1903, p. 162) this species would stand beside 7. Adelaide, Blackb., from which it differs, enter alia, by the club of its antenne three-jointed (at any rate in one sex), and the puncturation of its pronotum much closer still than “in Adelaide (entirely confluent, in fact). In a former Memoir Mear.i.9.9.A., 1891, p. 130) I formed a new genus, _ Adelaidea, for a South Australian Dermestid widely separat- ed from Trogoderma generically but agreeing so well as a species with the description of 7. rigua that I expressed a doubt as to whether it might not be possible that it was the species on which Erickson’s description was founded. The study of these King Island specimens is conclusive against that conjecture. LAMELLICORNES. COPRIDES. ONTHOPHAGUS. O. ocelliger, Har. I have received from Mr. French seve- ral specimens (both sexes) taken in the far north of Western Australia which I refer to this species. They agree well with the description, but two of them depart from it in hav- ing their eyltra more or less spotted with red. They are ex- tremely close to O. asper, Macl., but differ from it in being a trifle smaller ; with the pronotum somewhat more nitid, not quite so closely punctulate, devoid of the small tubercle that occupies the middle of the front margin in (at least. one sex of) asper, and having its base distinctly margined in the mid- dle. The sexes do not differ much inter se; the front tibiz of that which I take to be the male are a little longer and more slender, and the pygidium of the same a little more convex than in the other sex. The presence of a distinct fine line margining the middle part of the base of the pronotum places this species (in my tabulation of Onthophagus, Tr. Roy. Soc., S.A., 1903, pp. 267, etc.) in Group V., where it falls beside O. henleyensis, Blackb., from which, however, its pilo- sity, closer puncturation of pronotum, unequal elytral inter- stices, and very much smaller size, separate it widely. O. carmodensis, sp. nov. Sat latus; supra glaber ; subtus pilo- sus; modice nitidus; niger, antennarum clava flava, tar- sis rufescentibus; clypeo antice fortiter emarginato ; capite equali, antice ruguloso, postice fere levi; oculis sat latis levibus; prothorace quam longiori ut 19 ad 11 234 latiori, supra obsolete (vix perspicue) punctulato, supra equali (foveis sublateralibus exceptis), lateribus ante medium haud (pone medium fortiter) sinuatis, angulis anticis fere rectis subproductis postis obtusis bene defi- nitis, basi tota subfortiter elevato-marginata; elytris nitide minus subtiliter crenulato-striatis, interstitiis levi- ter convexis coriaceis vi1x manifeste punctulatis; pygidio sparsim minus subtiliter (metasterno ad disci latera sat fortiter) punctulato; unguiculis sat magnis ut O. Kings, Har., ad basin abrupte curvatis. Long., 43 1.; lat. 24 1 The presence of a distinct raised edging along the base of the pronotum places this species in Group V. in my tabu- lation of Onthophagus (loc. cit.), where it falls beside O. Helmst, Blackb., and O. Koebele1, Blackb., from both of which it is distinguished by its very much larger size and imter alia by the absence of distinct punctures on its pronotum. The adoption of the sculpture of the base of the pronotum as the character on which to found primary divisions of Onthophagqus, although the most satisfactory that I can find, undoubtedly divides into separate groups some species that seem more suit- ed from their general appearance to be placed near each other, and the present insect furnishes a case in point, as the species to which it bears most resemblance are in Groups IV. and VI., especially King, Har., parvus, Blanch., Mur- chisont, Blackb., swhmuticus, Blackb., imermis, Macl., and muticus, Macl., from all of which, except Murchisoni, it is at once separated by the emarginate apex of its clypeus; while from Murchison, besides the character already mentioned, it differs, inter alia, by the structure of its hind claws. I am doubtful of the sex of the type of this insect, but consider it to be probably a female, as its front tibize are only mode- rately slender and the teeth of their external margin are extremely long and stout. North-Western Australia (from Mr. French); Carmod Bay. SYSTELLOPIDKS. I have recently received two species appertaining to this subfamily, of which one agrees with the diagnosis of the genus Trichelasmus, the other with that of Hnamillus. The distinet- ness, inter se, of those two genera is based upon the number of joints in the antennal flabellum,—a character that seems to me of no value at all from a generic point of view,—and I am convinced that they ought to be regarded as represent- ing only one genus. As, however, I have not seen either of the species for which the names were proposed it would be unwise actually to suppress either name at present and there- 235 fore I shall provisionally use both Dr. Sharp’s names for the species before me. Dr. Sharp says that his 7. pilieollis and B. striatus are excessively like each other ; a similar statement may justifiably be made regarding the two species I am about to describe. The question arises whether it may be that 7'r- chelasmus is the female of Lnamillus; but I think it must be answered in the negative, although certainly it seems a sus- picious circumstance that each genus should contain two ies, not very like each other superficially, but each ex- tremely like one in the other genus. The objection to re- garding the difference between these two aggregates as sexual are as follows (at any rate in respect of the two forms before me) :—/(a) In no species known to me of the Australian M/€lo- lonthides is there, strictly speaking, a difference between the number of joints in the antennal flabellum of the male and the female; where such a difference has been recorded it has been founded on the fact of the basal joint or joints of the flabellum in the female being so slightly prolonged as to have been (incorrectly) excluded from the flabellum, where- as of the species before me one has basal three and the other only basal two joints devoid of any inner prolongation what- ever; (2) in one of the forms before me the antepenultimate joint of the maxillary palpi is considerably longer than the penultimate ; while in the other the corresponding joints are of equal length; (c) the striation of the elytra is notably different in the two forms; /d)/ in the specimen before me which is evidently Sharp’s Trichelasmus the ventral segments are of the male type (shorter and more crowded together, with the apex of the pygidium slightly inclined towards the ven- tral segments) but its antennal flabellum is of the female type (if the two were considered to be sexes of one species), whereas in the specimen that is Sharp’s Hnamillus the ven- tral segments (on the supposition of the two forms being sexes of one species) would point to its being the female and the antennal structure to its being the male; (e) having be- fore me two specimens of the Trichelasmus form, I find that in one of the specimens there is a large, circular, deep fovea in the centre of the pygidium which may possibly be acci- dental, but which on the other hand not improbably in- dicates that I have both sexes of Trichelasmus before me. ENAMILLUS. #. Mauricet, sp. nov. Piceo-niger, pruinosus, antennarum stipite ferrugineo, elytrorum partibus 2 basalibus lete rufis; corpore subtus fronte pronoto scutelloque longe fulvo-pilosis ; labro subnitido levi leviter transverso, quam clypeus vix angustiori; clypeo subnitido crebre subtilius 236 ruguloso; fronte opaca obsolete rugulosa; palporum max- illarium articulo antepenultimo quam penultimus sat longiori; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 3° intus angu- lato, flabello magno 6-articulato arcuato articulis intus confertim breviter pilosis (articulis apicali basalique sub-_ tus circum ceteros intortis); prothorace opaco quam longiori duplo latiori, antice leviter angustato, supra obso- lete vix crebre punctulato, lateribus sat arcuatis, angu- lis omnibus rotundatis, basi utrinque sat fortiter sinu- ata; scutello permagno, ut pronotum punctulato; elytris opacis perspicue nec fortiter 9-striatis, striis punctulatis geminatim ordinatis, interstitiis sparsim obsolete punctu- latis sat planis; pygidio nitido sparsim subtilius punctu- lato; tibiis articis extus fortiter bidentatis, posticis bre- vibus valde incrassatis ; tarsis posticis sat robustis modice elongatis, articulo basali quam 2% paullo longiori; coxis posticis quam metasternum sat brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali postice haud emarginato. Long. 7 1.; lat. 32 1. The description of #. striatus, Shp., is so brief that it is not practicable to specify the distinctions between it and the present insect further than by mentioning that the larger size of #. Maurice: and the red colouring of the basal two-thirds of its elytra no doubt sufficiently distinguish it. I have called the front area (of the three areas into which the head is divided) the “labrum,” although I am doubtful whether that area is really a true labrum. Dr. Sharp calls it the labrum, while Lacordaire considers it a part of the clypeus. The sculpture of the front tibie (which have only a single external tooth above the apical projection) is not usual in the Australian Melolonthides. The Systellopides form a most interesting and isolated group of Lamellicornes. Central Australia (Musgrave Ranges). Taken by the explorer, R. P. Maurice. Type in 8.A. Museum. TRICHELASMUS. T'. basalis, sp. nov. Piceo-niger, pruinosus, antennarum sti- pite labro palpis elytrorum macula magna basali pedi- busque lete rufis; corpore subtus fronte pronoto scutel- loque longe fulvo-pilosis; labro nitido, fere levi, quam longiori plus quam duplo latiori, quam clypeus haud angustiori ; clypeo sat nitido crebre minus subtiliter rugu- loso; fronte opaciori quam clypeus vix aliter rugulosa ; palporum maxillarium articulis penultimo antepenulti- moque longitudine sat equalibus; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 3° intus haud angulato, flabello sat magno 5- articulato arcuato articulis intus confertim breviter pilo- Ee ae 237 sis (articulis apicali basalique subtus circum ceteros in- tortis) ; prothorace opaco quam longiori fere duplo lati- ori, antice sat fortiter angustato, supra acervatim leviter punctulato, lateribus sat arcuatis, angulis anticis bene definitis sat rectis posticis subrotundatis, basi utrinque sat fortiter sinuata; scutello magno opaco leviter vix crebre punctulato ; elytris opacis 4-striatis, parte dimidia laterali haud perspicue striata, striis nonnihill geminatim ordinatis, interstitiis planis confertim subtilissime sub- asperis; pygidio pernitido sparsim leviter punctulato ; tibiis anticis extus fortiter bidentatis posticis brevibus sat fortiter incrassatis; tarsis posticis modicis, articulo basali quam 2" sat longiori; coxis posticis quam meta- sternum sat brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali pos- tice haud emarginato. Long., 6 1.; lat., 341. The description of 7. pilicollis, Shp., is brief and does not mention many characters available for comparison with the present insect. The large red basal spot (occupying about a third part of the area of the elytron) on each of the elytra of 7. basalis is, however, no doubt a distinctive character ; and Sharp’s statement that the labrum of his species is “‘very large’ clearly indicates specific difference. I am disposed to think that I have both sexes of this species before me, not only because the large round forea on the pygidium of one of them seems not unlikely to be sexual, but also because the hind tarsi, in the specimen having the foveate pygidium, are distinctly (though not very much) more robust than in the other specimen. Western Australia: Esperance Bay (Mr. French). SAROTHROMERUS (gen. nov., Systellopidarum ). Mentum leviter transversum antice rotundatum ; palpi labiales breves, ad basin haud contigui, articulo apicali subco- nico; palpi maxillares robusti modice elongati, articulo 2° quam 3% sat longiori quam 44S sat breviori; labrum (? clypei pars antica) quam clypeus (? quam clypei pars postica) fere duplo angustius; oculi reniformes; sutura inter frontem clypeumque haud carinata; an- tennze 9-articulati, flabello 6-articulato, flabelli laminis (? maris solum) gracilibus intus setis robustis plurimis elongatis (his subtiliter pilosis) fimbriatis ; prothorax for- titer transversus; scutellum permagnum transversum ; elytra geminato-striata; corpus supra glabrum, subtus pilosum ; cox postice quam metasternum haud breviora. Type.—Enamillus Sharpi, Blackb. When I attributed this insect to Enamillus (Tr.R.S.8.A., 1905, p. 278) I had not seen a typical member of that genus, 238 and therefore mentioned the probability that a new generic name might be required eventually. Having now examined a genuine Hnamillus I find that my forecast was correct, as will appear from the above diagnosis. The antennz of this insect (perhaps of the male only) are truly remarkable, and might fitly be characterized as an exaggeration of the anten- ne of Diphyllocera. Each lamina of the flabellum is fringed with a row of robust elongate filaments or sete, and each of these filaments is itself clothed with fine erect pilosity. The first lamina is so shaped as to somewhat enfold some of the following laminz, which was my chief reason for placing the species in Hnamillus provisionally ; but having now examined a true Hnamillus I am able to say that the enfolding in the present genus is much slighter than in Hnamillus. SERICIDES. ATERMONOCHEILA (gen. nov., Sericidarum ). Mentum sat transversum, antice emarginatum ; palpi labiales modici, articulo apicali elongato gracili subfiliformi ; palpi maxillares sat elongatis sat gracilibus, articulo apicali subcylindrico; labrum haud manifestum; oculi magni minus nitidi subtilissime granulati, antice a cantho pro- funde incisi; antennz (speciel typice) 9-articulate, fla- bello 3-articulato (laminis maris quam articuli ceterl conjuncti vix brevioribus, pilis brevibus subtilibus erectis vestitis) ; clypeus antice truncatus; prothorax transver- SUS ; elytrorum interstitia alterna angusta levia, alterna lata haud levia; pedes graciles; tibie antice (speciel typice) extus bidentate, dente tertio supra medium vix manifesto; corpus totum setis brevibus crassis adpressis vestitum ; cox postice perbreves, quam metasternum fere triplo breviores. This genus must be placed near HYpholcis, from which it differs by, unter alia, its flat transverse mentum, the struc- ture of its labial palpi, its much more elongate legs (with claws elongate, slender, and devoid of quill-like appendages), and its elytra geminate-substriate, after the manner of Ser- tala. A hind tibia with its tarsus is considerably longer than the elytra. It should be added that the term “geminate- substriate’ requires qualification in respect of the elytra of the typical species of this genus. The subsutural stria is very distinct, but the alternate interstices on the remaining part of the elytra, while narrow and devoid of sculpture (as in Scitala), are not limited by defined striz. If additional species of this genus are discovered, it is probable that the elytral interstices will be found to be alternately wide with | sculpture and narrow without sculpture. But the character of the striation in other respects is probably not generic. al A. longipés, sp. nov., Mas. Ovata; sat nitida; tota setis bre- vissimis adpressis sat zqualiter minus crebre vestita ; opaca ; rufo-ferruginea, pedibus rubris; clypeo antice sat reflexo ; prothorace quam longiori ut 9 ad 54 latiori, an- tice minus angustato, lateribus modice arcuatis, angulis anticis vix acutis parum productis posticis subrotundatis, basi haud marginata utrinque sat fortiter sinuata; scu- tello sat elongato triangulari; elytris stria subsuturali impressis, interstitiis 4 levibus ornatis; tarsorum posti- corum articulo basali quam 2"S sat breviorl; segmento ventrali apicali perbrevi, postice haud emarginato. Long., 5 1.; lat. 22 1. This being the typical species of the genus, it is unneces- sary to repeat, in describing it, the characters already cited in the generic diagnosis. With the exception of the subsu- tural stria of the elytra the whole dorsal and under-surface of the body is devoid of sculpture other than the remark- ably evenly-distributed punctures, in which the sete are in- serted, and which are only visible when the setz have been removed. The sete are extremely short, closely adpressed, and somewhat coarse. Western Australia. Given to me by Mr. Jung. 239 SERICOIDES. CAULOBIUS. C. (Ocnodus) ferrugineus, Blackb. (Ty.R.8.S.A., vol. vi., p. 28). This species, attributed by me with an ex- pression of much doubt to Ocnodus, must be transferred to Caulobius. In my tabulation of distinctive characters of the species of Caulobius (loc. cit., 1906, p. 288), C. ferruguneus falls beside C. punctulatus, Blackb., from which it may be distinguished as follows : — D. Elytral interstices quite strongly con- vex ee i te ee. punctulatus, Blackb. DD. Elytral interstices not convex .... ferrugineus, Blackb. As the type of this species 1s unique and belongs to the S.A. Museum, I have not been able to subject it to the mani- pulation necessary to arrive at certainty as to the number of joints in its antenne; I am, however, almost sure that they are nine in number. HLAPLONYCHA. 4H. Griffith, sp. nov., Fem. Sat elongata; ovata; subnitida ; rufa, elytris antennis palpisque testaceo-brunneis ; leviter iridescens ; corpore subtus pedibusque longe pilosis; pal- porum maxillarium articulo 3° quam 2" et quam 44s sat breviorl; antennis 9-articulatis, articulo 4° quam 34s 240 sat breviori; flabello 5-laminato, lamella basali perbrevi ceteris quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti vix brevioribus; cly-. peo modice elongato, peralte reflexo, subtiliter sat ‘spar- sim punctulato; fronte subtiliter obsolete punctulata ; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice modice angustato, supra sparsim subtiliter sat obsolete punctu- lato, lateribus sat fortiter rotundatis anguste marginatis, basi utrinque parum sinuata, angulis posticis obtusis bene determinatis ; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, spar- sim sat subtiliter punctulatis; pygidio sparsim obsolete ~ punctulato, longitudinaliter subcarinato; tarsorum posti- corum articulo basali 2° longitudine sat equali. Long., 91.; lat., 4% 1. This species is readily distinguishable from the other described species of the genus. Its group characters place it in Group V., in which only two iridescent species have been pre- viously described (gigantea, Burm., and lucifera, Blackb.), from both of which it differs by, inter alia, its very much smaller size, the female antenne terminating in four equal (or nearly so) lamelle, the forehead scarcely visibly punctu- late, etc. It does not fit into my tabulation of Haplonycha (Tr.R.8.S.A., 1906, pp. 297, etc.), owing to my having used the word “large” in characterizing the aggregate “A” on p. 301. In order to place it, the following must be substituted for the first nine lines under Group V.:— A. Iridescent species. [Joint 3 of maxil- lary palpi conspicuously shorter than joint 2]. B. Frons conspicuously punctulate. C. Pygidium but little nitid, closely sculptured, especially near base’ gigantea, Burm.(?) CC. Pygidium brilliantly nitid, its puncturation extremely sparse lucifera, Blackb. BB. Frons scarcely punctulate se Griffithi, Blackb. AA. Non-iridescent species. Northern Territory ; Port Darwin. Given to me by Mr. H. Griffith. PETINOPUS. I have no further information to be recorded regarding this genus, and have not seen any more examples than those mentioned when I characterized the genus in 1898. The unique species is probably a very rare one. GLOSSOCHEILIFER. Since I described G. labialis (Tr.R.S.S.A., 1898, p. 37) I have obtained a male example of a second species of this curious genus, of which the following is a description : — i : G. addendus, sp. nov., Mas. LElongato-ovatus; subnitidus ; , supra fere glaber, corpore subtus pedibusque pilosis ; . rufo-testaceus, elytris dilutioribus; capite confertim sub- tilius, pronoto sat crebre sat equaliter subtiliter, elytris subfortiter sat crebre, pygidio sparsim sat obsolete punc- tulatis; clypeo autice rotundato minus fortiter reflexo ; prothorace postice marginato, antice angustato, sat trans- verso, lateribus fortiter arcuatis, angulis anticis parum productis subobtusis posticis rotundatis, basi utrinque subsinuata; elytris in disco sat (latera versus vix) mani- feste striatis, striis geminatis; tarsorum posticorum ar- ticulo basali quam 2% sat breviori. Long., 74 1.; lat., 3¢ 1. Australia; exact locality doubtful, probably Western Australia. Apart from colour, this species differs from G. labialis, Blackb., by, inter alia, the closer discal puncturation of its pronotum, the blunter and less prominent front angles of its prothorax, and the notably stronger and closer punctura- tion of its elytra. The joints of the flabellum of its an- tenne are not quite so long as the preceding joints of the antenne together. The hind coxe are very evidently, but not very much, shorter than the metasternum ; in G. labzalis they are a little shorter than in this species. 241 ScITALA. The positive identification of species described by the older authors in this genus is practically impossible without examination of types which are scattered through European collections, and some of which have probably perished. There is no other alternative than either to leave the genus as con- stituting an insoluble enigma or to deal with it, using one’s best judgment in making probable identifications, and pro- duce a monograph of its species, which is sure to contain many errors, but which will at any rate, I hope, prove to be intelligible and, therefore, capable of correction. At present there is comparatively little which can be affirmed either to be correct or to be incorrect, as a large number of the descriptions of species are incapable of identification with any insect in particular, and therefore I adopt the latter of the expedients mentioned above. If I can, with the aid of some knowledge of localities in which species occur, arrive at the probability of the insects on which the descriptions were founded and claim some at least of the old names for species which my notes may render identifiable, it will be possible for workers who may have access to such of the widely-scattered types as still remain to confirm or correct my identifications. . 242 It is extremely difficult to compile a satisfactory list of the names that can correctly be said to have been applied to insects that have been or at the time of description might have been with fairly good reason regarded as mem- bers of this genus. I have already discussed at some length (P.L.S.N.S.W., 1890, pp. 539, etc., and Tr.R.S.S.A., 1898, pp. 37, etc.) the highly intricate question of the generic vali- dity of the names Scitala and Sericesthis, and I will not now repeat the discussion but merely mention the conclusion I arrived at and to which I still adhere, viz., that they are both valid names, geminata, Boisd. (which is the type of Sericesthis, and is generally accepted as a later name for Melolontha prui- nosa, Dalm.) being generically distinct from the species for which Erickson founded the genus Scitala. Other species to which other generic names (JMZelolontha, Cotidia, and Anodon- tonyx) have been applied by their authors have been by some authors attributed to Scitala. As indicated below, Cotidia is probably synonymic with Heteronyx. Anodontonyx may rightly be treated as a valid genus. Of course none of the species in question are true members of the genus Melolontha. The name Scztala, then, must, in my judgment, be restricted (among the Australian Sericoides) to species possessing the following characters: Prosternal sutures normal, claws simple, membranous wings fully developed, femora not exceptionally elongate and slender, elytra normally elongate, eyes large convex and scarcely granulate, front tibie and antennal fla- bellum not of extraordinary structure, tarsi not bearing tufts of long soft hairs, labrum distinct from the vertical front face of the clypeus,“ front of clypeus neither emarginate nor with acute lateral angles, base of pronotum completely margined, elytra geminate-striate, hind tibie fairly elongate and not very strongly dilated at apex, sterna more or less subglabrous (never closely pilose), flabellum of antennz not in both sexes very (and subequally) short. The genus Scitala is in the ex- traordinary position of having been founded by Erickson for two species neither of which agrees in all respects with the generic diagnosis. J see no escape from this conclusion, since it appears impossible to doubt that two common Tasmanian insects which agree perfectly as species with the well-expressed descriptions of their author are really the two for which he proposed the name Scitala. Moreover, I had the opportunity some years ago of examining specimens which Professor Kolbe of Berlin lent me for inspection as the types of Erickson’s species, and I found them to be identical with the species to which I had attributed the names. Erickson says that the (1) Scitala pallidula, Macl., presents the only exception known to me in respect of this character. 243 antenne of Scitala are eight-jointed and that the flabellum of the male antenne is more than twice as long as that of the female antenne. As a fact, the antenne of S. sericans differ from the above description in being nine-jointed, and those of S. Janguida in the flabellum being subequal in the two sexes. I can only suppose that Erickson had of /anguida only the female before him and counted the joints in its antenne and assumed that the unseen male would differ from its female as male sericans differs from its female; and that he then as- sumed (without counting) that the antennz of sericans had the same number of antennal joints as the species which he regarded as congeneric with it. As sericans stands before languida in Erickson’s memoir—-and as the variation of its antenne from the generic diagnosis is only in respect of a character (7.¢., number of joints) which is certainly not gene- ric in the Australian Sericoides while the variation of lan- guida@ is in respect of a much more important character (1.¢., the sexual structure)—the right course appears to be to amend Erickson’s diagnosis by taking out from it “8-articulate,”’ and then regard sericans as the typical species. Burmeister, indeed, has already altered the generic diagnosis to make it include species with nine-jointed antennze but without notic- ing that the antennz of sericans are nine-jointed. Krickson’s generic diagnosis, moreover, is incorrect in its statement that the basal joint of the hind tarsi is shorter than the second joint. This is true of /angwida (more decidedly in the female than in the male), but in the male of sericans the basal joint is notably longer than the second. Burmeister reproduces this error in respect of the species (evidently hav- ing seen only females), but does not treat it as a generic cha- racter. Neither of those authors seems to have observed that the length of the basal joint of the hind tarsi varies sexually. Burmeister indicates that he has not seen the male of lan- guida, but nevertheless asserts (probably quoting from Hrick- son) that the flabellum of its antenne is very elongate. As a fact it is (as stated above) very short, and the species must be transferred to the genus Anodontonyx. ‘There is no definite assertion on the part of either author that he has seen the male of langwda. The number of names that have been applied to species under the name Scitala or under names that may reasonably be (or at any rate have been) considered equivalent to Scitala as that name has been at some time or other understood, is twenty-nine. As I consider that only nine of those names can stand as representing valid species (capable of identifica- tion) of the genus Scztala in the strict sense, it seems neces- sary to furnish notes on the names that I reject, as follows : — 244 Scitala anescens, Burm. There is nothing in the descrip- tion of this species that indicates distinction from a darkly- coloured specimen of S. sericans, Er., which varies extremely in colouring. Scitala armaticeps, Macl. I have examined the type of this insect in the Australian museum and find that it is a Neso, and differs from all the other described species of that genus by, ter alia, the remarkable elevated transverse carina that crosses its clypeus a little in front of the clypeal suture. Cotidia australis, Boisd. This name stands in Masters’ Catalogue as a synonym of Sericesthis (Scitala) pruinosa, Dalm., but that reference is certainly incorrect, as Boisduval says, “subtus pilis fulvis hirsuta.” There is in the Macleay Museum a specimen ticketed in Mr. W. S. Macleay’s writing, “Cotidia australis, Gory’—the name followed by an obscure mark (in very much-faded ink) which I think has been a note of interrogation. Unless the actual type can be referred to, this Sydney specimen is probably the most authentic in exis- tence, and it seems to agree fairly with Boisduval’s pseudo- description. It is a Heteronyx, and therefore need not be fur- ther discussed here. Melolontha chlorotica, Gyll. A label in the handwriting of Mr. W. S. Macleay, bearing the words “Ectoma chlorotica, Sch.,” is attached to a specimen in the Macleay Museum. Probably this specimen is a co-type, if not the actual type. As it is a Heteronyz I need not discuss it further here. Sericesthis genunata, Boisd. Described in six words. Burmeister makes it identical with Sericesthis pruinosa, Dalm., which is not a true Scitala. No guess, even at its genus, can be made from the description. Melolontha ciliata, Boisd. Referred by Burmeister and — Blanchard to Haplonycha, and reported by me under heading of that genus as incapable of identification. The Macleay Museum possesses a specimen ticketed in Mr. W. S. Macleay’s writing ‘“‘Sericesthis ciliata, McLeay.” It is almost certainly a co-type. Being a Heteronyx its further discussion will stand over to the next paper of this series. Sericesthis glabra, Blanch. Probably Scitala or Anodon- tonyx, but the description does not mention the structure of the antenne, and such as it is would apply to several species of either genus. Scitala impressa, Brenske. This is probably a later name for Neso (Scitala) armaticeps, Macl. The type of armaticeps agrees well with Brenske’s description. Scitala languida, Er. = Anodontonyz. Sericesthis micans, Blackb. = Anodontonyzx. Sericesthis nigrolineata, Boisd.= Anodontonyz. a 245 Scitala pallidula, Macl. I have examined the type spe- cimen in the Macleay Museum. Unfortunately there is no _ means of determining its sex. It seems to be a typical Scctala (the unusual shape of the clypeus being disregarded) if it be a female ; but if it is a male the short laminz (three in num- ber) of the antennal flabellum, together with the peculiar clypeus may justify Macleay’s suggestion that it “should per- haps form a new genus.” Its place in my tabulation (infra) indicates its principal characters. The exceptional shape of its clypeus makes it stand in Byrrhomorpha in my tabulation of Sericoid genera (Tr.R.S.S.A., 1898, pp. 32, etc.). Vide infra, under heading Byrrhomorpha. Sericesthis parvipes, Blackb. == Anodontonyz. Sericesthis planiceps, Blackb. = Anodontonyz. Sericesthis pruinosa, Dalm. The type of Sericesthis, as distinguished from Scztala. Sericesthis pruinosa, Blanch. Nom _ preocc.=Scitala rugosula, Har. Scitala pruinosella, Brenske = Sericesthis. Sericesthis pullata, Boisd. Described in seven words. Quite unrecognizable. “Hlytris subtomentosis” seems incon- sistent with its being a true Scitala. Scitala rugosula, Har. = Anodontonyz. Scitala suturalis, Macl.=Sericesthis, as distinct from Scitala. I have examined the type. Sericesthis cervina, Boisd. In the Macleay Museum is a specimen bearing a label on which Mr. W. 8S. Macleay wrote “Sericesthis cervina, Dej. N.S.W.” As it is probable that the specimen is a co-type, and as it agrees with Boisduval’s pseudo-description, there can be little doubt that it is the genuine thing. In former memoirs I have expressed the opinion that S. cervina, Boisd. could not be determined with- out inspection of the type. As the specimen in the Macleay Museum is a Heteronyzx I need not discuss it further here, but shall hope to do so in the next of this series of papers. To the nine species which I regard as at present consti- tuting the genus Scitala I have now to add ten new species. The following is a tabular statement of the characters by which the species of Scitaia can be distinguished inter se. A. Antenne consisting of only 8 joints. B. Hind angles of pronotum conspicu- ously explanate and upturned’ ....__ rugosiceps, Blanch.( ?) BB. ‘iss angles of pronotum not as C. Forehead non-rugulose and _ not nearly confluently punctured. D. Pronotum extremely convex longitudinally (i.e., viewed from the side) ... a ... convexicollis, Blackb. 246 DD. Pronotum normal. Dorsal surface non-iridescent RE. Dorsal surface iridescent. F¥. Pygidium less finely punc- tulate (almost as §S. seri- cans, Kr.) “es FF. Pygidium ‘notably more finely punctulate CC. Forehead confluently (at any rate on sides), and more or less rugulosely, punctulate. . Pronotum not or but little ru- gulose. E. Raised edging of pronotum considerably thickened and more elevated round hind angles. EE. Raised edging of pronotum not thickened nor more ele- vated round hind angles DD. Pronotum closely and _ very strongly scabrous 4 ae AA. Antenne consisting of 9 joints. B. Clypeus and forehead divided from each other by a deep furrow. C. Lateral edging of pronotum not- ably more raised in front than in middle, with lateral gutter much dilated in front. D. Raised edging of base of pro- notum notably more elevated at the ends than in _ the middle DD. Raised edging of base of pro- notum continuously fine. EK. Sides of prothorax normally arched (almost as in Serices- this pruinosa, Dalm.) : EB. Sides of prothorax much less strongly arched. ¥. Pygidium non-earinate ; size large (more than 7 1.) F. Pygidium longitudinally carinate (feebly in male, strongly in female); size small (about 5 1.) ; CC. Lateral edging of pronotum even, or all but even. D. Raised edging of pronotum ob- solete in middle of base. E. Elytral puncturation — sub- rugulose; colour black or piceous above, dark piceous beneath. F. Pygidium closely but not confluently punctulate FF. Pygidium confluently ru- culose ai a ey parallela, Blackb. Ino, Blackb. nemoralis, Blackb. dispar, Blackb. puncticollis, Blackb. erosa, Blackb. Nemesis, Blackb. rorida, Burm. (?) hospes, Blackb. calescens, Blackb. ambigua, Blackb. coxalis, Blackb. 247 EE. Elytral puncturation non- rugulose; colour chestnut, with eolden gloss... aureo-rufa, Blanch.( ?) DD. Raised edging of pronotum continuous across base. E. Front of clypeus’ gently emarginate the Pe oy Dalia, IUCr. EER. Front of clypeus’ widely ' rounded. F. Joints of flabellum of male antennee very much longer than joints 1-6 of antennze tobether ; head bicolorous sericans, Er. FF. Joints of flabellum of male antennze scarcely longer than joints 1-6 of antennze together; head unicolorous subsericans, Blackb. BB. Head continuously convex; clypeus separated from forehead only by a - ; suture (at any rate in male) ... juvenis, Blackb. It seems well to preface my descriptions of new species with a note on the vestiture of the under surface. -In the ease of some species I have described the sterna as ‘‘sparsim pilosa,” and have omitted mention of pilosity in describing others, calling them “subglabra.” I do not attach much im- portance to this character. The vestiture of the sterna is easily rubbed off, and I am disposed to think that there is more or less pilosity (never close and conspicuous as it is in Haplonycha) on the sterna of fresh specimens of all Scitala. In dealing with single specimens, the describer, however, can record only pilosity which is present, and of course specimens must in some instances be described which are not in perfectly fresh condition. S. rugosiceps, Blanch. My identification of this species is somewhat of the nature of a guess, as there is nothing in the description inconsistent with its being any one of rather numerous species. The probability, however, seems to be slightly in favour of rugosiceps having eight-jointed anten- nz (though without any definite statement to that effect). If that be the case, the insect to which I apply the name is the only one known to me that size locality and colour in com- bination would indicate as likely to be rugosiceps. I suspect that this insect is also the original of Burmeister’s description of S. sericans, Er. (though it is certainly not that species— inter alia because of its strongly punctulate scutellum), chiefly on account of its being, among the possible species known to me, that which agrees best with Burmeister’s statement that the tarsi of 8. sericans are devoid of sete, the sete of its tarsi being very inconspicuous and on the /ind tarsi almost wanting. (For the identification of the true S. sericans, Er., see my remarks above). 248 S. convexicollis, sp. nov., Mas (7). Ovata; sat convexa ; nitida; subglabra ; dilute brunnea, leviter aureo- -micans, protho- race pedibusque rufescentibus ; antennis 8- -articulatis, flabello quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti vix longiori ; palporum maxillarium articulo apicali ovali; clypeo confertim punctulato, antice sat fortiter reflexo-subtruncato ; fronte sat plana sparsius punctulata transversim impressa ; pro- thorace sat fortiter (fere ut 9 ad 54) transverso, fortiter gibbo, antice minus angustato, supra _ sparsius minus subtiliter punctulato, angulis anticis sat acutis posticis rotundato-obtusis haud _ explanatis, basi late rotundata; scutello punctulato; elytris leviter geminato-striatis, fere ut pronotum sed paullo magis crebre punctulatis; pygidio subplano sparsius subtiliter punctulato; segmentis ventrali- bus (lateribus exceptis) vix perspicue punctulatis, ultimo medio breviter lobato-producto; tibiis anticis extus 3-dentatis; tarsis posticis (exempli typici) subtus spar- sissime setosis, articulo basali quam 2" sat breviori; coxis posticis quam metasternum quinta hujus parte brevioribus. Long. 5 1.; lat. 22 1. Its strongly gibbous pronoban, distinguishes this species readily from all others (known to me) to which it bears much superficial resemblance. From its ventral characters I think it must be a male, but the structure of its antenne and hind tarsi is more suggestive of a female. The sexual characters and small size cause it to form (together with S. nemoralis, Blackb. and probably Zno, Blackb.) a distinct group in Scitala which may possibly be eventually regarded as another genus. N.S. Wales. I have no record of the exact locality in which [ captured it. S. nemoralis, sp. nov. Mas. (?). Subelongata, leviter ovata ; sat convexa; subnitida; subglabra; testaceo-brunnea, leviter iridescens, capite prothorace sternis pedibusque magis rufescentibus ; antennis 8-articulatis, flabello quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti subbreviori ; palporum maxillarium articulo apicali elongato-subcylindrico ; clypeo confertim punctulato, antice vix subtruncato, modice reflexo ; fronte sparsius subtilius punctulata, sat convexa ; prothorace sat fortiter (ut 9 ad 5) transverso, antice minus angustato, supra subtilius crebrius punctulato, angulis anticis sat acutis posticis rotundato-obtusis haud explanatis, bast late leviter rotundata; scutello punctulato; elytris sat fortiter geminato- -striatis, quam pronotum paullo magis crebre magis fortiter punctulatis ; pygidio sat convexo, crebre sat subtiliter punctulato, antice obtuse longitudi- 249 naliter carinato ; segmentis ventralibus sat obsolete punc- tulatis, ultimo medio breviter lobato-producto; tibiis anticis extus 3-dentatis; tarsis posticis (exempli typici) subtus minus sparsim setosis, articulo basali quam 2us sat breviori; coxis posticis quam metasternum quinta hujus parte brevioribus. Long., 5 1.; lat., 23 1. Near S. convexicollis, Blackb., and no ‘doubt the same sex as the type of that species, since the apical projection of the last ventral segment is almost sure to be sexual; at the same time the much greater convexity of the pygidium in this species is suggestive of sexual difference. This species differs from S. convexicollis in many respects besides that of its pro- notum being of normal convexity ; inter alia, the apical joint of its maxillary palpi is more slender and elongate, the punc- turation of all parts of its dorsal surface except the pygidium is much finer; that of its pronotum is evidently—and of its elytra considerably—closer ; its clypeus is more rounded in front ; the basal part of its pygidium is carinate; its surface is very evidently iridescent, and its tarsi are evidently more _setose beneath. New South Wales: I have Se tnntols no record of the exact locality. This and the preceding species are both, I believe, from localities at no great distance from Narrabri, or at any rate in that direction, where I collected some Scitale. S. Ino, sp. nov. Fem. Ovata; convexa ; subnitida; subglabra ; rufo-brunnea, iridescens; antennis 8-articulatis, flabello quam articuli 2-5 conjuncti vix longiori; palpis (exempl1 typici) carentibus; clypeo crebre punctulato, antice ro- tundato modice reflexo; fronte sparsim minus subtiliter punctulata, sat convexa; prothorace sat fortiter (ut 9 ad 5) transverso, antice minus angustato, supra sparsius minus subtiliter punctulato, angulis anticis sat acutis posticis obtusis (vix rotundatim) haud explanatis; basi late vix sinuatim rotundata; scutello punctulato ; elytris sat fortiter geminato-striatis, fere ut pronotum punctu- latis ; pygidio sat fortiter convexo crebrius minus subtili- ter punctulato; segmentis ventralibus sat obsolete punc- tulatis, ultimo late subtruncatim rotundato; tibiis anticis (exempli typici) extus obtuse subobsolete 3-dentatis ; tar- sis posticis (exempli typici) carentibus; coxis posticis quam metasternum quinta hujus parte brevioribus, Long., 5 1.; lat., 22 1. The specimen here described is unfortunately not in good condition, but as it is the only female that I have seen which can be grouped with the preceding two species it seems de- 250 sirable to place its characters on record. Its sexual differences seem to consist chiefly in the evenly-rounded front margin of the clypeus, its antennal flabellum a little abbreviated, its ventral segments more massive and convex, and the hind mar- gin of the apical ventral segment not produced in the middle. The obsolete sinuation of the external margin of the front tibiz is probably due to some accidental cause. As a species it differs from convesxicollis by its non-gibbose pronotum, its iridescent dorsal surface, much more conspicuously geminate striate elytra, etc., and from nemoralis by, wmter alia, the notably stronger and less close puncturation of its frons pro- notum and elytra. This species and the preceding two are very unsatisfactorily intermediate between Scitala and Ano- dontonyx, and bear much superficial resemblance to some species of the latter. They differ from both in the nature of their ventral sexual characters, from typical Scitale by the feebleness of the sexual characters of the antenne, and from Anodontonyx by the flabellum of the antenne being very evidently longer in both sexes. Queensland; Brisbane (Mr. F. M. Bailey). S. Nemesis, sp. nov. Ovata, sat elongata; sat convexa; minus nitida; subglabra, sternis femoribusque sparsim pilosis; testaceo-brunnea, nonnihil iridescens; antennis 9-articu- latis ; clypeo confertim rugulosius punctulato, antice ro- tundato, sat fortiter reflexo; fronte sat convexa, sat crebre minus subtiliter punctulata ; prothorace quam lon- giori ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice minus fortiter angustato, supra minus crebre minus subtiliter punctulato, lateri- bus sat arcuatis, margine laterali antice quam in parte mediana multo magis elevata, angulis anticis acutis posti- cis haud explanatis rotundato-obtusis, basi utrinque sat fortiter sinuata, margine basali angulos versus quam in parte mediana sat multo magis elevato ; scutello vix punc- tulato ; elytris sat fortiter geminato-striatis, sat fortiter sat crebre sat. rugulose punctulatis; pygidio sat convexo, minus crebre minus subtiliter punctulato ; segmentis ven- tralibus obsoletius punctulatis ; tibiis anticis extus 3-den- tatis; tarsis posticis subtus seriatim sat crebre setulosis, articulo basali quam 2"s paulo longiori. Maris antennarum flabello quam articuli 1-6 conjuncti paullo longiori, feminz articulis 2-6 conjunctis sat zquali; seg- mento apicali ventrali postice maris late elevato et emar- ginato; femine truncato minus fortiter elevato. Long. 7-8 1.; lat. 32-32 1. A typical Scitala; distinct from all others known to me with nine-jointed antennz by the raised lateral edging of its —— 251 protonotum being on the sides much more elevated in front than in the middle and on the base very evidently more ele- vated at the ends than in the middle. I have a female example of Scttala taken in South Australia which may re- present a distinct species, but does not seem to differ from the female described above, except in the considerably closer puncturation of its pygidium. South Australia; Fowler’s Bay. Also from Western Australia. S. rorida, Burm. This is one of the most difficult of iden- tification among the Scitale. The description (colour and size being disregarded) will fit almost any member of the genus having 9-jointed antenne. And, unfortunately, there is no indication—beyond the mention of Australia—of the locality in which this species occurs, unless a guess can be made from the mention of Mr. Melly as the donor of the type. Glancing through Burmeister’s descriptions of Australian species, it is noticeable that most of those to which Mr. Melly’s name is attached relate to insects that are found in New South Wales, and therefore the probabilities are in favour of the type of rorida having come from that State. I therefore select among the Scitala known to me from New South Wales that which best agrees in respect of size and colour with Burmeister’s description, and apportion the name to a species that I met with in the Blue Mountains: It is a large dark-coloured in- sect with bright iridescence, its entire dorsal surface being of about the same colouring as the head and pronotum of Seri- cesthis pruinosa, Dalm., and on referring to Burmeister’s de- scriptions of the two species I find that he uses exactly the same expression to characterize the dorsal surface of rorida and the head and pronotum of pruinosa—“dunkelbraun leb- haft wrisirend.” The probability, therefore, seems to be in favour of the correctness of my identification. It should be noted, however, that the species appears to be very variable in colour (some specimens otherwise indistinguishable being of a pale iridescent brown tint) and widely distributed, since I have taken in the neighbourhood of Adelaide examples that seem quite identical with those taken near Sydney. S. hospes, sp. nov. Sat late ovata; modice convexa; minus nitida ; subglabra, steriiis femoribusqueé sat sparsim pilo- sis; testaceo-brunnea, nonnihil aureo-micans, leviter iri- descens ; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo confluenter rugu- loso, antice late rotundato, modice reflexo ; fronte sat con- vexa, antice crebre ruguloso postice gradatim minus crebre nec rugulose punctulata ; prothorace quam longiori fere ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice sat fortiter angustato, supra 252 minus crebre minus subtiliter subinequaliter punctulato, lateribus parum arcuatis, margine laterali antice quam in parte mediana multo magis elevata, angulis anticis acutis posticis haud explanatis obtusis haud rotundatis, basi utrinque manifeste sinuata, margine basali equali; scu- tello haud punctulato; elytris geminato-striatis (maris exempli typici parum fortiter), crebre sat fortiter minus rugulose punctulatis; pygidio fere ut pronotum punctu- lato ; segmentis ventralibus obsoletius punctulatis ; tibiis anticis extus 3-dentatis; tarsis posticis subtus seriatim setulosis, articulis basalibus 2 inter se sat squalibus. Maris antennarum flabello quam articuli 1-6 conjuncti paullo longiori, feminz articulis 2-6 conjunctis sat equali; maris segmento apicali ventrali postice leviter elevato et emar- ginato, femine truncato vix elevato; maris quam femine pygidio multo magis convexo. Long. 74-8 1.; lat. 32-44 1. Closely allied to S. rorida, Burm. (?) ; possibly an Alpine race of that species. It is of more robust build and much less iridescent, with the sides of the prothorax very manifestly less rounded and more sinuate behind the middle (in both species there is more or less tendency to sinuosity, more appa- rent from some than from other points of view). The ge- minate-striation of the elytra is feebler, and their punctura- tion closer than in rorida (?). This form, even if not a valid species, is at any rate a very clearly distinguishable race-type. The specimens before me do not vary in colouring. Victorian Alps; near a place called ‘““The Hospice,’ 6,000 feet above the sea. S. calescens, sp. nov. Sat elongata, parum ovata; sat con- vexa; subnitida; subglabra; brunneo-testacea, fronte picea; leviter iridescens; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo crebre vix rugulose punctulato, antice late leviter sub- truncato sat fortiter reflexo ; fronte subfortiter vix crebre punctulata, sat convexa; prothorace quam longiori fere ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice minus angustato, supra sat fortiter vix crebre punctulato, lateribus bisinuatis, margine la- terali antice quam in parte mediana sat multo magis ele- vato, angulis anticis acutis posticis haud vel vix explanatis acute rectis, basi utrinque parum sinuata, margine basali angulos versus quam in parte mediana perspicue magis elevato; scutello vix manifeste (vel potius subtilissime) punctulato; elytris minus fortiter geminato-striatis sat fortiter minus crebre punctulatis; pygidio basin versus minus subtiliter nec crebre punctulato apicem versus crebre subtilius transversim ruguloso, longitudinaliter breviter plus minusve fortiter carinato; tibiis anticis 253 extus 3-dentatis ; tarsis posticis subtus seriatim setulosis, articulo basali quam 2" breviorl. Maris antennarum flabello quam articuli 1-6 conjuncti paullo longiori, feminz articulis 2-6 conjunctis sat equali; maris quam feminez tarsis manifeste longioribus; maris carina pygidiali parum perspicua in longitudinis medio sita, femine bene elevata basali; maris segmento ventrali apicali postice minus late emarginato et minus elevato, femine late subtruncato manifeste elevato. Long., 5-521. ; lat., 24-24 1. The sexual characters in this species are unusually well marked and numerous. The lateral outline of its prothorax resembles that of S. hospes, Blackb. Its small size distinguishes it from its near allies. The basal joint of its hind tarsi, not- ably shorter in both sexes than the second joint, is also very distinctive ; also the hind angles of its prothorax (viewed from above), sharply rectangular or even subacute. The hind coxe are evidently, but not much, shorter than the metaster- num. North Queensland (Mr. R. C. L. Perkins). S. ambigua, sp. nov. Ovata; convexa ; robusta ; minus nitida ; subglabra; picea vel rufo-picea, pruinosa vix iridescens ; antennis 9-articulatis; clypeo sat nitido, crebre leviter ruguloso, in medio sat gibbo, antice rotundato fortiter reflexo ; fronte subtiliter minus crebre punctulata, modice convexa; prothorace quam longiori ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice sat angustato, supra sat subtiliter sat crebre sub- obsolete punctulato, lateribus parum arcuatis, margine laterali sat zqualiter elevato sed sulco submarginali antice nonnihil dilatato, angulis anticis acutis posticis leviter obtusis vel obtuse rectis haud explanatis, basi utrinque sinuata, margine basali in medio obsoleto; scu- tello punctulato ; elytris minus fortiter geminato-striatis, sat crebre minus profunde nec subtiliter punctulatis ; coxis posticis quam metasternum parum_ brevioribus; pygidio crebre parum rugulose nec subtiliter punctulato sat convexo ; tibiis anticis extus 3-dentatis ; tarsis posticis subtus seriatim setulosis, articulo basali quam 2"5 sat longiori. Maris antennarum flabello articulis 1-6 conjunctis sat zquali- bus feminze quam articuli 2-6 conjuncti vix longiori ; maris quam feminz tarsis posticis paullo longioribus ; maris segmento ventrali apicali postice emarginato et elevato, feminz subsinuatim truncato nec elevato. Long. 7-84 1.; lat. 33-4 1. This species bears some resemblance to S. sevicans, Er., 254 but inter alia is considerably larger, with the basal edging of the pronotum obsolete in the middle of the base, and the antennal flabellum of the male very much shorter and not curved. The present: species differs also from S. anescens, Burm., which, however, is very likely to be identical with sericans, Er.) by the flabellum of the male antennz not being arched, as well as by its considerably larger size. New South Wales; Sydney, etc. In my collection; also from Messrs. Sloane and Lea. S. coxalis, sp. nov. Mas. (?). Ovata; convexa; robusta; minus nitida; subglabra, sternis femoribusque sparsim pilosis ; supra brunneo-rubra nonnihil velutina pruinosa parum iridescens, subtus fere sanguinea, antennis palpis- que pallide testaceis ; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello quam articuli 1-6 conjuncti manifeste breviori; capite ut S. ambigue, Blackb.; prothorace quam longiori duplo lati- orl, antice sat angustato, supra sat crebre sat leviter minus subtiliter punctulato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, margine laterali sat equaliter elevato, angulis anticis sat acutis posticis (superne visis) acute rectis haud explanatis, basi utrinque sinuata, margine basali in medio obsoleto ; scu- tello punctulato; elytris minus fortiter geminato-striatis, sat fortiter sat crebre punctulatis ; pygidio sat gibbo, con- fertim subgrosse ruguloso ; tibils anticis extus tridentatis ; tarsis posticis subtus seriatim setulosis, articulo basali quam 2¥S sat longiorl; coxis posticis quam metasternum haud brevioribus ; segmento ventrali apicali postice levi- ter emarginato leviter elevato. Long. 7 1.; lat. 32 1. The unique specimen described above is unsatisfactorily close to the preceding (S. ambigua), but differs in a manner that will not allow it to be regarded as a mere variety. Its pygidium (strongly, very closely, and almost coarsely rugulose, and also strongly gibbous) is quite distinct from that of either sex of S. ambigua; its prothorax, moreover, is very manifestly more strongly transverse, and has sharper hind angles. The velvety appearance of its dorsal surface is very likely to be due to the fresh condition of the specimen when killed. The antero-lateral parts of the metasternum are confluently rugu- lose (in ambigua punctured—by no means confluently). The unique type, in spite of its short antennal flabellum, must be considered a male on account of its gibbous pygidium and quite strongly emarginate apical ventral segment. New South Wales; probably from Mulwala (Mr. Sloane). S. aureorufa, Blanch. There is very little in the descrip- tion of this species to indicate any characters that are of spe- cific value; no mention, for instance, of the structure of the 255 antenne. At the time Blanchard wrote his description ‘‘an- tennz consisting of eight joints” stood as a generic character of Scita/a, and therefore it might be argued that its reference to that genus implied that its antenne have only eight joints. I know no Serta/a with eight-jointed antennz likely (from colouring and habitat) to be this species, but I have before me two males and a female of a Scztala with nine-jointed an- tenne from New South Wales (probably Blanchard’s locality), agreeing in size and colouring with the description, and not departing from the description in respect of the few other characters mentioned. My identification of this insect is pro- bably correct. Its distinctive structural characters are indi- eated in the preceding tabulation, and I may here add the information that in the male the antennal flabellum is slightly bent and slightly longer than the preceding six joints together, the apical ventral segment is only moderately emarginate and feebly elevated behind, and the pygidium strongly convex ; while in the female the antennal flabellum scarcely exceeds in length joints 2-6 together, the apical ventral segment is wide- ly subtruncate behind, and the pygidium is only feebly con- vex. In both sexes the tarsi are sparingly seriate-setulose beneath and (in the male even more than the female) the basal joint of the hind tarsi is notably longer than the second joint. S. sericans, Er. I have already discussed my identifica- tion of this species (vide supra), and have indicated some of its distinctive characters in the preceding tabulation. I will now add the following remarks:—I have examined a long series of specimens from Tasmania, Victoria, South Austra- lia, and New South Wales; the species varies considerably in colouring, Erickson’s description of it and Burmeister’s des- eription of his S. @nescens (which, as already remarked, may well be a variety of it) representing about the two extremes in this respect; in all the specimens that I have seen the fore- head is conspicuously and abruptly of dark colour in contrast with the clypeus (this is noted by Erickson, but not by Bur- meister) ; the elytra are not at all rugulose and (for a Scitala) are lightly and sparsely punctulate ; the flabellum of the male antennz is notably arched and very elongate, not surpassed in length by that of any Scitala known to me; the apical ven- tral segment of the male is feebly emarginate and feebly ele- vated behind (that of the female widely truncate and scarcely elevated) ; the pygidium is moderately convex, slightly more so in the male than in the female; the tarsi are seriate-setu- lose beneath ; the basal joint of the hind tarsi is evidently or scarcely longer than the second joint; the hind coxe are quite evidently, but not very much, shorter than the meta- 256 sternum. The variation in the relative lengths of the basal] two joints of the hind tarsi is not only sexual, and possibly points to there being more than one species among the spec- mens before me, but I can find no other character by which to divide them. S. subsericans, sp. nov., Mas. S. sericanti, Er. affinis; magis convexa; capite unicolori rufo; antennarum flabello recto quam articuli 1-6 conjuncti subbreviori ; elytris sub- rugulose magis crebre magis fortiter punctulatis; tarso- rum posticorum articulo basali quam 2¥8 sat multo lon- giori; cetera ut S. sericans, Er. Long. 6} 1.; lat. 32 1. The structure of the apical ventral segment is conclusive in determining the specimen before me to be a male, but the straight and very short flabellum of its antenne separates it strongly from the species discussed above as S. sericans, in which the female flabellum is not much (though quite de- cidedly) shorter than that of the present insect. The gene- ral resemblance between the two is so close that it seems un- necessary to describe this insect at full length; in all respects not specified in the above Latin diagnosis it agrees with par- ticulars given above as characterizing S. sericans. New South Wales (Mr. Sloane; probably from Mulwala). S. juvenis, sp. nov., Mas. Ovata; minus convexa; minus ni- tida; subglabra, sternis femoribusque sparsim pilosis; nigra, sat lete iridescens, elytris abdomine tibiisque pices- centibus, antennis palpis tarsisque rufis; antennis 9-arti- culatis, articulo 6° perminuto, flabello quam articuli 1-6 conjuncti paullo longiori; capite sat equali, crebre (postice paullo minus crebre) subtilius sat zqualiter punctulato, clypeo antice late rotundato sat reflexo ; prothorace quam longior1 ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice modice angustato, supra fere ut clypeus (in medio nonnihil magis grosse) punctu- lato, sat convexo, lateribus sat rotundatis, margine late- rali antice quam in parte mediana magis elevata, angulis anticis parum productis vix acutis posticis (superne visis) rectis haud explanatis, basi utrinque sinuata, margine basali in medio subobsoleto; scutello punctulato; elytris fortiter geminato-striatis, sat fortiter minus crebre punc- tulatis ; pygidio sat convexo, sat crebre sat fortiter punc- tulato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis; tarsis posticis (exempli typici) carentibus; coxis posticis quam meta- sternum multo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali postice late emarginato leviter elevato. Long. 4 1.; lat. aa An extremely isolated species in Scitala, but I can find no character on which to found generic distinction, unless it 257 be the peculiar form of the dorsal surface of the head in which the clypeus and forehead are scarcely distinguishable inter se, except by a fine (though well-marked) suture, and that does not appear sufficient. Its superficial resemblance is to Platydesmus, but inter alia its geminate-striate elytra are inconsistent with a place in that genus. The sixth joint of the antennz is extremely minute, and without careful exa- mination the antennz appear to have only eight joints. Victoria (Mr. Kershaw). ANODONTONYX. This genus was characterized by Dr. Sharp in 1890 in an American publication, “Insect Life” (vol. ii. p. 302). In the same year I described (P.L.S., N.S.W., pp. 546, etc.), under the generic name Sericesthis, three species which seem to be members of Dr. Sharp’s genus. I attributed them to Sericesthis on the assumption that Lacordaire, Burmeister, etc., were right in regarding the typical species of Scitala and Sericesthis as congeneric, Sericesthis being the earlier name of the two. Subsequent study has led me to the conclusion that the two names are both of generic value, and had I made that discovery at the time J described the species in question I should have attributed them to Scitala; I failed to do so only because the distinctness of the two genera had up to that time escaped notice, and I regarded Scitala as a mere synonym of Sericesthis, as I explained fully at the time (loc. cit.). Anodontonyx 1s very close to Scitala (as Dr. Sharp re- marks), and I am not at all confident that the discovery of new species intermediate in their characters will not even- tually be fatal to its claim to be regarded as a good genus; I do not think that I should venture to found a new genus for its species if Dr. Sharp had not done so. J have already (vide supra) described as Scitala Ino an insect which certainly departs from Scitala in the direction of Anodontonyx. Only one of the characters attributed to Anodontonyx seems to me really to distinguish its species from all the species of Scitala— viz., “(antennarum) clava perbrevi,’ and even this needs amplification by the additional statement that in Anodon- tonyx (so far as at present known) antennal sexual charac- ters are almost non-existent. However, as the genus has been formed, and its known species are certainly distinguish- able by the antennal character, I think it should be retained, at any rate provisionally. And here it seems necessary to remark that the two species described by Dr. Sharp as mem- bers of Anodontonyzx differ from each other by a character that Seems to me even more important from the generic point of view than the antennal structure, which (I have several times I 258 already expressed the opinion) is of singularly slight value among the Australian Sericoides. I refer to the vestiture of the sterna, which in the first species described (vigilans, the typical species I presume) are said to be “fere nuda,” while in the other species (//artz) they are called “‘parum hirsuta.” I have before me specimens in good condition which are either identical with the two species under discussion or extremely close to them (see notes below), and I find that in one of those species the sterna are almost without pilosity (more nearly glabrous than I believe any Scitala to be when in fresh con- dition), and in the other notably more pilose than in any Scitala known to me. It is therefore quite possible, —inasmuch as the pilosity in the Australian Sericoides certainly has its distinctive types running through whole series of species that are associated by other well-marked generic characters—that whether Anodontonyx stand as a good genus or not, another new generic name may eventually be considered desirable for the species Dr. Sharp described as A. Harti, and for some others closely allied to it, which are noted in the following pages. In respect of the already described species attributable to Anodontonyx, I think they have been described under eight names (one of which, 4. (Scitala) languida, Er., seems to be merely a synonym of A. (Sericesthis) nigrolineata, Boisd.), viz., Dr. Sharp’s two and the five that I have already indi- cated under the heading of Scitala (above). To these I now add nine additional. The following table will show charac- ters by which the species of the genus may be identified. The subsequent pages contain descriptions of the new species, and notes on those previously named. The descriptions of three species (A. vigilans, Shp., Harti, Shp., and rugosula, Har.) do not indicate characters that enable me to place those species in my tabulation. A. Antennz consisting of only eight joints. B. Joint 2 of antennze more or less globular, and considerably stouter than third joint. C. Hind corners of pronotum not ex- planate. Head non-pilose, un- less on margin. D. Prothorax at its widest not be- hind middle. E. Pronotum moderately closely and not particularly finely punctulate. F. Prothorax quite (or all but) twice as wide as long. G. Dorsal surface not iri- descent. 259 H. Intermediate tarsi nearly twice as long as their tibize ... planiceps, Blackb. HH. Intermediate tarsi very little longer than their tibie ... parvipes, Blackb. GG. Dorsal surface some- what brilliantly iri- descent ad ... gravicollis, Blackb. FF. Prothorax much less transverse... wt ... tetricus, Blackb. EE. Pronotum very finely and sparsely punctulate ... consanguineus,Blackb. DD. Prothorax at its widest be- hind middle. EK. Hind angles of prothorax from all points of view rounded or very obtuse. F. Lateral parts of pronotum very closely (almost con- fluently) punctulate ... ereber, Blackb. FF. Lateral parts of pronotum much less closely punctu- late. G. Body entirely atro-cya- neous (strongly irides- : cent) .. micans, Blackb. GG. Body ferruginous or testaceous. H. Hind angles of pro- thorax quite distinct, though strongly obtuse chalceus, Blackb. HH. Hind angles of pro- fiorax quite rounded) _ Oo pF indignus, Blackb. EE. Hind angles of prothorax rectangular (viewed from ; above), scarcely blunted ... rectangulus, Blackb. CC. Hind corners of prothorax quite é strongly explanate. Head pilose nigrolineata, Boisd. BB. Joint 2 of antenne quite slender (as the “304 joint)... ... antennalis, Blackb. AA. Antenne consisting of nine joints ... hirticeps, Blackb. A. Harti, Shp. This species must be extraordinarily close to my A. (Sericesthis) planiceps, which was described almost simultaneously with it. Nevertheless as Dr. Sharp states that the pygidium of Harti is “smooth towards the apex,” and I find no trace of such a character in any of the numerous speci- mens before me of planiceps, I am obliged to treat them as distinct species. And here I may remark that, in spite of the apparent likelihood of the female differing from the male as indicated by Dr. Sharp, I am by no means satisfied that the specimens which he regarded as females of Harti are not really examples of another species. I have specimens of A. planiceps ote no definite tarsal differences inter se, which seem to 260 be certainly distinct in point of sex, differing in the structure of the pygidium and apical ventral segment. If Dr. Sharp were right concerning the sexes of A. /arti it is probable that my A. (Sericesthis) parvipes would have to be deemed the female of A. planiceps, but I hesitate much to accept this conclusion because, in addition to the objection arising from the presence of differences that can hardly be non-sexual among my speci- ments of planiceps, I find differences between that species and parvipes which do not seem likely to be sexual, especially in ‘ the maxillary palpi (the penultimate joint of which is in plani- ceps notably longer than in parvipes). If it were not for the irreconcilable difference between the sculpture attributed by Sharp to the pygidium of Hart: and the sculpture of the cor- responding part in planiceps and parvipes, I should feel little doubt that the latter two are identical with what Sharp de- scribed as male and female of //artt. I may add, however, that I am unable to understand Sharp’s statement that the prosternum of Harti has only a “single” carina behind the cox, since that seems to be intended as a character to dis- tinguish it from A. vigiluns, in which the prosternum is said to have a “prominent acute lamina” behind the coxe, with no reference to the presence of two or more carine. A. planiceps has a single small cariniform projection behind its coxe. A. vigilans, Shp. I am regretfully compelled to disregard this species, as incapable of identification. The diagnosis fur- nished by its author would apply to at least half-a-dozen species known to me, and there is nothing in the appended note which distingushes it from any one of four of the species before me. As, however, Sharp makes no mention of his species being pruinose or iridescent, and states that the hind angles of the prothorax are rounded off—and in the only non- iridescent species known to me and resembling vigi/ans in size and colouring the hind angles of the prothorax are not round- ed off—it is probable that I have not seen A. vigilans. Of the species known to me, A. chalceus, Blackb., is nearest to agreement with Sharp’s description, and were it not for its iridescence I should name it “wigilans, Shp. (?).” I do not find it to be the case with these insects that iridescence fades with age. fe gravicollis, sp. nov. Ovatus; convexus; modice nitidus; subglaber ; purpureo-brunneus supra lzte iridescens, clypeo antennis palpis pygidio pedibus corporeque subtus brun- neo-testaceis; antennis 8-articulatis, flabello perbrevi; clypeo confertim, fronte sat crebre, minus subtiliter punc- tulatis ; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice minus angustato (latitudine majori superne visa nonnihil ante medium sita), supra subfortiter sat crebre (latera 261 versus confertim subtilius) punctulato, vix perspicue eanaliculato, lateribus minus rotundatis, angulis anticis vix acutis minus productis posticis (superne visis) obtuse rectis, basi marginata utrinque parum sinuata; scutello punctulato; elytris geminato-striatis, sat crebre subfor- titer punctulatis ; pygidio subfortiter vix crebre (in parte mediana fere levi) punctulato; tibiis anticis fortiter tri- dentatis; tarsis posticis minus elongatis minus robustis, articulo basali 2° longitudine sat zquali; coxis posticis quam metasternum multo brevioribus ; segmento ventrali apicali postice truncato. Long., 4% 1.; lat., 22 1. The most distinctive characters of this species (in compari- son with its immediate allies) seem to be the purplish-red tone of colour of its dorsal surface—perhaps not constant—its bright iridescence, and the form of its prothorax (compara- tively wide in front, with the greatest width slightly in front of the middle). When I described A. micans (Pr. Lin. Soc., N.S.W., 1890, p. 546), I unfortunately confused this species with it as a colour var., and wrote the diagnosis with a view to indicate a much greater variety of colouring than I have now any reason to think can be found in that species. The specimen described was one of those called in the appended note “a bright blue insect.” Consequently I have found it necessary to provide a correction of the description of A. mr- cans (vide infra). I believe the type of A. gravicollis to be a female. South Australia. A. tetricus, sp. nov. Ovatus vel subovalis; modice convexus ; minus nitidus; metasterno longe minus crebre setoso; niger vel piceo-niger, antennis palpis tarsis et (nonnul- lorum exemplorum, ? alterutrius sexus) tibiis anticis rufis; antennis 8-articulatis, flabello perbrevi; clypeo con- fertim subrugulose, fronte sat crebre, subfortiter punctu- latis; prothorace quam longiori ut 8 ad 5 latiori, antice sat angustato, supra sat crebre subfortiter punctulato, vix perspicue canaliculato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, an- gulis anticis vix acutis parum productis posticis (superne visis) rectis, basi marginata utrinque leviter sinuata; scutello punctulato; elytris fortiter geminato-striatis, crebre sat fortiter punctulatis, interstitiis inter striarum paria sat fortiter convexis; pygidio minus crebre vix for- titer punctulato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis; tarsis elongatis robustis, posticorum articulo basali quam 2vs vix breviori; coxis posticis quam metasternum multo bre- viori; segmento ventrali apicali postice leviter vel vix emarginato. Long., 44-53 1.; lat., 24-22 1. Of this insect five specimens are before me, but I can find, 262 no differences among them that I can confidently affirm to be sexual. Some examples are decidedly ovate, others scarcely dilated behind the middle; in four the front tibie are red, in one black ; in three the pygidium is distinctly more convex than in the two others; in three the apical ventral segment is de- cidedly emarginate behind, in two scarcely emarginate. The species is very distinct from planiceps, Blackb., not only by its colouring, but also by, inter alia, the much less strongly rounded sides of its pronotum, the much more strongly convex interstices between the strie of each pair of geminate striz, and the maxillary palpi (especially the penultimate joint) notably shorter. New South Wales: Bathurst, Jenolan Caves, etc. A. consanguineus, sp. nov. Ovalis; sat convexus; pronoto sparsim subtiliter punctulato, basi utrinque vix sinuata; scutello vix perspicue punctulato; elytris minus crebre punctulatis; cetera ut A. tetricus, Blackb. Long., 5 L; lat., 24 1. It seems unnecessary to repeat the characters which this species shares with A. tetricus; the diagnosis of that species correctly describes the present one except in respect of the characters noted above, which are strongly marked ones. The front tibize of this species are red and the apical ventral seg- ment is scarcely emarginate behind. The punctures of the pronotum in this species are very much finer than in A. planiceps, Blackb.; in A. tetricus they are a trifle coarser and stronger than in the latter. New South Wales: Bathurst. A. creber, sp. nov. Leviter ovatus (subparallelus) ; convexus ; sat nitidus; subglaber; ferrugineus; supra sat irides- cens; antennis 8-articulatis, flabello perbrevi; clypeo confertim, fronte sat crebre, sat subtiliter punctulatis; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra sat subtiliter sat crebre (latera versus fere confluenter) punctulato, antice leviter canaliculato, lateribus sat rotundatis, angulis anticis acutis sat produc- tis posticis nullis, basi marginata utrinque leviter sin- uata; scutello punctulato; elytris geminato-striatis, crebre minus fortiter punctulatis; pygidio crebre vix for- titer punctulato; tibiis anticis extus fortiter tridentatis; tarsis posticis modicis minus robustis, articulo basali quam 28 sat breviori; coxis posticis quam metasternum multo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali transversim concavo postice late rotundato (fere subtruncato). Long., 5.1.9 labs 263 Less ovate and a little more elongate than A. indignus, Blackb., and easily distinguishable from it by the notably finer and closer puncturation of its head pronotum and elytra. The elytral punctures on the interval between the subsutural stria and the next pair of strie would, if placed in regular rows, form five rows in this species, but would form only four rows in ¢ndignus. On account of its somewhat less robust tarsi I think it likely that the type of this species is a female. South Australia: near Adelaide. A. (Sericesthis) micans, Blackb. As noted above under the heading of A. gravicollis, sp. nov., I find it necessary to amend the description of A. micans as follows:—For “rufa, capite prothorace elytrisque rufo-cceruleis iridescentibus,” read “‘atro-ceruleus, lete iridescens, palpis antennis tarsisque rufescentibus” ; and in the last line of the diagnosis, to “trun- cato”’ add ‘‘vel leviter emarginato.” A. chalceus, sp. nov. Ovatus; convexus; sat nitidus; subgla- ber; rufo-testaceus, supra iridescens; antennis 8-articu- latis, flabello perbrevi; clypeo confertim, fronte minus crebre, parum fortiter punctulatis; prothorace nitido, quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra subfortiter sat crebre (latera versus magis crebre) punctulato, parum manifeste canaliculato, lateribus sat rotundatis, angulis anticis acutis sat productis posticis (superne visis) obtusis, basi marginata utrinque manifeste sinuata; scutello punctulato; elytris geminato-striatis, sat crebre subfortiter punctulatis; pygidio sat crebre vix fortiter punctulato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis; tar- sis posticis modice elongatis sat robustis, articulo basali quam 2S nonnihil breviori; coxis posticis quam metaster- num multo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali pos- tice leviter emarginato. Long., 6 1.; lat., 3 1. Rather brightly iridescent, the iridescence in some lights having a brassy tone. Among the species bearing a general resemblance to it in size colouring and vestiture this species is distinct by its pronotum at its widest evidently behind the middle (viewed from above) and having puncturation which becomes only moderately closer and finer near the lateral mar- gins; also by its pronotum being notably more nitid than in its immediate allies. I am doubtful of the sex of the type. The decidedly emarginate apex of the apical ventral segment, and the somewhat elongate and robust hind tarsi, perhaps in- dicate its being a male. I have two specimens of narrower and less ovate build and having somewhat less robust tarsi, but not otherwise noticeably different, which may be the other sex, but it is quite possible that they represent another species. 264 In this species the prothorax is evidently less convex than in most of its allies (¢.g., creber, Blackb., gravicollis, Blackb.) which may be readily seen if specimens be looked at from in front, and which moreover causes the pronotum viewed from the side to appear not so high from the lower to the upper (as seen from that point of view) outline as in ereber, ete. New South Wales: Braidwood. A. indignus, sp. nov. Ovatus; convexus; modice nitidus; sub- glaber ; ferrugineus; supra sat iridescens; antennis 8-ar- ticulatis, flabello perbrevi; clypeo confertim subrugulose, fronte sat crebre, sat fortiter punctulatis; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra sat crebre (nonnihil acervatim) sat fortiter punctulato, antice leviter canaliculato, lateribus sat rotundatis, an- gulis anticis acutis sat productis posticis nullis, basi mar- ginata utrinque leviter sinuata; scutello punctulato; elytris geminato-striatis, fere ut pronotum sed nonnihil subserlatim punctulatis; pygidio crebre subfortiter punc- tulato; tibiis anticis extus fortiter tridentatis; tarsis pos- ticis modicis minus gracilibus, articulo basali quam 2s manifeste breviori; coxis posticis quam metasternum multo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali transversim leviter concavo, postice late rotundato. Long., 5 1.; lat., 2 1. This species is distinguishable among its immediate allies by the hind angles of its prothorax entirely rounded off, in combination with comparatively strong and not very close puncturation of its pronotum, which is about as close and fine as—but a little stronger than—the corresponding sculp- ture in the species which I regard (and which stands generally in collections) as Sericesthis (Melolontha) pruinosa, Dalm. I am in some doubt of the sex of the specimens before me, but am disposed to think them males on account of the compara- tive stoutness of the tarsi, which are certainly more slender in some specimens of at least one allied species. South Australia: taken, I think, near Adelaide. A. rectangulus, sp. nov. Elongatus, vix ovatus; sat convexus; modice nitidus; subglaber ; ferrugineus, supra leviter iri- descens; antennis 8-articulatis, flabello perbrevi; clypeo confertim, fronte minus crebre, parum fortiter punctula- tis; prothorace nitido, quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice minus angustato, supra subfortiter sat crebre (latera versus paullo magis subtiliter paullo magis crebre) punctulato, vix perspicue canaliculato, lateribus modice arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis modice productis posticis bene determinatis obtusis (superne visis, fere rectis), basi 265 marginata utrinque parum sinuata; scutelio punctulato ; elytris geminato-striatis, sat crebre subfortiter punctula- tis; pygidio sat crebre subfortiter punctulato; tibiis anti- cis extus tridentatis; tarsis posticis modicis, articulo basali quam 2"5 manifeste breviorl; coxis posticis quam metasternum sat multo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali leviter emarginato. lLong., 44 1.; lat., 241. Easily distinguishable from its near allies by the well-de- fined hind angles of its prothorax, which, viewed from above, seem to be almost right angles, but when looked at from the side are seen to be in reality decidedly obtuse. I have four specimens which I took flying in the evening; all are in good condition. [I can find no difference likely to be sexual among them, unless it be that one of them is more ovate and a little less elongate than the others. The body beneath is very nitid, the metasternum with only a few fine hairs. New South Wales: Blue Mountains. A. (Scitala) langwida, Er. (?=Sericesthis nigrolineata, Boisd.). In a former memoir (Pr. Lin. Soc., N.S.W., 1890, pp. 541, etc.) I have discussed the various species which Bois- duval named (the word “‘described” is hardly applicable) under the undescribed generic name Sericesthis, and in that memoir I indicated (as was then the case) that I had no specimen be- fore me which I could confidently identify with A. languida, Er., but mentioned that previous authors had made the name a synonym of A. nigrolineata, Boisd. Having subsequently seen, as noted under Scitala, the type of S. languwda, Er., I am able to say that the synonymy cited is probably correct, for the following reasons. There are two species, and only two, known to me which the very short description of nigroli- neata will fit, viz., that which is accepted (correctly, I believe), as Sericesthis (Melolontha) pruinosa, Dalm., and Anodon- tonyx (Scitala) languida, Er. That the latter is the species Boisduval described rests upon the authority of Blanchard. Now Blanchard presumably had before him the type of Bois- duval’s species, but certainly not that of Jangwida, nor of 8. pruinosa, Dalm. He, however, had before him Tasmanian specimens of an insect which he regarded as languida, Er There can be little doubt that he was right in so regarding them, so far as I can judge, inasmuch as I have never seen S. pruinosa, Dalm., from Tasmania, and should probably have done so if it occurred (at any rate commonly) in Tasmania; and, moreover, if it had been before Blanchard he could not possibly have supposed it to be Janguida, Er. The conclusion, therefore, seems unavoidable that the very recognizably-des- eribed A. /anguida must be regarded as identical with the 266 scarcely-described A. nigrolineata of Boisduval, and that the latter name must stand. (2) A. (Sericesthis) nigrolineata, Boisd. This is a common species and seems to be widely distributed, as I have speci- mens that seem to be specifically identical from various locali- ties in Tasmania, Victoria, and New South Wales. I can find no well-defined sexual differences among them; some, however (which I take to be males) are of subparallel elongate form with the ventral segments much flattened, while others are somewhat strongly ovate in form, with ventral segments more convex. A. hirticeps, sp. nov. Ovatus vel sat parallelus; convexus; minus nitidus; subglaber, sed capite antice setis elonga- tis erectis vestito ; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello perbrevi ; clypeo confertim, fronte sat crebre, subfortiter punc- tulatis; prothorace quam longiori vix fere duplo latiori, antice sat angustato, supra minus crebre parum subtiliter nec profunde punctulato, vix perspicue canaliculato, lateribus parum arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis posticis acute rectis, basi marginata utrinque parum sinuata; scutello punctulato ; elytris geminato-striatis, fortiter fere subrugulose punctulatis; pygidio sat crebre minus for- titer punctulato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis; tarsis posticis modicis, articulo basali quam 24S manifeste bre- viori; coxis posticis quam metasternum multo breviori- bus; segmento ventrali apicali postice haud vel vix emarginato. Long., 42-54 1.; lat., 2-24 1. This is the only Anodontonyx known to me with antenne of 9 joints. Its resemblance is to A. nigrolineata, Boisd., from which it differs, independently of its antennez, by, inter alia, its very evidently less rugulose elytra. I do not find any definite sexual differences among the four specimens before me. New South Wales: Sydney. A. antennalis, sp. nov. Leviter ovatus; minus convexus; parum nitidus; subglaber, clypeo (exempli typici) setis elongatis erectis perpaucis vestito; noc fortiter minus confertim, fronte sparsim subtiliter, punctulatis; anten- nis 8-articulatis, articulo 2° gracili sat elongato, flabello perbrevi; palporum maxillarium articulo apicali quam penultimus vix dimidio longiori; prothorace quam long- iorl fere duplo latiori, antice minus angustato, supra crebre subtiliter (latera versus, confertim) punctulato, haud (exempli typici) canaliculato, lateribus leviter ar- cuatis, angulis anticis posticis (superne visis) acute rec- (2) Vide infra (Note A). 267 tis, basi marginata utrinque leviter sinuata; scutello punctulato; elytris geminato-striatis, sat fortiter sat crebre fere subrugulose, punctulatis; pygidio confertim fortius subrugulose punctulato; tibiis anticis extus tri- dentatis; tarsis posticis sat elongatis, articulo basali quam 2"S sat breviorl; coxis posticis quam metasternum duplo brevioribus ; segmento ventrali apicali postice mani- feste emarginato. lLong., 4 1.; lat., 2 1. This species is an extremely isolated one in respect of several characters. Its short maxillary palpi (especially the short apical joint) are remarkable. Its antenne are quite unique in the genus (if not among all the Australian Sericoi- des), the second joint being (not a part of the scape, which consists only of the basal joint, but) evidently a part of the stipes, and not at all thicker than the 3rd joint. The general appearance is that of a very small specimen of A. nigrolineata, Boisd. I believe the type to be a male. New South Wales: near the National Park. NOSPHISTHIS. I have not anything to be added to my remarks on this genus in Tr. R. Soc., 1898, pp. 38, 39; but have recently re- ceived a second species of which the following is a description. NV. Perkinsi, sp. nov. Sat nitida; testacea, supra magis ferru- ginea; pilis elongatis fimbriata; corpore subtus pygidio- que pilosis; capite confertim rugulose punctulato, clypeo late truncato-rotundato antice fortiter reflexo; palporum maxillarium articulo penultimo quam antepenultimus sat multo breviori; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello perbrevi quadrato 3-articulato; prothorace sat fortiter transverso, minus convexo, antice fortiter angustato, perspicue cana- liculato, quam caput multo sparsius punctulato, lateri- bus arcuatis, angulis anticis vix acutis posticis obtusis, basi utrinque leviter sinuata; scutello punctulato ; elytris equaliter sat fortiter striatis, interstitiis leviter convexis fortius vix crebre punctulatis; pygidio subnitido, con- fertim subtiliter subaspere punctulato; tarsis sat brevi- bus, articulo apicali inter unguiculorum baseos lamina utrinque instructo, posticorum articulo basali quam 24s sat breviori; coxis posticis brevibus. Long., 54 1.; lat., 24 1. Notably smaller and of narrower form than JV. parvicor- ms, Blackb. The type is much paler in colour. The pro- thorax is much less convex transversely (?.¢e., much less decli- vous on the sides). The elytra are more regularly striate (in parvicornis there is an evident want of evenness in the sub- 268 lateral strie making some of the interstices wider in some than in other parts of their iength.). The elytral interstices are more decidedly convex, the pygidium more nitid and by no means so extremely closely punctulate, and the penulti- mate joint of the maxillary palpi is shorter (in parvicornis longer) than the antepenultimate joint. North Queensland. Sent by Mr. Perkins. FRENCHELLA. Although this genus was founded so recently as in 1892, species referable to it seem to have been described under other generic names by most of the earlier authors. It is undoub- tedly a near ally of Haplonycha, but the entirely different character of the elytral sculpture in its species from that of the species of Haplonycha (with no intermediate forms, so far as I have observed) appears to me fully to warrant a separate generic name. An elytral sculpture uniform in kind un- questionably accompanies persistent structural characters of apparently greater importance through all the extensive genera of Australian Sericoides, from which it may fairly be concluded that a particular type of elytral sculpture is generic. If Frenchella were included in Haplonycha the genus so constituted would furnish the only instance known to me of any considerable variety in kind (as distinguished from degree) in elytral sculpture within the limits of a genus. The assignment to Frenchella of species described by the early authors is a matter of considerable difficulty and calls for a separate note on each of those which there seems to be any ground for referring to the genus. Haplonycha rugosa, Burm. On full reflection I think that this is most probably the species that I called Frenchella aspericollis, and I therefore propose to sink my name in favour of Burmeister’s. Haplonycha striateila, Blanch. The phrase “elytris trans- versim confluenter punctatis” in Blanchard’s description fits no Australian Sericoid species known to me except Diphyllo- cera kirbyana, White. Unfortunately Blanchard gives no information beyond “N. Holland” as to the habitat of his species and no statement of size except that it is “smaller than H. obesa and scutalis.” The description of H. striatella fits the female of D. kirbyana very well except that the scutellum is called “leve,”’ which it is not in kirbyana, but nevertheless I believe it to be that insect. I cannot find any mention of D. kirbyana under that name in Blanchard. Haplonycha iridescens, Blanch. I identify this species with confidence. Its characters will be found indicated in the following tabulation. ¥ A. Antenne consisting of only eight joints. B. Pronotum punctured much less close- ly than the head hispida, Blackb. BB. Bee atti (especially ‘on the lateral parts) punctured scarcely or not less closely than head. C. Pygidium not distinctly carinate, 269 and scarcely rugulose approximans, Blackb. CC. Py eal very strongly carinate and rugulose rugosa, Burm, AA. Antenne consisting of nine joints. B. Hind angles of prothorax sharply defined. C. Head and pronotum clothed with long erect fine hairs ved ... hirticollis, Black). CC. Head and pronotum glabrous (unless at margins). D. Puncturation of elytra rugulose and somewhat close . iridescens, Blanch. DD. Puncturation of elytra non- rugulose and much less close _..._ sparsiceps, Blackb. BB. Hind angles of prothorax rounded off, or very obtuse. C. Prothorax considerably less than twice as wide as long ® lubrica, Blackb. CC. Prothorax fully aes as wide as lone’... a5 ta ae ... calorata, Blackb. F. calorata, sp. nov. Ovata, convexa; parum nitida; supra subglabra; subtus sat pilosa; antennis 9-articulatis, fla- bello modico quam articuli 2-6 conjuncti sublongiori ; capite pronotogue confertim minus fortiter sat rugulose sat zqualiter punctulatis; prothorace quam _ longiori duplo latiori, antice modice angustato, supra haud cana- liculato, lateribus sat fortiter rotundatis, angulis anticis acutis modice productis posticis rotundatis, basi margin- ata utrinque vix manifeste sinuata; scutello confertim subtilissime punctulato; elytris obsolete striatis, inter- stitiis latis planis vix crebre sat subtiliter punctulatis ; pygidio confertim subtilissime punctulato; tibiis anticis fortiter dilatatis extus obtuse bidentatis; tarsis posticis minus elongatis, articulo basali quam 2¥8 sublongiori ; coxis posticis quam metasternum multo brevioribus; seg- mento ventrali apicali truncato. Long., 6 1.; lat., 34 1. I feel some hesitation in placing this species in Frenchella, I have no doubt the unique type is a female, and it is quite likely that the discovery of the male will eventually involve the creation of a new genus for its reception. I do not, how- ever, find any definite character in the female inconsistent with its being a Frencheila except the remarkable structure of its front tibie, which are those of a Pachygastra, from which genus its large head, broad clypeus and elytral strie non-geminate, inter alia, 270 separate it very widely. In my tabulation of the Australian Sericoid genera (Tr.R.S., S.A., 1898, pp. 32-34) I relied upon the remarkable form of the front tibie as a generic character, which renders it necessary for me to add (vide infra) a note on Pachygastra calling attention to this insect which, in the absence of the male, I must regard as a Frenchella presenting a very exceptional character. It should be noted that in this species the apical joint of the labial palpi, without differing very strongly from the Frenchella type, is certainly less elongate and cylindrical than in the other species known to me of the genus. North Queensland. Sent by Mr. Koebele. PLATYDESMUS. The species of this genus have been found as yet (so far as I know) only in New South Wales and Queensland. They are somewhat closely allied to Prenchella, but are readily dis- tinguishable from that genus by the structure of their labial palpi. They are for the most part notably smaller than the species of Prenchella and are insects of less robust build, with the antennal sexual characters—so far as known—more pro- nounced, the flabellum of the male, at any rate, being not- ably longer, and the antennal difference between the sexes being in the one species of which the female is known very much greater. The antennz in all the known species consist of nine joints and in all except one the flabellum has only three joints. The following table indicates characters by which the known species may be identified. They are for the most part insects of dull colours and not particularly inter- esting appearance. A. Antennal flabellum consisting of only three laminee. B. Basal 2 joints of hind tarsi scarcely differing in length. C. Pronotum coarsely punctulate ... sulcipennis, Macl. CC. Pronotum finely punctulate ... obseuricornis, BB. Basal joint of hind tarsi notably Blanch. ? shorter than 2nd joint. C. Prothorax fully twice as wide as long ... major, Blackb. CC. Prothorax notably narrower... inamoenus, Blackb. AA. Antennal flabellum conse of four laminee Ais inusitatus, Blackb. Fe ee obscuricornis, Blanch. I have before me several specimens of a Platydesmus (from the neighbour- hood of Sydney) which appear to be in all probability identi- cal with Blanchard’s Haplonycha obscuricorms. I should con- sider the identification quite reliable if it were not that a discrepancy certainly exists in respect of the colouring of the 271 antenne. Blanchard says “antennis obscure rufis, clava picea.” “Obscure rufe” is fairly applicable to the antennz of the species before me, but I do not find that the flabellum of any of the specimens is conspicuously darker than the pre- ceding joints. The agreement, however, with the description is so satisfactory in all other respects that I am disposed to conjecture the antennal flabella of the type to have been dis- coloured by some accidental means and to give this Platydes- mus the name “P. (Haplonycha) obscuricorms, Blanch. (?).” It is an insect somewhat closely allied to P. sulerpennis, Macl., which is the type of the genus, differing from it inter alia by the closer and considerably finer puncturation of the dorsal surface. In the present species the dorsal puncturation in all parts is not much different from the corresponding punctura- tion in the common species known as Sericesthis (Melolontha) pruimosa, Dalm.; in sulcipennis much coarser. In colour this insect is extremely variable, only one of the specimens known to me being coloured (disregarding the antennal flabellum) as the type, in the rest the head pronotum elytra pygidium legs and undersurface being some or all of them more or less red- dish. One of the specimens before me is evidently a female— the only female Platydesmus that I have seen. It is of evi- dently robuster and more convex form than the male, with the antennal flabellum much shorter (scarcely longer than joints 2-6 together), the tarsi evidently smaller, the pygidium less convex, the abdomen very convex longitudinally (7.e. as viewed from the side), with its apical segment widely rounded behind. In the male the abdomen is much flattened, with its apical segment not conspicuously different from that of the female. P. suleipennis, Macl. My specimen of this insect was given to me by Sir W. Macleay, and I have since compared it with the typical example. P. major,sp.nov. Mas. Ovalis; sat niditus; supra subglaber, lateribus ciliatis; subtus sat pilosus; totus ferrugineus ; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello perlongo (quam prothorax nullo modo breviori) arcuato 3-articulato; palpis max- illaribus sat elongatis, quam capitis inter oculos latitudo parum brevioribus; clypeo confertim vix subrugulose, fronte pronotoque crebre nec rugulose, subtilius punctula- tis; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice haud fortiter angustato, mox ante basin setis elongatis fim- briato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, angulis anticis sat obtu- sis posticis obtusis subrotundatis, basi marginata utrinque sinuata; scutello fere levi; elytris sat fortiter punctu- lato-striatis, striis haud geminatim ordinatis, interstitiis planis sat fortiter vix crebre punctulatis ; pygidio fere ut pronotum, sed in media parte fere levi, punctulato ; 272 tibiis anticis extus tridentatis; tarsis posticis modicis, articulo basali quam 2"5 sat breviori; coxis posticis brevi- bus, metasterno duplo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali postice leviter emarginato. Long., 7 1.; lat., 23 1. Its large size, very long antennal flabellum, long maxil- lary palpi, and very short hind coxz (scarcely half as long as the metasternum) render this species very distinct from its known congeners. None of these characters, however, ap- pear to me to indicate generic distinctness. New South Wales: Young. Given to me by Mr. Sloane. P. inamenus, sp. nov. Mas. Ovatus; sat nitidus; supra sub- glaber, lateribus ciliatus; subtus pilosus; totus ferrugi- neus; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 3-articulato haud arcuato sat elongato (capiti longitudine sat zequali) ; pal- pis maxillaribus minus eclongatis, quam capitis inter oculos latitudo multo brevioribus ; capite crebre vix sub- ruguiose minus subtiliter, pronoto subtilius minus crebre, punctulatis; prothorace quam longiori fere ut 5 ad 3 latior1, antice sat fortiter angustato, lateribus modice arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis posticis bene definitis ob- tusis, basi marginata utrinque sinuata; scutello fere levi; elytris sat fortiter punctulato-striatis, striis haud geminatim ordinatis, interstitiis planis sat fort ter sub- crebre punctulatis ; pygidio sat crebre sat fortiter (sed in media parte fere levi) punctulato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis ; tarsis posticis modicis, articulo basali quam 2us sat breviorl; coxis posticis sat brevibus sed quam met- asternum nullo modo duplo brevioribus; segmento ven- trali apicali postice leviter emarginato. Long., 5 1.; lat., 24 1. An insect of unattractive appearance, not unlike the pre- ceding (P. major) in respect of colouring and sculpture; but much smaller and with much shorter antennal flabellum (which is not curved), much shorter maxillary palpi, prothorax much less strongly transverse, etc., etc. North Queensland. Sent to me by Mr. Sloane. P. inusitatus, sp. nov. Mas. Ovatus; sat nitidus; supra sub- glaber, lateribus ciliatis; subtus pilosus; piceo-ferrugin- eus, antennis capite pronotoque obscurioribus; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 4-articulato arcuato sat elongato (quam caput nonnihil longiori); palpis maxillaribus minus elongatis, quam capitis inter oculos latitudo multo brevioribus; capite confertim subrugulose minus subtili- ter, pronoto fortiter sat crebre, punctulatis; prothorace quam longiori ut 44 ad 3 latiori, antice sat fortiter an- gustato, lateribus modice arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis posticis obtusis, basi marginata utrinque sinuata; scutello 273 fere levi; elytris fortiter punctulato-striatis, striis haud geminatim ordinatis, interstitiis convexis fortiter sat erebre punctulatis; pygidio sat crebre minus fortiter (sed in media parte fere levi) punctulato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis; tarsis posticis modicis, articulo basali quam 2s sat breviori; coxis posticis sat brevibus sed quam met- asternum nullo modo duplo brevioribus; segmento ven- trali apicali postice vix emarginato. Long., 5 1.; lat., 22 1. The only Platydesmus known to me in which the anten- nal flabellum of the male consists of four joints. The alter- nate interstices of the elytra are a trifle wider than the other interstices but there is no real approximation to the kind of elytral sculpture that distinguishes the group of genera in which I have called the elytra “geminate-striate.” The scu- tellum, as in some other species where I have used the term “sublevi,” has only three or four punctures, generally near the base. Queensland: Tambourine Mount. Sent to me by Mr. French. SERICESTHIS. S. (Scitala) suturals, Macl. The unique type of this species in the Australian Museum is in very bad condition having lost its antennz. There can however be no reason- able doubt of its being a true Sericesthis closely allied to S. pruinosa, Dalm. It is however a good species readily dis- tinguishable from pruinosa by the pronotum at its hind angles expanded and distinctly upturned. S. (Scitala) pruinosella, Brenske. I can find no mention of any character in the description of this species inconsis- tent with its being a later name for S. swtwralis, Macl. NESo. I have to add another species to this genus. The follow- ing table shows the distinctive characters of the five species now known. The three species previously described by me differ considerably inter se in the antennal sexual characters. In usta, Blackb., the laminz of the male are straight and about equal in length to the preceding joints together; in yorkensis, Blackb., the lamine are distinctly longer and are curved ; in planicollis, Blackb. |=flavipennis (Platydesmus), Macl.] they are curved and still longer (well on to twice as long as the preceding joints together). In wsta, moreover, the elytra are constantly,—so far as I have observed,—of a dark umber-brown colour,—in the other two, testaceous. The new species described below is not very close to the others, being much larger, with prothorax of different shape, pygi- ¥ 274 dium carinate (at least in the female), etc. Scitala armati- ceps, Macl., is (as noted above under Scitala) a member of this genus, ‘and the name Scitala impressa, Brenske, probably is also a name of the same insect. Having examined in the Macleay Museum the type of Platydesmus flavipennis, Macl., 1 am able to say that it also is a Veso and is identical with my N. planicollis. A. A conspicuous transverse carina on the clypeus.... armaticeps, Macl. AA. ere not having a transverse car- 7h iti angles of prothorax scarcely defined and very blunt. Size small. C. Elytral interstices in all respects uniformly punctulate wigs usta, Blackb. CC. Alternate interstices of elytra not punctured uniformly with the other interstices. D. Pronotum quite strongly decli- vous behind ... yorkensis, Blackb. DD. Pronotum not declivous behind flavipennis (Platydes- mus), Macl. BB. Hind angles of prothorax (viewed from above) well defined and pain right angles, Size large ams ... duealis, Blackb. NV. ducalis, sp. nov. Fem. Ovata; cakeistadee supra subgla- bra; subtus breviter pilosa; obscure ferruginea ; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 3-articulato quam articuli prece- dentes conjuncti sat breviori; clypeo confertim rugulose, fronte sat crebre nec rugulose, minus fortiter punctula- tis; prothorace quam longiori ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice sat fortiter angustato, supra vix crebre minus fortiter punc- tulato, lateribus (superne visis) leviter arcuatis postice subparallelis, angulis anticis subacutis parum productis posticis (superne visis) fere rectis bene definitis, basi utrinque leviter sinuata ante scutellum subtiliter mar- ginata; scutello fere levi; elytris punctulato-striatis, striis manifeste geminatim ordinatis, interstitiis alternis haud (alternis leviter) convexis (alternis sat crebre, alter- nis minus crebre, punctulatis) ; pygidio longitudinaliter carinato, crebre fortiter sat rugulose punctulato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis; tarsis posticis modicis sat ro- bustis, articulo basali quam 2S nonnihil breviori; coxis posticis quam metasternum sat brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali, postice subtruncato. Long., 7 1; lat., 41. This species, as noted above, is readily separated from its known congeners by its much larger sizes, differently- shaped prothorax, etc. The fine raised line on the basal margin of Jj the pronotum in front of the scutellum is very distinct in this cies and*is more or less distinctly traceable when looked for in all the other species of Veso that I have examined ex- cept in J. usta, Blackb., and the typical specimen of .V. arma- ticeps, Macl. North Queensland: Cairns. Sent by Mr. R. C. L. Per- kins. 276 ScrTon. The species of this genus seem to be extremely rare in collections. The following new species is in the South Aus- tralian Museum. S. varucollis, sp. nov. Fem. Leviter ovatus; sat elongatus ; subopacus, nonnihil pruinosus; supra glaber; subtus parce pilosus; rufoferrugineus, antennarum flabello tes- taceo; capite confertim subtilius ruguloso, hoc inter ocu- los quam clypei margo anticus truncatus ut 4 ad 3 la- tiori; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello quam articuli 2-6 conjuncti breviori; prothorace quam longiori ut 7 ad 4 latiori, antice leviter angustato, supra subtilius sat erebre punctulato, postice sat fortiter declivi, lateribus (superne visis) leviter arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis minus productis posticis (superne visis) obtusis, basi mar- ginata utrinque sinuata, scutello punctulato longitudin- aliter leviter carinato; elytris geminato-striatis, intersti- tiis subfortiter sat crebre punctulatis (alternis angustis convexis); pygidio nitido crebre subtiliter punctulato ; tiblis anticis extus tridentatis; tarsorum posticorum ar- ticulo basali quam 2" sat longiori, coxis posticis quam metasternum sat brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali postice subtruncato. lLong., 74 1.; lat., 34 1. Resembles 8. rwber, Blackb., from which it differs inter alia by its clypeus wider in front (in ruber the truncate front margin of the clypeus is very little more than half as wide as the interval between the eyes), its prothorax less transverse and less narrowed in front and strongly declivous behind, and the basal joint of its hind tarsi notably longer in proportion to the 2nd joint. Its very much larger size, as well as its clypeus wider in front, etc., readily distinguishes this species from S. paullus, Blackb. f Western Australia: Coolgardie. ByRRHOMORPHA. I have before me an undescribed species belonging to Mr. Lea which is certainly a member of this genus, although its inclusion therein involves the removal from the generic diag- nosis of the words “labrum supra clypeum sursum produc- tum.” The genus, however, is abundantly distinct on ac- 276 count of other characters, and as the form of the labrum was not referred to in my tabulation of Australian Sericoid genera in placing Byrrhomorpha, the fact now indicated that that character is here (as in //eteronyx) not generic, will not introduce confusion into the use of the tabulation. B. anomala, sp. nov. Ovatus; valde robusta; valde convexa; subnitida; subglabra; nigro-picea, antennis palpisque ru-— fis; capite prothoraceque confertim rugulose sat fortiter punctulatis; antennis 9-articulatis, flabello 4-articulato, hujus laminis (exempli typici) articulis 2-5 conjunctis longitudine sat zqualibus; labro sat porrecto sed haud reflexo; clypeo profunde emarginato; prothorace quam longiori ut 7 ad 44 latiori, antice fortiter angustato, lateribus leviter arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis sat pro- ductis posticis (superne visis) rectis extrorsum subpro- ductis, basi marginata utrinque leviter sinuata; scutello magno basin versus punctulato; elytris geminatim stria- tis, sat fortiter rugulose punctulatis, interstitiis alternis angustis sat levibus; pygidio fere ut pronotum punctu- lato; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis ; tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2¥8 paullo breviori; coxis posticis — quam metasternum duplo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali postice sinuato. Long., 64 1.; lat., 34 1. This species is of more elongate form than its described congeners, and differs notably from them both in the flabellum of its antennz consisting of four lamine. The sculpture of the elytra in this species resembles that of B. ponderosa, Blackb. except in the puncturation of the alternate (wide) interstices being much closer and much less coarse. I believe the speci- men before me to be a female, judging from the form of its ventral segments. Among the comparatively few specimens that I have seen of the genus I do not find any strongly-mark- ed characters likely to be sexual, and it is possible that I have seen only one sex. New South Wales: Galston. The following table shows distinctive characters of the three species now known. A. Antennal flabellum consisting of only three lamine. B. All the elytral interstices decidedly, and about equally, convex. Size small ; .. verres, Blackb. BB. Only the alternate narrow inter- stices of the elytra convex. Size much larger _... ponderosa, Blackb. AA. Antennal flabellum consisting ‘of four laminee ee .. anomala, Blackb. It will be well to ee here, a note that Scitala pallidula, Macl. (of which I have recently examined the type) might i perhaps by my tabulation of the Australian Sericoid genera be referred to Byrrhomorpha, on account of its clypeus being lightly emarginate across the front. 8. pallidula is, as indi- ‘eated above, an isolated form which may prove, when its sexes are known, to require the formation of a new genus (as Mac- leay forecasted). It is, however, very far removed from Byrrhomorpha which is a genus of extremely robust coarsely sculptured insects with hind tibie very stout and strongly dilated at their apex; while S. pallidula is altogether of the Scitala build,—of fragile form and having hind tibie elongate slender and almost without apical dilatation. 277 OcNnoDUS. The presence of conspicuous tufts of hairs on the under surface of the tarsal joints seems to be the most noticeable character of this genus. The extremely short hind coxz also furnish a noteworthy character. The antennal structure, judged by the species as yet known, seems to be uniform— which is very unusual in the Australian Sericoides. The structure of the labrum is extremely variable and furnishes a valuable specific character. The form of the hind angles of the prothorax is most remarkable. In all the species known to me these angles are really obtuse or subrectangular, but owing to the curve of the convexity on the dorsal surface (cxcept perhaps in O. lugubris, Blackb.), they appear acute or even spiniform if the prothorax be looked down upon from directly above it. I have now three additional species before me which are described below. The following table shows characters by which the species known may be distinguished. It is possible that some of the insufficiently-described species of the early authors (discussed by me under the head- ing of Scitala, &c.) may be attributakle to this genus, but I think it improbable, as the genus is not known to occur in the localities where most of the species in question were found. When I described the Coleoptera of the Elder Expedition I attributed to.this genus with a strong expression of doubt a species which I described under the name ferruginews. [am now satisfied that it must not remain associated with the other species referred by me to Ocnodus, and that its real affinities are with Caulobius, under which generic name I have already recorded it (above) in this memoir. I must here repeat what I have already notified, viz., that since I have never succeeded in identifying the typical species of Ocnodus (O. decipiens, Burm.) there is a doubt whether the species to which I have applied the name Ocnodus are really congeneric with Burmeister’s insect. It will be well to remember that the generic position of those species will be best expressed by calling them Ocnodus, Blackb. (?Burm.). 278 A. Elytra non-setose. B.* Labrum small, scarcely projecting from front face of head, its summit very distant from summit of front face of head. C. Basal edging of pronotum very dis- tinctly thickened and more elevat- ed at its ends. D. Clypeus evenly rounded in front fallax, Blackb. DD. Clypeus truncate in front ... lepidus, Blackb. CC. Basal edging ofpronotum uni- formly fine ... lugubris, Blackb. BB. Labrum much larger, ‘distinctly pro- minent, its summit not much below summit of front face of head. C. Clypeus in front widely and very feebly emarginate. D. Basal declivity of pronotum ni- tid and almost punctureless (a row of punctures close to basal edging) suspiciosus, Blackh. DD. Basal declivity ‘of pronotum punctured scarcely differently from the rest of the surface... spinicollis, Blackb. CC. Clypeus in front ape ed pee emarginate ... scissiceps, Blackb. BBB. Labrum (viewed “from above) searcely prominent, but its summit near summit of front face of head porosus, Blackb. AA. Elytra setose... si ive at! decipiens, Burm. O. leyidus, Blackb. I have recently received two female specimens of Ocnodus taken by Mr. Perkins in Queensland, which I regard with some hesitation as this species, of which the male only was previously known. They are somewhat larger (long. 6 1.) than I should expect the female of lepidus to be and are considerably less nitid than the male, with the dorsal puncturation a trifle stronger and the hind angles of the prothorax slightly less obtuse, so that from a certain point of view (looked at obliquely across the insect) they appear more sharply subdentiform than those angles appear in lepi- dus (male) from a similar point of view. Moreover the hind tarsi are evidently stouter (which is not likely, I think, to be a female sexual character). It is quite possible, therefore, that they represent a distinct closely allied species. O. lugubris, Blackb. At the time when I described this species I regarded my specimens as females, but I have now no doubt that one of them is a male. Its sexual characters, however, are very slight, consisting in considerably greater stoutness of the front tarsi, less convexity of the ventral seg- ments, and a difference in the pygidium—which is perpendi- cular in the female but inclined inward in the male so that * For notes on labrum vide infra O. porosus, sp. nov. F 279 its apex seems to push a little into the apical ventral seg- ment. 0. susmciosus, sp. nov. Mas. Ovalis; sat nitidus; subglaber ; piceus, antennis palpisque testaceis; illis 9-articulatis, flabello 3-articulato quam articuli preecedentes 5 subbre- viori; labro magno producto profunde emarginato ; clypeo crebre fortiter subrugulose punctulato, antice late leviter emarginato, fronte fortiter minus crebre nec rugulose punctulato ; prothorace quam longiori fere duplo latiori, antice parum angustato, supra fortiter inzquali- ter vix crebre punctulato, basin versus fere levi, lateribus leviter sinuatim arcuatis, angulis anticis subacutis parum productis posticis (superne visis) acutis subdentiformibus, basi marginata utrinqgue sinuata; scutello punctulato; elytris fortiter sat crebre subseriatim punctulatis ; pygidio crebre sat grosse punctulato; tibiis anticis extus fere inermibus; tarsis anticis quam tibiz multo longioribus, posticorum articulo basali quam 2S sublongiori; coxis posticis quam metasternum fere triplo brevioribus; seg- mento ventrali apicali postice late leviter emarginato ; corpore subtus fortiter punctulato. Long., 45 1; lat., 2 1. The elytral puncturation gives a slight suggestion of ge- minate arrangement in the form of pairs of rows of punctures slightly more regularly seriate than the intermediate rows (about three in number) which occupy the intervals between those pairs. This species is somewhat close to O. spinicollis, Blackb. It is smaller and in all parts somewhat less strongly punctulate, the pronotum almost punctureless immediately in front of the base, the hind angles of the pronotum less denti- form, the clypeus in front less widely and a little more strongly emarginate, the external margin of the front tibia with only a single feeble projection above (and close to) the apical projection (in sginicollis there are two strong teeth above the apical projection), the pygidium non-carinate. It is possible that some few of the above distinctions may be sexual rather than specific and may be absent in the female of O. suspiciosus, but that is not likely since I do not find them distinguishing the sexes in O. lugubris,—the only species of the genus of which I am confident that I have seen both sexes. Western Australia: Perth. Sent by Mr. Hamilton. O. scissiceps, sp. nov. Mas. Breviter ovalis; minus nitidus; subglaber ; rufopiceus, antennis palpisque nonnihil dilu- tioribus; illis 9-articulatis, flabello 3-articulato quam articuli precedentes 5 conjuncti manifeste breviori ; labro magno producto, profunde bilobo, lobis (superne visis) subspiniformibus; clypeo antice profunde angulatim 280 emarginato, cum fronte confertim fortiter ruguloso; r prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice quam pos- tice haud angustiori, supra confertim subtilius punctu-— lato, lateribus (superne visis) leviter sinuatim arcuatis angulis anticis acutis sat productis posticis (superne visis) sat acute rectis, basi marginata utrinque parum sinuata; scutello crebre sat subtiliter punctulato ; elytris crebre sat subtiliter (hic et illic subseriatim) punctulatis; pygidio pernitido, grosse crebrius punctulato, obsolete carinato; Sal a tibiis anticis extus minus perspicue dentatis ; tarsis anticis — quam tibiz paullo longioribus, posticorum articulo basali quam 2" vix longiorl; coxis posticis quam metasternum . plus quam duplo brevioribus; segmento ventrali apicali— per pygidium (hoc subtus flexo) profunde emarginato; — corpore subtus fortiter punctulato. Long., 44 1.; lat., 24 1. The pygidium strongly bent under the body and causing ~~ the apical ventral segment to be strongly emarginate seems — to indicate the unique specimen before me of this insect to be — certainly a male. In the other males known to me of the genus a similar structure is slightly discernible (as compared — with the structure of the same parts in the specimens which I | judge to be females of the genus). I have not found in it any other character hkely to be sexual on account of its being = common to the other males and not to the females known to — me of the genus. There is an almost obsolete blunt tooth on — the external margin of the front tibie slightly above the — apical projection. The elytra present slight indications of — geminate sculpture in a tendency of the punctures to fall into pairs of traceable rows,—the pairs being separated by inter- vals in which there is no trace of seriate arrangement, but this character in the sculpture needs to be looked for, being very inconspicuous. The species is very isolated among its congeners by many characters,—form of labrum and clypeus, comparatively fine puncturation of dorsal surface, etc. Western Australia: Coolgardie. Taken, I believe, by my son. O. porosus, sp. nov. Breviter late ovalis; sat nitidus; subgla- ber ; piceo-niger, antennis palpisque rufis; illis 9-articula- tis, flabello 3-articulato quam articuli precedentes 5 conjuncti manifeste brevior1; labro sat magno parum pro- ducto (hujus altitudine quam clypei frontis pars supra majori) ; clypeo antice rotundato, cum fronte grosse sat crebre punctulato; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, antice parum angustato, supra sparsim sat grosse punctulato, lateribus (superne visis) leviter sinuatim i: ail arcuatis, angulis anticis acutis sat productis posticis (su- perne visis) sat acute dentiformibus, basi marginata utrinque sinuata; scutello basin versus punctulato ; elytris grosse subseriatim minus crebre punctulatis, stria subsuturali sat perspicua; pygidio grosse sat erebre punctulato; tibiis anticis extus _ tridenta- tis; tarsis anticis quam _ tibie vix longiori- bus, posticorum articulo basali quam 24S vix lon- giori; coxis posticis quam metasternum fere triplo bre- vioribus ; segmento ventrali apicali postice haud emargi- nato; corpore subtus grosse punctulato. Long, 34 1.; lat., 12 1. The labrum resembles that of O. fallax, etc., in respect of its only slight projection from the perpendicular front face of the head but differs by its much larger size which may be expressed as follows: Looking (from in front) at the front face of the head one sees the outline of the clypeus as an arc of a circle the altitude of which is evidently greater than the distance from the vertex of the labrum to the vertex of the ‘perpendicular front face of the head, while in fallaz, etc., the corresponding altitude occupies a very much smaller propor- tion of the front face of the head. The extremely coarse punc- turation of the dorsal surface prevents the confusion of this species with any other Ocnodus known to me. Western Australia: Yilgarn. 281 DIPHYLLOCERA. D. kirbyana, White. Burmeister has drawn attention to the fact that the antennal flabellum of this species consists of five lamellze according to White and of six according to Erick- son. In the male there are six lamellz of about equal length, while in the female the basal lamella is so short that its being in reality a joint of the flabellum might easily be over- looked. As White describes the male it is clear that he either counted incorrectly or had before him a species unknown to subsequent authors and distinct from that which has since borne the name kirbyana. PACHYGASTRA. In my tabulation of the Australian Sericoid genera (loc. eit.) this genus is distinguished by the form of its front tibiz. lt should be noted that I have described, above, a new species under the name calorata having front tibie not much different from those of Pachygastra but which certainly cannot be re- garded as a member of that genus. I have placed it in Frenchella. . M2&cHIDIUS. M. raucus, sp. nov. Late ovatus; minus convexus; minus 282 nitidus ; piceo-niger, antennis palpisque rufis ; setulis bre- vibus subtilibus sat crebre vestitus ; capite antice sat pro- funde subangulatim emarginato (partis emarginate lobis — antice rotundatis), lateribus sinuatis; prothorace quam longiori fere ut 5 ad 3 latiori, antice sat fortiter angus- — tato, supra crebre fortiter ruguloso, lateribus crenulatis fortiter dilatato-rotundatis ante basin brevissime rectis, angulis anticis sat productis sat acu- tis posticis acute rectis, basi late rotundata; scu- tello punctulato; elytris striis circiter 9 impressis, in- terstitiis latis inaqualiter biseriatim granulosis, intersti- tiis alternis manifeste convexis; tibiis anticis extus tri- dentatis (dentibus inferioribus approximatis, a 3° sat re- motis) ; tarsis robustis sat brevibus, posticorum articulo basali quam 2" paullo longiori; unguiculis singulis ad basin appendiculis singulis gracilibus armatis. Long., blog lab we kh The form of the outline of the prothorax of this species is very distinctive, the nearest approach to it, in Machidu known to me, being found in I. crenaticollis, Blackb. The sides of the prothorax are extremely strongly dilatate-rounded from the front margin almost to the base, but immediately in — front of the base they become quite straight (and parallel with each other). The above-mentioned character (together with other characters) places the insect in my tabulation (Tr.R.S., S.A., 1898, pp. 57, etc.) beside M&M. caviceps although the sides of the prothorax in that species are not sinuate behind the middle, the hind angles are obtuse, and there is very little superficial resemblance between the two. From crenaticollis, to which it has much superficial resemblance, it differs inter alia by the presence of quill-like appendages to its claws. Victoria: Dividing Range. M. relictus, sp. nov. Leviter ovatus; minus latus; sat con- vexus; sat nitidus; ferrugineus; setulis brevibus subtili- bus minus crebre vestitus; capite antice sat profunde emarginato (partis emarginate lobis antice rotundatis), lateribus manifeste sinuatis; prothorace quam longiorl fere duplo latiori, antice sat fortiter angustato, supra puncturis sat magnis mamillatis sat crebre impresso, late- ribus haud crenulatis sat arcuatis, angulis anticis sat pro- ductis minus acutis posticis rotundato-obtusis, basi utrin- que sinuata; scutello punctulato; elytris inaqualiter sculpturatis (in parte dorsali intervallis circiter 5 leviter convexis sat latis utrinque sat grosse punctulato-crenu- latis, in parte laterali sat confuse crenulato-punctulatis) ; tibiis anticis extus tridentatis (dentibus inferioribus inter se approximatis a 3°,—hoc in longitudine media sito,— 283 sat remotis); tarsorum posticorum articulo basali quam 2us sat longiori; unguiculis singulis ad basin appendicu- lis singulis gracilibus armatis. Long., 3 1.; lat., 1} 1. In my tabulation of the species of Machidius (loc. cit.) this species must be placed beside d/. caviceps, Blackb., from which it differs by, inter alia, its clypeus considerably less deeply excised with the lobes of the excision rounded (not externally angulate) in front, and by its elytral sculpture {which in caviceps, Blackb. consists of about 18 strize,—the la- teral ones scarcely defined,—the interstices scarcely and inter se subequally convex and obscurely seriate-granulate ; while in relictus the elytra cannot be called distinctly striate the sculp- ture consisting of rows of punctures (some of them moderately, others very, large) among which are about 5 irregular dis- tinctly elevated intervals having their sides strongly crenulate by the adjacent punctures]. In my original description of M. caviceps IT did not mention the granulation of the elytral interstices. The granules are small and inconspicuous (less so on the sides and apical parts of the insect) and were concealed by a thin indumentum which I find was present on the typi- eal specimen in the S.A. Museum: but inspection of the ely- tral interstices of a second example recently acquired by me shows the presence of fine granules. North Queensland. Taken by Mr. Perkins. M. capitalis, sp. nov. Breviter ovatus, sat convexus; subni- tidus; obscure ferrugineus, antennis palpisque dilutiori- bus; setulis brevibus subtilibus minus crebre vestitus; capite antice obtuse truncato, lateribus vix sinuatis; pro- thorace gibbo, leviter transverso, antice fortiter angus- tato, supra confertim sat fortiter ruguloso, lateribus sub- crenulatis sat arcuatis pone angulos posticos (his subrec- tis) excisis, angulis anticis minus productis minus acutis, basi late rotundata; scutello magno punctulato; elytris striis circiter 9 sat latis impressis, interstitiis sat latis sat planis (his utrinque punctulato-crenulatis) ; tibiis anticis (exempli typici) extus sinuatis haud perspicue dentatis ; tibiis posterioribus 4 in parte media dente instructis (ut M. tibialis, Blackb.) ; tarsis posticis brevibus, posticorum articulo basali quam 2¥8 vix longiori; unguiculis simplici- bus. Long., 4 1.; lat., 24 1. In my tabulation of the species of Machidius (loc. cit.) this species must be placed beside WV. rugosipes, Blackb., from which it differs by inter alia its clypeus truncate in front and its prothorax scarcely transverse. Its short robust posterior tibiz with their external face transversely carinate at about the middle of their length so that the outline appears strongly 284 dentate in the middle distinguish this species at once from all other Machidi known to me except tibialis, Blackb., and rugosipes, Blackb. Western Australia: Gnarlbine. Given to me by Mr. French. DYNASTIDES. PIMELOPUS. P. porcellus, Kr. A specimen taken on King Island must certainly, I think, be attributed to this species. It agrees with Erickson’s description except in sjze,—being considerably smaller than the type,—and in the prothorax being consider- ably (not “‘scarcely”) narrowed in front. The size is of little importance, since other species of the genus vary greatly in this respect; and I am of opinion that Erickson was in error in respect of the prothorax. In all the Pimelopi known to me the actual front margin, owing to the front part of the pronotum being very strongly declivous is not in sight from certain points of view, and it is easy to place a specimen so that the prothorax appears to be wide in front; but if the prothorax be examined with the head towards the observer the front margin is seen to be in reality much narrower than the base. I cannot help thinking that this accounts for the discrepancy between the King Island example and the descrip- tion of P. porcellus. If the front margin of the prothorax were really “scarcely” narrower than the base P. porcellus would, I think, stand alone in this respect among the Austra- lian Dynastides,—with the exception of a few species of the very aberrant genus Cryptodus. The examination of a speci- men so likely (on the ground of its habitat) to be the true P. porcellus is of interest on account of my having (Tr.R.S., S.A., 1887, p. 220) described as “P. porcellus, Er. (1)” @ species that 1s certainly not identical with this King Island specimen. For this South Australian species I now propose the name decipiens. Its female differs from the King Island example (which is a female, as also was Erickson’s type) prin- cipally in the shape of the prothorax, which is very strongly bisinuate at the base, so that the middle part appears as 4 very well-defined lobe ; while in the King Island example the bisinuation is very feeble making the base appear as an almost continuous curve. The basal impressions of the pronotum are in decipiens strongly marked and in the King Island example very feeble. The striation of the elytra is notably stronger in decipiens. The King Island specimen resembles P. dubius, Blackb. in the form of the prothorax. And here I must call atten- tion to an unfortunate oversight in my description of the a 285 latter species; for I passed over the description of the pro- thorax with the remark that that segment scarcely differed from the same in “porcellus (?).” At the time I had in mind other distinctions which are very strongly marked between the two species and overlooked the less conspicuous (but certainly quite obvious when attention is drawn to it) difference in the basal outline of the prothorax. * The King Island specimen agrees with P. dubius in hav- ing only a single transverse carina on the external face of the middle and hind tibie but differs from it (and agrees with decipiens) in the robust posteriorly-swollen form of its elytra, —which is, I suppose, what Erickson refers to when he calls the elytra of porcellus “ventricosa.”’ From the above remarks it appears so evident that the true P. porcellus, Er. (at any rate this species from King Island) is intermediate in structure between P. decipiens and P. dubius that there need be no further hesitation in asso- ciating those species generically. As the specimen from King Island does not fit well into the tabulation of specific charac- ters of Pimelopr which I furnished in Tr.R.S., S.A., 1896, p. 256, it will be well to substitute the following tabulation : — A. Posterior tibiz unicarinate externally. B. Base of prothorax subbisinuate. C. Elytra strongly and subrugulosely punctulate and swollen behind ... porcellus, Er. CC. Elytra very feebly and sparsely punctulate and subparallel ... dubius, Blackb. BB. Base of prothorax very strongly bi- ; sinuate sydneyanus, Blackb. AA. Posterior tibie bicarinate externally, B. Elytral puncturation obsolete on lateral and subapical parts ... “Crassus, Blackd. BB. Elytral puncturation continuous ... decipiens, Blackb. P. deciqiens, sp. nov. This name is proposed for P. por- eellus, Er. (?), Blackb., Tr.R.S., 8.A., 1887, p. 220. P. dubius, Blackb. For amendment of original descrip- tion vide swpra under heading P. porcellus, Er. CISSID 24. Cis. C. leanus, sp. nov. Minus latus; vix pubescens; sat nitidus ; supra brunneo-testaceus, pronoto antice sat late et in lateribus anguste elytris in sutura et latera versus incerte infuscatis ; capite sat crebre minus subtiliter nec rugulose, pronoto confertim fortiter sat rugulose, elytris quam pro- notum paullo minus crebre nec rugulose, punctulatis ; his circa scutellum subgibbis; antennis pedibusque testaceis, horum femoribus illarum clava infuscatis ; corpore subtus 4y (capite et prosterni lateribus exceptis) piceo, sat grosse nec profunde punctulato. Long., #—11.; lat. = 1. Easily distinguishable from the other described Austra- lian species of the genus by its colouring and its compara- tively coarse puncturation. The prothorax is rather strongly transverse,—more so than in its Australian congeners (except perhaps C. Adelaida, Blackb., which approaches it in this respect) and is very little produced over the head. Of the two examples before me, one (doubtless the male) has an evident though slight gibbosity in the middle of the forehead, while the forehead of the other is very flat. 286 TENEBRIONID Ad. HOPATRIDES. Herr Gebien has recently called my attention to the fact that Reitter last year, in Verh. ver., Brunn, founded a new genus of T'enebrionde under the name Mesomorphus, to which some of the Australian species hitherto placed in Hopa- trum must be transferred. ‘These species are distinguished from true Hopatra by the different vestiture of their tarsi, the obliteration of the clypeal suture, and their divided eyes. Champion had already noted the existence of this aggregate as a section of Hopatrum possibly needing to be separated generically (Tr.H.S., Lond., 1894, p. 361), and I had myself at a still earlier date (1892) mentioned the first of them that I had seen as probably needing a new generic name. Unfor- tunately Mesomorphus is a nom. priwocc., having been used by Pratz in 1883 (Mesomorpha). As the species in question appear to me to be certainly generically distinct from Hopa- trum I propose to give them a new genus under the name Hlopatromorpha, which I cannot ascertain to have been used previously. HOPATRUM. I have before me two new species of this genus, and have recently inspected the type of H. Mastersi, Macl. I pro- pose before describing the new species to furnish a tabulated statement of the characters by which the species of Hopa- trum may be distinguished inter se. After the removal of the species already referred to as not genuine Hopatra there remain ten names that seem attributable to Australian spe- cies of the genus, one of which (//. australe, Boisd.), I must pass over on account of its being, as Champion has already pointed out, not intelligibly described. The addition of my two new species therefore bring up the number to eleven. I have before me authentic specimens of all except one (H. torridum, Champ.), and I have a Hopatrum from north-west i Australia agreeing so well with the description of 1. torridum that I am fairly confident of having identified it correctly. Before proceeding to the tabulation it is desirable to fur- nish a note on one of the group characters that will be men- tioned in it, viz., ““Elytral intersices unequal.” In the species to which that expression applies the 3rd and 5th interstices (especially the 3rd) are distinctly more convex than the 2nd and 4th, and the 2nd and 4th (especially the 2nd) are nar- rower (very much narrower in the hinder part) than the 3rd and 5th. In the rest of the species the interstices are uni- form in respect of convexity, and there is no great diversity in respect of width. 287 A. Elytra entirely striate. B. Elytral interstices unequal. C. Sides of prothorax more or less sinuate behind middle, hind angles acute. D. Joint 8 of antennz twice as wide as long Mastersi, Macl. DD. Joint 8 of antennze less than twice as wide as long. E. Elytral interstices with con- spicuous well-defined granules Walkeri, Champ. EE. Elytral interstices closely rugulose, not granulate : Carpentarize, Blackb. CC. Sides of prothorax absolutely non- sinuate, hind angles blunt -- Macleayi, Blackb. BB. Elytral interstices uniform—at most a little diversity in width. C. Sides of prothorax not sinuate be- hind middle. D. Prothorax at its widest across base. E. Front of clypeus with a deep angular emargination. F. Front tibiz stout and very strongly dilated at apex ... Meyricki, Blackb. FF. Front tibize slender, very feebly dilated at apex ... Elderi, Blackb. EE. Front of clypeus with a shal- low arched emargination ... Victoriz, Blackb. DD. Prothorax notably wider about middle than across base ... misellum, Blackb. CC. Sides of prothorax quite con- spicuously sinuate behind middle _torridum, Champ.( ?) AA. Each elytron with only two aRPS striz, the outer striz obsolete Adelaide, Blackb. AAA. Elytra without defined striation ... cowardense, Blackb. Hl. Mastersi, Macl. This species is near Walkeri, Champ., and Carpentaric, Blackb. It is identical with a H opatrum sent by Mr. Perkins which (before I saw Mastersi) I had in- tended to describe as new. It is easily separated from Wal- keri by, inter alia, the non-granulate interstices of its elytra. 288 7 From Carpentaria it differs by, inter alia, the much stronger sinuation of the hind part of the sides of the prothorax and the 8th joint of its antenne considerably more transverse. H. Macleayt, sp. nov. Minus latum; sat opacum; piceo- nigrum, setis brevissimis vestitum; supra confertim sub- tilius rugulosum ; clypeo a fronte discreto, antice triangu- lariter emarginato ; oculis haud divisis; antennis modicis, articulis 8-10 sat fortiter transversis; prothorace quam longiori duplo latiori, lateribus sat fortiter explanatis sat rotundatis pone medium nullo modo sinuatis, angulis anticis minus productis minus acutis (posticis minus pro- ductis rectis), latitudine majori vix pone medium posita; elytris quam prothorax paullo latioribus, sat #qualiter sat fortiter striatis, striis quam interstitia multo magis fortiter punctulatis (illarum puncturis, presertim pos- tice, costulis minus perspicuis conjunctis), interstitiis con- vexis (3°, 5°, 7° que quam cetera manifeste magis ele- vatis postice latioribus) ; tibiis anticis a basi ad apicem sat fortiter dilatatis, angulo externo apicali sat acuto. Long., 4:1. 3 late5-2 1. The form of the prothorax seems to be the most con- spicuous character of this species; the rounded sides of that segment distinctly converging from a little behind the middle to the base, but without the slightest sinuation, with front angles almost obtuse and hind corners scarcely sharply right angled, are very distinctive. The only other described spe- cies known to me with the 3rd, 5th, and 7th interstices of the elytra so strongly defined is Wadker1, Champ., which dif- fers widely in the form of its prothorax. Queensland: Toowoomba (Koebele). H. misellum, sp. nov. Minus latum; sat opacum; piceo- nigrum; setis brevissimis vestitum; supra sat equaliter crebre minus. subtiliter rugulosum, vix granu- losum; clypeo a fronte discreto, antice triangu- lariter emarginato; oculis haud divisis; antennis modicis, articulis 8-10 fortiter transversis; pro- thorace quam longiori plus quam _ duplo _latiori, lateribus modice explanatis minus arcuatis pone medium haud sinuatis, angulis anticis acutis posticis (superne visis) acute rectis, basi media leviter emarginata, latitu- dine majori paullo ante basin posita; elytris quam pro- thorax paullo latioribus, equaliter sat profunde striatis, striis quam interstitia multo magis fortiter punctulatis, interstitiis convexis; tibiis anticis a basi ad apicem sat fortiter dilatatis, angulo externo apicali acuto. Long., 41-5 1.; lat., 2-22, 1. 289 I conjecture this to be the species mentioned by Cham- pion (Tr.E.S. 1894, p. 359) as “perhaps” O. villiger, Blanch., as it is the only H opatrum that I have found in the neigh- Beurhood of Port Adelaide (Champion’s locality). However that may be, it is I think certainly not 17. villiger, the elytral striez of which are described as “without puncturation,” and which moreover is said to be from “Raffles Bay” a locality “on the north coast of Australia. It is nearer I think to the species that I have no doubt is H. torridwm, Champ., than to any other described Hopatrum, but is readily dis- _tinguishable from it by, inter alia, the evidently convex in- _terstices of its elytra, and its less opaque dorsal surface. South Australia (widely distributed). HopPpATROMORPHA. (Gen. nov. Tenebrionidarum ; = Mesomorphus, Reitter, : nom. preoce. ) Australian species of this genus have been described, I believe, under six names. The tirst of them is Hopatrum vil- tiger, Blanch., the description of which points to its place _being here. I have received, moreover, from Herr Gebien a Specimen under that name which is undoubtedly a member of this genus, and it agrees fairly well with Blanchard’s descrip- tion. In 1892 I described a second species under the name _Hopatrum longicorne (from Central Australia). In 1894 Champion described two species (/opatrum dispersum and vagabundum) in the Tr.E.S., Lond., and I described (published a few months later than Champion’s names) two species (H. darlingense and Darwini). The species sent by Gebien as villiger, Blanch., is identical with that sent to me by its author as dispersum, Champ. Dispersum is from Port Darwin ; villiger was described from Raffles Bay; two adja- cent localities. Neither darlingense nor Darwini appears to be identical with either of Champion’s species, although vaga- bundum and Darwini are probably somewhat close to each other. I have already (Tr.R.S., S.A., 1894, p. 218) pointed out distinctions between the two,—the former of which I have not seen and I may now add the further note that Champion calls joints 9 and 10 of the antenne of vagabundum “‘trans- verse” (without qualification) whereas those joints in Dar- wim are “vix transversis” (unfortunately printed in my description ‘‘vix convexis”’), and moreover the seriate elytral punctures of Darwini are so conspicuously very much larger than those of disperswm, Champ. (which indeed are almost non-existent) that Champion could not possibly have failed to refer to that distinction in differentiating vagabun- _dum from dispersum if vagabundum had been my Darwini. J 290 7 The following table shows the characters which seem to , me most conveniently to be used for distinguishing inter se the species of this genus. A. Prothorax strongly transverse (about twice as wide as long). B. Ocular canthi wide (as wide as the eye, at least in Darwini). C. Elytral interstices granulate. Joints 9 and 10 of antenne trans- verse ee tes ne .. vagabunda, Champ. CC. Elytral interstices non-granulate. Joints 9 and 10 of auntenne not distinctly transverse... ... Darwini, Blackb. ( dispersa, Champ. ‘*( villigera, Blanch. (7?) AA. _Prothorax less transverse (about as 5) to 3). B. Elytral striz quite strongly impress- BB. Ocular canthi much narrower e el ss mS Py darlingensis, Blackb. BB. Elytral striz scarcely impressed (almost mere rows of faint punc- tures) ... a eg it ... longicornis, Blackb. H. darlingensis, Blackb. Specimens of this insect have been sent to me by Mr. Carter, of Sydney. He writes that they were sent to him by Judge Docker of Walg2tt, who re- ported the insect as occurring in great plenty in his neigh- bourhood. This is to me an interesting note, as I had pre- viously seen only two examples of the species. HELAIDES. PTEROHELZAUS. I have several interesting new species of Pteroheleus re- cently acquired in my collection appertaining to the group which Macleay in his monograph of the genus calls the 2nd subsection of the 2nd section, characterized thus :—‘‘Form more elongate ; elytra seriate-punctate, their interstices granu- _lose.” It seems desirable to make the opportunity of describ- ing them an occasion for a revision of the group and for placing in tabular form an indication of the distinctive char- acters of its species. Macleay’s monograph supplies merely descriptions of seven species without any tabular arrange- ment, while an eighth species (P. squalidus) decidedly be- longing to this subsection is attributed to the preceding one with a note that it is perhaps wrongly placed. Since Mac- leay’s monograph was published I have described a single species (insignis) of this subsection. Three species of Ptero- helaus have been described by Lea, but without information as to which of Macleay’s aggregates they appertain to; as, however, the descriptions contain no mention of elytral gran- ules it is presumable that they are not members of the sub- 291 section that I am now dealing with. At the present time, _ then, species attributable to this aggregate have been describ- ed under nine names. Of these nine names one (P.. Guerini, Bréme) cannot be confidently identified with any insect by the description, which however (such as it is) would fit P. tristis, Germ., fairly well. (Germar’s the later name.) The following table shows characters by which the Ptero- heli of this group can be distinguished inter se, with the ex- ception of P. Gwerini, Bréme, concerning which there is not sufficient information available for its inclusion : — A. Joint 6 of antenne not or but little dilated on outer margin, never decid- edly transverse. B. Alternate striz of elytra much deeper than the other striz insignis, Blackb. BB. Elytra not having alternate strize deeper than the rest. C. Klytra much more nitid than CC. D. Lateral margins of pronotum very feebly explanate ... simplicicollis, Blackb. DD. Lateral margins of pronotum strongly explanate. E. At least all the alternate in- terstices of elytra conspicu- ously and regularly granulate. F. Prothorax twice as wide at base as in front. Size large granuliger, Macl. FF. Prothorax much less nar- rowed in front. Size mode- rate . fe: 3% .. regularis, Blackb. EE. Front and inner parts of elytra not (or only sparsely) granulate. F. Pronotum_ sparsely and faintly punctulate. G. Size large. Surface only moderately nitid. Lates ral area of pronotum wide and flat ae tristis, Germ. GG. Size small. Surface quite nitid. Lateral area of pronotum narrower and concave... es ... nitidiuseulus, Macl. FF. Pronotum closely and strongly, though eel punctulate ... gracilicornis, Blackb. CC. Elytra notably more opaque. D. Explanate margin of elytra wide (at base as wide as anes of front tibia) granulatus, Germ. DD. Explanate margins of elytra much narrower. EK. Ventral segments with scarcely any trace of eee ad) wrinkles mR: 4 ... ventralis, Blackb. 292 Kis, Ventral segments with plen- tiful longitudinal wrinkles ... subgeminatus, Macl. AA. Joint 6 of antennz strongly dilated on outer margin, transverse. B. Dise of pronotum conspicuously granulate-rugulose ... squalidus, Macl. BB. Disc of pronotum not eranulate- rugulose. C. Front of pronotum very feebly emarginate, and having rounded very feeble angles bullatus, Pasce. CC. Front of pronotum much more emarginate, with prominent angles (as in granulatus, Germ.). D. Width of prothorax considerably more than twice length ... brevicornis, Blackb. DD. Width of Pict antes seareely twice length ” puer, Blackb. P. suemplicicollis, sp. nov. Sat parallelus; subnitidus; sat convexus ; nigro-piceus, marginibus antennis palpis pedi- — busque rufescentibus; antennis modicis (articulis 6° quam latior longiori extus haud dilatato, 7°-10° trans- versis extus fortiter dilatatis); capite crebre subtiliter, — prothorace supra vix manifeste, punctulatis; hoc quam — longior plus (quam trans apicem vix plus) quam duplo latiori, supra vix manifeste canaliculato, marginibus lateralibus minus latis a disco parum discretis, margine antico sat late minus fortiter emarginato, angulis anticis — sat rotundatis posticis valde acutis; elytris seriatim sub- — fortiter punctulatis, interstitiis alternis granulis nitidis (his antice perparvis, apicem versus gradatim multo | majoribus) ornatis, margine laterali angusto (quam P. granulati, Germ., multo angustiori); corpore subtus sat nitido ; abdomine latera versus strigato. Long., 7 1.; lat., 34 1. | Remarkable for the expanded margins of its pronotum — being narrower and less clearly distinguishable from the disc than is usual among its allies. The expanded margin of its elytra also is very narrow, much narrower than in, e.g., P. bullatus, Pasc. The shining granules form complete rows on ~ the alternate interstices of the e elytra, but they are extremely © minute on the front part and even more so near the suture than near the lateral margins. = South Australia; Eyre Peninsula. Taken by the late Mr. J. Anderson. | i P. regularis, sp. nov. Sat parallelus; minus opacus; modice a convexus; nigro-piceus, marginibus antennis palpis pedis busque rufescentibus ; antennis modicis (articulis 6° vix transverso extus vix dilatato, 7°-10° sat transversis extus — fortiter dilatatis); capite iets subtiliter, prothorace — 293 supra sparsius subtilissime, punctulatis ; hoc quam longior plus (quam trans apicem paullo minus) quam duplo iatiori; supra vix manifeste canaliculato, marginibus lateralibus sat latis manifeste concavis bene definitis antice modice angustatis, margine antico late minus for- titer emarginato, angulis anticis obtusis posticis acutis; elytris seriatim subfortiter punctulatis, interstitiis alter- nis equabiliter sat crebre granulis nitidis insignibus, margine laterali sat angusto (quam P. granulati, Germ., multo angustiori); corpore subtus sat nitido; abdomine latera versus strigato. Jong., 7-8 1.; lat., 34-4 1. A somewhat nitid species notable for the extremely regu- lar rows of conspicuous shining granules that adorn the alter- nate interstices of its elytra. The emargination of the front of its prothorax is decidedly wide and feeble as compared with that of some Pferohela:. A specimen in my collection differs from the type in being of narrower form, with the elytra a trifle less nitid and the granules smaller. The difference is _ perhaps sexual. New South Wales: Narrabri, etc. ‘ P. bullatus, Pasc. The habitat of this species is curiously given as “South Australia (Queensland). The description is much too scanty to be satisfactory (¢.g., no information as _ to the antennal structure, or the width of the explanate mar- _ gins of the different parts). The large size and elytral granu- _ lation, however, distinguish it from most of the Pteroheict, and as I have in my ‘collection specimens from Queensland which agree very well with the description I have not much hesitation in identifying them with it. I have also a Ptero- helaeus from South Australia, which is extremely close to it and possibly furnishes the explanation of Pascoe’s state- ment of fubitat, though I doubt its being really identical specifically, on account of its being of still narrower form and with somewhat different elytral granulation; but without see- _ ing more specimens it would not be well to give it a separate name. Champion attributes P. bullatus to Western Austra- ha (Tr.E.S., Lond., 1894, p. 383), but I feel some doubt _as to this reference being correct. _ P. gracilicornis, sp. nov. “Latus ; minus parallelus ; subnitidus ; minus convexus; nigro-piceus, marginibus antennis pal- pis pedibus elytrorumque granulis plus minusve rufes- centibus: antennis sat oracilibus, (articulis 6° 7° que quam latiores longioribus extus hoc vix illo haud dila- tatis, 8°-10° transversis extus leviter dilatatis); capite prothoraceque crebre subtilius (nullo modo obscure) punctulatis; hoc quam longior (et postice quam antice) plus quam duplo latiori, supra nullo modo canaliculato, Ps DEST eee ae eee eee ee 294 marginibus lateralibus minus latis bene definitis fortiter concavis, margine antico profunde sat anguste emargi- nato, angulis anticis obtusis posticis leviter acutis; ely- tris leviter striatis, striis subtiliter profunde punctulatis, interstitiis alternis apicem versus granulis minutis non- nullis (his nonnihil rufescentibus) ornatis, margine _laterali lato (quam P. granulati, Germ. nonnihil lati-— : ori); corpore subtus nitido; abdomine fere toto strigato. — Long,) 5.1.3 lat., do. A species of broader and less parallel form than is usual in this group, resembling in outline the species that I take to be P. peltatus, Er. The granules on the elytra are con- fined to the subapical portion and are extremely small and inconspicuous. Western Australia: Coolgardie and other localities. P. ventralis, sp. nov. Sat parallelus; sat opacus; minus con-— vexus; higro-piceus, marginibus antennis palpis pedi- busque rufescentibus ; antennis modicis (articulis 6° quam — 70 latior longior! extus parum dilatato, 7° vix transverso extus sat dilatato, 8°-10° fortiter transversis extus for- titer dilatatis) ; capite crebre subtiliter, prothorace supra subtilissime minus crebre, punctulatis; hoc quam longior (et: postice quam antice) plus quam duplo latiori, supra haud vel vix manifeste canaliculato, marginibus latera- libus fere ut P. granulati, Germ. (1.e., latis, sat planis, intus male definitis), margine antico sat anguste sat pro- funde emarginato, angulis anticis subrotundatis posticis — sat acutis; elytris seriatim nonnihil geminatim minus fortiter punctulatis, interstitiis alternis granulis parvis nitidis sat squabiliter ornatis, margine laterali angusto (quam P. granulati, Germ., multo angustiorl) ; corpore subtus sat nitido; abdomine latera versus vix manifeste strigato. Long., 8 1.; lat., 3¢ 1. Allied to P. granulatus, Germ., but very distinct from it by the lateral margins of its elytra much less widely ex- planate; differs from granuwlatus also by, inter alia, its larger — size, more elongate build, front of prothorax more narrowly © emarginate, and with more rounded angles, elytra with more — numerous granules, ventral segments almost without longi- tudinal wrinkles, etc. Western Australia: Coolgardie, etc. P. brevicornis, sp. nov. Elongatus ; sat parallelus ; sat opacus ; minus convexus ; piceus, antennis palpis marginibus pedi- bus et corpore subtus plus minusve rufescentibus; an- tennis brevibus (articulis 6° quam latior haud longiori — extus fortiter dilatato, 7°-10° fortiter transversis extus 4 i 295 fortiter dilatatis) ; capite prothoraceque supra subtiliter sat crebre punctulatis; hoc quam longior duplo (postice quam antice dimidia parte) latiori, supra vix perspicue canaliculato, marginibus lateralibus latis (fere ut P. granulati, Germ.) extus manifeste reflexis intus manifeste definitis, margine antico sat profunde emarginato, angulis anticis obtusis posticis acutis; elytris seriatim subtiliter punctulatis, interstitiis planis (alternis granulatis), granulis parvis (his scutellum versus minutissimis), mar- gine laterali sat angusto (quam P. granulati, Germ., multo angustiori); corpore subtus sat nitido. lLong., 64 1; lat., 3 1. This species is readily distinguishable, in the aggregate having the 6th joint of the antenne strongly dilated, by its very short antennz, depressed form, flat elytral interstices, and very fine elytral granules,—the latter almost obsolete in the scutellar region. Its prothorax resembles that of P. bul- latus, Pasc. Central Australia. From the collection of the late J. Anderson. P. puer, sp. nov. Sat parallelus; minus opacus; sat con- vexus ; ferrugineus vel piceo-ferrugineus, marginibus an- tennis palpis pedibus et corpore subtus dilutioribus; an- tennis sat brevibus (articulis 6° quam latior haud longi- ori extus sat fortiter dilatato, 7°-10° fortiter transversis extus fortiter dilatatis); capite subtiliter, prothorace supra subtilissime, sat crebre punctulatis; hoc quam longiori vix plus quam duplo (postice quam antice dimi- dia parte) latiori, supra vix vel haud manifeste canalicu- lato, marginibus lateralibus latis (fere ut P. granulati, Germ.) extus perspicue reflexis intus bene definitis, mar- gine antico sat profunde emarginato, angulis anticis ob- tusis posticis acutis; elytris seriatim sat subtiliter punc- tulatis, interstitiis alternis leviter convexis sat squabi- liter sat crebre granulis nitidis insignibus, margine laterali sat angusto (quam 7. granulati, Germ. multo angustior1); corpore subtus sat nitido; abdomine latera versus crebre strigato. Long., 63-7 1.; lat., 3-34 1. Allied to P. bullatus, Pasc., from which it differs by mnter alia its smaller size, its prothorax less transverse more narrowed and more deeply emarginate in front and with much better defined front angles,.the alternate interstices of its elytra more distinctly convex, and the 6th joint of its antennz scarcely transverse. In some examples the elytra have a slightly bronzy tone. Western Australia. Apparently widely distributed. 296 LONGICORNES. MACRONES. M. Besti, sp. nov. Elongatus; rostro testaceo; palpis obscure brunneis; antennis nigris apicem versus nonnihil pices- centibus; capite postice nigro, pone oculos fortiter trans- versim rugato; prothorace nigro obscure rufescenti, quam latiori sublongiori, subtiliter aspero, tripartito, (hoc superne viso parte antica sat equali ad latera dila- tata; parte media fortiter elevata, in medio late pro- funde longitudinaliter sulcata, disco utrinque obsolete bi- tuberculato, angulis posticis subdentiformibus, lateribus valde rotundato-dilatatis ; parte postica minus brevi,—fere — ut M. rufi, Saund.); scutello nigro; elytris pallide testa- ceis, sutura margine laterali lineisque discoidalibus 2 costiformibus, parte subsuturali levi parte externa cre- — bre sat fortiter punctulata; pedibus rufis, femoribus posticis in medio tibiis (basi summa et parte apicali ex-— ceptis) tarsisque anterioribus 4 infuscatis; sternis ob- scure rufis, abdomine (segmento basali albido excepto) rufo; femoribus nonnihil subclavatis, fere ut VW. rufi, — Saund. Long., 12 1.; lat., 12 1. Easily distinguishable from the other described species — of the genus by its colouring. Apart from colouring and size the known species of Macrones resemble each other rather closely. The following characters in combination, however, separate the present species satisfactorily from the rest (ex- — cept subclavatus, Pasc. which I do not know, but which is very differently coloured): eyes large (as in rufus), and round; head very strongly wrinkled transversely in hind part; intermediate area of pronotum widely and equally sul- cate in its whole length and having its sides roundly dilated ; basal area of pronotum as long as in rufus; femora compara- tively robust and subclavate (as in rufus). In respect of colouring, the head and prothorax black or dark piceous with 7 j the muzzle testaceous (almost whitish) separate this Mac- rones from all the others yet described. ° Victoria: Buffalo Mount; taken by Messrs. Best and French, jun. PHYTOPHAGA. PaRopsis. P. acclivis, sp. nov. Mas. Sat late subovata, minus convexa, altitudine majori (a latere visa) sat longe pone marginem medium posita; modice nitida; ferruginea, elytris verru- cis nigris ornatis, corpore subtus nigro rufo-variegato, antennis basi excepta obscuris; capite inzquali minus subtiliter sat rugulose punctulato, basin summam versus 297 nigricanti; prothorace quam longiori ut 2# ad 1 latiori, ab apice sat longe ultra medium dilatato, crebre sat for- titer (ad latera grosse rugulose) punctulato, lateribus for- titer arcuatis, late leviter deplanatis, angulis posticis nul- lis; scutello sublevi; elytris sub callum humeralem de- pressis, pone basin transversim leviter impressis, crebre fortiter sat seriatim (ad latera paullo magis, postice paullo minus, grosse) punctulatis, verrucis (his a basi ad apicem continuis) nonnullis elongatis nonnullis rotundatis in- structis, interstitiis sat rugulosis, parte marginali a disco (per sulculum minus perspicua) indeterminate divisa, calli humeralis margine interno a sutura quam ab elytrorum margine sat multo magis distanti; segmento ventrali basali (hoc rufo) sparsim subtiliter punctulato; anten- narum articulo 3° quam 4'S paullo longiori. Long., 54 1.; lat., 34 1. In Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1901 (p. 160), I furnished a classification of the groups into which it appeared to me that the genus Paropsis could conveniently be divided. The present species appertains to Group iil. as there characterized. In loc. cit. 1896 (p. 643) I divided that group into sub-groups of which sub-group 11. must receive this species. In loc. cit. (pp. 653-657) I tabulated the then known species of this sub- group and in that tabulation the present species must be placed beside P. comma, Blackb., from which it may be thus distinguished : — KK. Form much less wide; elytra less rounded at sides. L. Greatest height of the insect (view- ed from the side) not behind mid- dle of elytral margin .. comma, Blackb. LL. Greatest ‘height of the insect (viewed from side) _ consider- ably behind mid- dle of elytral margin ... ... acclivis, Blackb. I have no doubt that this distinction is shared by the female (which I have not seen). The greatest height of the insect is placed further from the base than in any other nearly allied species. It also differs from P. comma in nume- rous other respects, ¢.g., larger size, narrower build, humeral callus much nearer lateral margin of elytra, absence of mark- ings on the pronotum, sides of pronotum less distinctly (though not less widely) explanate, evidently closer punctura- 298 tion of elytra. Compared with P. serpiginosa, Er., it is much larger, with its pronotum much more widely explanate, etc.,— — besides differing by the character tabulated above. From P. — baldiensis, Blackb., it differs inter alia multa by the extreme _ feebleness of the post-basal impression on its elytra, and from P. Sloanei (also somewhat like it superficially) by inter alia the presence of a well-marked depression below the humeral callus. It should be added that the elytra of this insect are more or less clouded with a darker colour than that of the general surface, giving them in some examples a blotchy ap- pearance, which obscures the verruce. King Island (Mr. Lea). ARSIPODA. Specimens of an Arsipoda taken by Mr. Lea on King {sland appear on a first inspection to differ from A. variegata more definitely than is consistent with their representing a mere variety. Nevertheless, comparison with specimens which I have taken in Victoria and New South Wales and have been unable to distinguish from variegata by any satisfactory char- acter, leads me to the conclusion that it would not be justi- fiable to treat these insular examples as a good species. I have from the Blue Mountains specimens which are distinctly intermediate in shape, colouring, and sculpture between those from King Island and ordinary Tasmanian specimens. It is of course possible that there are at least three or four very closely allied species very limited in habitat, of which varie- gata is one, but I cannot satisfy myself that that is the case. The present form may be characterized as follows :— A. kingensis, Blackb. (? vartegata, Waterh., var.). Quam forma normalis magis angusta, magis ovata; colore magis pallida (antennis fere totis testaceis) ; pronoto magis for- titer punctulato. — —— ——— —_— APPENDED NOTE. Since writing my remarks on Anodontonyx mniqro- lineata, Boisd. I have examined a specimen in the Macleay Museum bearing a ticket in the handwriting of Mr. W. S$. Macleay “Sericesthis nigrolineata, Macl.” As W. S. Macleay was a contemporary of Boisduval and is quoted in Dejean’s Cat. as authority for the name ndgrolineata I have little doubt that Boisduval’s name was taken from a specimen con- sidered identical with that I am referring to. The specimen in the Macleay Museum bearing Macleay’s label is specifically identical with that which was sent to me from Berlin as the type of Scitala languida, Er. This evidence seems to be 299 nally conclusive in confirming the identity of Anod. (Seric.) igrolineata, Boisd. and Anod (Scit.) languida, Er. The acleay Museum also possesses a specimen ticketed in W. S. acleay’s writing “Sericesthis sublineata, Macl.” Although cannot find any description to have been published under nat name it may be well to note here that the specimen in uestion is merely a slight colour-var. of A. nigrolineata dif- ering from the type by the feebleness of the black lines on its 300 THE QUALITY OF THE SECONDARY IONISATION DUE TO Bp RAYS. By W. H. Brace, M.A., F.R.S., Elder Professor of Mathe- matics and Physics in the University of Adelaide, and J. P. V. Mapssn, B.Sc., B.E., Lecturer on Electrical — Engineering. [Read October 1, 1907.] The so called secondary radiation due to 8 rays has been studied by many observers. Quite recently McClelland and — H. W. Schmidt have contributed important sets of papers upon the subject. It is usual to estimate the amount or the energy of the — primary and secondary streams by measuring the ionisation produced within an ordinary ionisation-chamber placed in the path of the rays, the principal reason being that such mea- surements can be made with cofvenience and accuracy. But it is only under very special conditions that this procedure is legitimate, because the 8 particle produces more ions in traversing a given space when its velocity is small than when it is great; in other words, the ionisation increases as the speed diminishes. If two streams of B radia- tion are to be compared by this method, it is one of the essential conditions of success that the velocities of the two streams shall be the same, or similarly distributed. This would not be necessary if the ionisation-chamber were made so large that even the fastest 8 particles spent their ionis-— ing powers within it, and if the whole ionisation produced ~ by a B particle might be taken as a measure of its energy. — But it is usual to employ a small chamber, placed compara- tively near to the source of the rays; and in this way an un-— fair advantage is given to the particles of smaller velocity. The experiments to be described in this paper show that _ the secondary radiations returned by different substances — struck by the same primary stream are not uniform in qual- ity, but vary from substance to substance. When the ato- mic weight of the substance is small, the radiation is rela-_ tively soft; it contains a larger proportion of less penetrating — rays. If, therefore, the constants of secondary ionisation are measured in the usual way, they are exaggerated in the case of substances of low atomic weight, as compared with those — the atoms of which are heavier. | For the purpose of observing the secondary ionisation due _ t» B rays we have adopted the form of apparatus shown - 301 in the figure. The plate at A scatters in all direc- tions the radiation which it receives from the ra- dium at R. Nearly all the returned particles strike the hemispherical wall BB’ of the ionisa- tion chamber, the larger hemisphere CC’ being Sem. connected to the electro- Fic. I. meter. The usual shield- ing devices are used, but not shown in the figure. This arrangement gathers in the effects of all the secondary rays, so that a measurable effect is obtained, even when only a small quantity of radium is used When the cup or dome BB is made of very thin Al foil, stretched on a frame of a few fine wires, the effects ob- tained by placing plates of different metals at A approxi- mate to those given by McClelland—that is to say, the curve which shows the relation between secondary ionisation and atomic weight, is of the same general form as McClel- land’s, though somewhat flatter. But when the dome is thick- ened by the addition of layers of tinfoil, there is a conside- ' rable alteration. The addition of tinfoil of a tenth of a millimetre in thickness is sufficient to make the curve almost linear, and the ionisation is then nearly proportional to the atomic weight of the radiator. The figures in the following table show the results of an experiment of this kind. They give the ionisation cur- rents, on an arbitrary scale, for different radiators and dif- ferent thicknesses of the dome. The smaller figures are only approximate : — hoes Ae Wisner Sie AL oC. 1. Thin Al leaf 1300" S1016> "798-679" 484 391 bo 2. Sn. foil (0065 mm 1124 829 627 519 352 276 141 ec 6-043 eiee 97908180 45 085 57 OI a) 080 Riga: 1eGe NST C665 35 QL. 8 _— } C116 Mo Gh Mdvise dO. 120° 6 Bes 1153 PINS On BINT 5 Assuming that the returned radiation is really due to a scattering of the primary beam, there are two ways of in- terpreting these results. The 8 radiation of radium is hete- rogeneous, and consists of rays of various velocities. | Accord- ing to H. W. Schmidt there are a certain number of groups, each homogeneous in itself (Ann. der Phys., Nov., 1906). It 302 is conceivable that the effect of varying the atomic weight of the radiator might depend on the velocity of the B particle, and that the smaller atomic weights might return a relatively small amount of fast primary rays. Assuming the velocity of the secondary rays to be of the order of that of the pri- mary, it would then follow that the constitution of a hete- rogeneous primary beam would be altered by scattering, the alteration depending on the atomic weight of the scattering substance or radiator, and being of the nature indicated by experiment. Crowther (Phil. Mag., Oct., 1906) has described an experiment which appears to show a considerable effect of this kind. He found that the secondary ionisation due to the B rays of UrX was much more nearly proportional to atomic weight than in the case of radium, as studied by McClelland, and he has suggested that the difference ‘may be due to the presence in the radium radiation of compara- tively slowly-moving 8 rays.” On the other hand, H. W. Schmidt has recently found (Ann. der Phys. Bd., 23, 1907) that the behaviour of substances under radiation from the B rays of UrX is not very different to that found by McClel- land in the case of radium. As it was important to settle this point, if we were to find the true interpretation of our © own experiments, we put together the apparatus of the form used by Crowther, and repeated his experiments with UrX,. using also radium and actinium. The apparatus is not very well suited, as Schmidt points out, for obtaining accurately the proportion between secondary and primary; but it gives. a ready answer to the question as to whether or no the speed of the 8 particle has any effect. Subtracting the effects of the carbon plate from all the others, and setting lead equal to 200, we obtained the follow- ing results : — Pbk y 4S: Ag. 5-4} af Ctenecdte dae AGicc., +...200.'. 158 ~ 147, 110), 102) eae UX 22. fac. 200 160 LAT fab 102 Bb 2e bs: . 200.) Alb5 145), - 106:59 ¢-99°54 .Bbe Gas 25.0 DOO gh52:b00 14 op Oss 24h ene 31 Rao. 200 (ah52 145 99 82 68 25°5 ALpts.. .200 + (SZ A283 88 82:5 is 27°5 The screens used were as follows :— : Ac—Thin mica + thin tinfoil; the two equivalent to about 10 cm. of air, and enough to cut off all a rays. UrX—No screen. Ra 1—Thin mica + tinfoil, the latter (00366 cm. thick- Ra 2—Thin mica + tinfoil, the latter ‘0293 cm. thick. Ra 3—Thin mica + tinfoil, the latter ‘0586 cm. thick. Ra 4—Thin mica + lead, the latter equivalent to ‘11 cm- of tinfoil. S00000 © 303 The figures for Ra 1, Ra 2, Ra 3, are fcr B rays only, the effects of y rays having been eliminated. The figures for Ra 4 have not been corrected for y rays, and must, indeed, refer almost entirely to rays of the latter class. The velocity of the B rays of Ac is less than in the case of UrX. In the case of radium it varies; some of the rays are as little penetrating as those of Ac, others more than the rays of UrX. The figures seem to show that there is a certain small dependence on the velocity of the 6 rays, but it is insufficient to account for the variations in quality which have been described above. We must therefore fall back upon a second explanation, viz., that the scattered rays possess velocities which are less, on the average, than those of the primary; and that the dif- ference is greater in the case of the atoms of small atomic weight. This is in general accordance with other experi- ments and with expectation. It has been shown by Gehrcke (Ann. der Phys., viii., p. 81, 1902) that scattered cathode Tays possess a variety of velocities, pone greater than that of the primary, some, however, being equal to it. And it is not unreasonable to suppose that 8 rays lose more energy in being scattered by atoms of less weight or of looser building than by those which are heavier or more rigid. If, there- fore, a homogeneous beam of 8 rays fell upon an aluminium plate, there would be found in the scattered secondary rays a larger proportion of particles of much reduced speed than if the plate had been lead. When we measure the ionisation produced in an ionisa- tion chamber, and insert successive thicknesses of absorbing material between the radiating substance and the chamber, placing them in contact with the wall of the latter, the effect is the same as if we gradually removed the chamber to greater distances ; if we may assume that the law of absorption in air and in the given absorbing material is not greatly affected by the alterations in quality which we are considering. We may, therefore, take the figures in any vertical column of the first table given above as showing the effects of the secondary radiation at various distances from the radiator. If we plot an ionisation-distance curve the whole area between the curve and the axes is the true measure of the ionisation due to the returned rays. The usual plan is to accept as a measure the one figure at the head of the column. We find that in each case the curve may be nearly ex- e — Xr. pressed as the sum of two exponentials as Ae “™ 4+ BY. Whether this has a physical meaning or not does not concern our immediate argument. Commencing with one thickness of tinfoil on the dome, the actual figures are— 1) TI, UT. IV.. —60x —13°6x iceiter Pipl tip 564e. + 560¢ 200 ) 200 —d7r —l4x / Agi as 49 2¢ + 337e | 125 | 140 —57a —l4er | Fak BN! Ae! 40 9786 peabe | 98:5 — 5x —l4x | TB 8, 365e + 1d4e 61°5 76°5 | 5 on 1352 | S iss 264e 4. fd Be | 35 43 —73x —l4er } ae 218e + 6586 19°5 27°5 _735 der , C Wf 117e + 2286 0) i) The area of the curve is given by A/A, + B/A:z, and the relative values of the areas are placed in the third column, © that of C being first subtracted and that of Pb being set equal to 200. In the last column are the corresponding figures when the amount of radiation is measured by A + B, .e., the ionisation found when one layer of tinfoil is placed over the chamber. It is clear that there is a considerable difference. | When tinfoil is placed over the radium itself so as to cut out a large proportion of the slower 8 rays, the secondary © radiation is also hardened correspondingly. The figures here given are not sufficiently accurate to be taken as absolute. The measurements were made as care- — fully as possible, but more numerous and more varied experi- ments are needed before it will be possible to map out the — phenomena with exactness. But the results show clearly that— (1) The secondary radiation from aithrene substances, due to the B and y rays of radium, varies in quality, those of lower atomic weight returning a oreater proportion of less — penetrating rays. | (2) When the less penetrating portion of a primary beam © of B rays from radium is sorted out, the secondary rays also — become more penetrating. | (3) In view of these considerations the ionisation cur- — rent due to secondary radiation, measured in a chamber of — the ordinary form, does not give a simple or accurate deter- mination of the nature of that radiation. ) 7 205 a a NOTES ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MARINE MOLLUSCA, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES.—PART VII. By Jos. C Verco, M.D., Lond., F.R.C.S., Eng., Ete. PLATE XIX: [Read September 3, 1907.| Cyclostrema homalon, n. sp. Pl. xxix., figs. 5, 4. Shell small, thin, flatly depressed, of 44 whorls. Apical whorls convex smooth. Spire whorls fiat excavately sloping towards the upper suture, rounded towards the lower, with a spiral near the upper suture, which is well adpressed so as to simulate another spiral, and two near the lower suture. Body whorl large, with about seven spirals, the lowest form- ing a basal carina, starting where the inner lip joins the body whorl at its base, and ending at the outer third of the basal lip. Umbilicus large and perspective, with about ten spiral lire. There is a smooth area between the outermost and the basal carina. The aperture is quadrate, with round- ed angles, and lies in an oblique vertical plane. ° The labrum is excavated at a little distance from the suture, then pro- jects curvedly forwards, and then continuously retrocedes. The inner lip is applied to the base, so that the aperture is not quite circular or complete. Very fine crowded axial microscopic markings, which do not follow the sinuosities of the outer lip. Dim.—Largest diameter, 27 mm.; smallest, 2 mm.; height, 1 mm. Diagnosis.—C. harriette, Petterd, is closely allied, but has a less open umbilicus, and its labrum is not sinuous on the dorsum, but has a continuous convex curve; and the intra- umbilical spirals are much finer and more crowded. Variations.—One variety attains a size of 41 mm. in diameter, and is more solid. Its aperture 1s rounder; the umbilicus wider and more perspective, is radially wrinkled, and may not have so many spiral lire. There may be no spiral lira near the suture on the whorls, nor any elsewhere, or there may be several on the sides of the body-whorl. Some show the basal carina distinctly, others feebly, and others not at all; but the sinuosity of the lip is present and the miscroscopic radial markings. Locality.—Type, 62 fathoms north-west of Cape Borda; var., 130 fathoms, Cape Jaffa. 306 Cyclostrema pachyston, n. sp. Pl. xxix., fig. 10. Shell orbicular, depressed, of five whorls, spire slightly elevated. First two and a half whorls convex, smooth, fol-_ lowed by a spire-whorl, with five equidistant spiral lire. Body-whorl upper surface flatly sloping, nearly smooth, with fine curved axial wrinkles antecurrent just below the suture, then obliquely retrocedent. Side convex, with four well- marked spiral lire to the periphery. Base rounded with about eight spiral cords, very flat and low, separated only by incisions. Umbilicus minute, nearly filled up by flat callus expansions of the inner lip, producing rude curved radial wrinkles. Aperture round; outer lip oblique, thin and simple, somewhat crenulated outside by the lire; basal part thicker and smooth; inner lip thin where applied to the base of the body-whorl, and expanding beyond the concave colu- mella as a thick shiny smooth callus to the centre of the per- foration. Dim.—Greatest diameter, 2,15 mm.; smallest, 2 mm.; height, 1°5 mm. Locality.—62 fathoms, north-west of Cape Borda, 10 dead. The largest example is 3°2 mm. in diameter. In the larger shells the perforation becomes more open, and its sides are radially wrinkled. Cyclostrema denselaminatum, n. sp. Pl. xxix., fig. 9. Shell opaque-white, minute, turbinate, of four whorls, nearly detached, rapidly increasing. Protoconch one and three-quarter whorls, flatly convex, smooth. Spire-whorls convex. Sutures deep. Aperture circular, complete, de- tached from the base of the body-whorl; border simple. Um- bilicus moderate, perspective. Sculpture begins abruptly from the protoconch; valid axial laminz, about as high as wide, and one-half or one-third as wide as the interspaces, crowded, nearly 50 in the body-whorl, completely encircling the whorls and so visible in the umbilicus. Fine hair-like spiral threads, about 40 in the body-whorl, less crowded on the base and near the suture than on the periphery. Dim.—Greatest diameter, 1°55°mm.; smallest, 1°4 mm.; height, 1°] mm. Diagnosis.—-Scala nepeanensis, Gatliff, is more elate and has fewer axial lamine. Cyclostrema anyeli, Ten. Woods, is more elate and has a smaller perforation. C. johnston, Bed- dome, is similar in shape and has crowded axials, but has no spirals. Locality.—Type from 62 fathoms, north-west of Cape Borda; Backstairs Passage, 22 fathoms, 6 dead. 307 Gibbula reedi, ». sp. Pl. xxix., fig. 5. Shell solid, depressed conoid. Whorls, 4 smooth, flatly convex, slightly hollowed just below the suture. Summit blunt. Suture impressed. Periphery round, barely angu- late. Base convex. Umbilicus moderate. Aperture oblique, roundly elliptical; outer lip simple, bevelled inside; a short thin glaze on the base of the whorl; columella arcuate, evert- ed posteriorly, with a tiny notch where it joins the round basal lip at the end of the bordering lira of the umbilicus; throat smooth and iridescent. Sculpture: the dorsum looks as though it were spirally lirate, but is really quite smooth except for very fine miscroscopic curved retrocurrent accre- mental scratchings. On the base are about a dozen fine spiral incisions, with radial scratch-marks more valid and distant than on the dorsum; these are still stouter and wrinkling within and near the perforation. An inconspicuous lira bor- ders the umbilicus, which has a shallow groove just above it. Colour, chestnut-brown, with dark-brown spiral hair-lines of varying width; dotted with tiny white spots, which, below the suture, are aggregated into small pyramidal blotches with their apex upward, six in the body-whorl. A white band, scalloped on both edges of these aggregated dots, encircles the periphery. An articulated white-and-brown spiral orna- ments the lira bordering the umbilicus, a second lies just out- side this, and another with more distant double white spots beyond ; the rest of the base, which is of a lighter tint than the dorsum, has scattered tiny white dots. The umbilicus is white. Over all is a transparent glaze, with a bronze reflex. Dim.—Greatest diameter, 6°2 mm.; smallest, 5 mm.; height, 3 mm. The species may reach 72 mm. Locality.—The beach, Holdfast Bay (Tate); lLeven’s Beach, Yorke Peninsula (Zietz). It seems to be quite lit- toral. I have not dredged it. There may be a faint gutter where the labrum joins the body-whorl. The colour may be dark-brown. The peri- pheral white band may fade out toward the aperture. The white blotches beneath the suture and the articulated bands around the perforation seem the most constant ornament. It was formerly called in South Australia Gibbula Fes- serula, Ten. Woods, and was so catalogued as No. 348 in Ad- cock’s Handlist of the Aquatic Moll. of South Australia, 1893, but his species has been recognized as an immature Diloma Adelaide, Philippi. It has been named after Mr. Walter Reed, a South Aus- tralian collector, who took it on our shores. 308 Adeorbis kimberi, n. sp. Pl. xxix., figs. 1, 2. Shell minute, translucent, oval. Whorls 2}. Spire very low. Apex blunt; protoconch half a whorl, its apex buried, smooth, rounded, marked off from the spire-whorl by a scar. Suture impressed, slightly excavate. Periphery sharply carinate. Base very flatly rounded, and pressed flat at the carina. Umbilicus very wide and not defined. Aper- ture roundly oval, nearly on the basal plane; outer lip uni- formly round, simple, thin, pinched into a minute gutter close to the suture; inner lip is a thin glaze over the body-whorl. Columella slightly arcuate, its edge posteriorly expanded and reflected over the umbilicus. Sculpture: crowded fine micro- scopic curved accremental lines; on the base more valid and fewer, and as radiating curved wrinkles, which faintly crinkle the carina. Dim.—Greatest diameter, 3°7 mm.; smallest, 2°99 mm.; _ height, 1°2 mm. ; ; Locality.—Aldinga (Kimber). Dredged in St. Vincent Gulf in about 20 fathoms (Verco). Diagnosis.—It is allied to A. angasi, Adams, but has not the distant tubercles on the carina. It is named after the collector who found it. q ee le, Torcula runcinata, Watson. PI. xxix,, fig. 14. i Turritella runcinata, Watson, Proc. Linn. Soc., Lond., 1881, vol. xv., p. 218; Chall. Zool., 1886, Gasteropoda, vol. xv., p. 475, 7 pl xxx,, fie. 3: + An individual of 38 mm. in length was dredged alive. The radula is exceedingly small compared with the size of the shell. It has a somewhat quadrate rachidian tooth, finely denticulated, along the edge of its upper border, bent forward at a sharp angle. The single lateral is transversely rhom- boidal, about twice as large as the central, and is also finely denticulate along the free edge of its bent-forward upper mar- gin. The two marginals, elbowed about their middle, have a flange projecting from their upper border, and finely den- tate. Miss J. Donald, in a paper on “Some Recent Gastero- poda, referred to the Family Turritellide, and their Supposed Relationship to the Murchisoniidz,” read January, 1900, and published in Pro. Mal. Soc., London, 1901, p. 47, ete., men- tions 7. runcinata, Watson, among other species of 7'urritella, and from their deep labral sinus suggests their affinity with Murchisonia. The Pleurotomariide and Murchisoniide are regarded as belonging to the Rhipidoglossa. But the radula of 7’. runcinata, Watson, plainly places it among the Tenioglossa, and allies it with the ordinary forms of J'urrt- tella, rather than with Murchisonia. Tf therefore Murchi- § e @ 4 . 309 sonia is to be associated with those 7'wrritellas which Miss Donald has grouped under a new section, Colpospira, because of their deep sinus, this group must still be placed among the Turritellide, and Murchisonia must be shifted with them into the same family, among the Tzenioglossa, and separated from the Pleurotomariide and other Rhipidoglossa. But the resemblances i the test of her Co/pospura, and of A/urchisonia are scarcely sufficient to justify this. Actzon “ei fisted var. areatus, new vay. ~Acta@on roseus, n. , Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc., New South Wales, 1905, p. 535, a. ses abit: f. 42, Type locality —W yargine Point, Middle Har bour, Sydney ; ; also Eden, New South Wales. Our South Australian shell has a shorter spire and a longer aperture ; also two white spiral bands and several undu- lating axial bands, which break the colour up into oblong blotches. Dredged in 18 fathoms, Investigator Strait; 22 fathoms, Yankalilla Bay; 15 fathoms, off Point Marsden, Kangaroo Island; and 25 fathoms, Thorny Passage, Spencer Gulf; all dead. | Actzon retusus, n. sp. Pl. xxix., fig. 12. Shell oval, shining, translucent, yellowish-white, thin, of six whorls. Protoconch of one whorl, apex immersed, convex, quite smooth, ending abruptly in an oblique retrocurrent scar. Spire whorls roundly shouldered immediately below the suture, then convexly sloping. Suture deeply narrowly chan- nelled. Body-whorl roundly-obliquely cylindrical. Aperture obliquely-arcuately pyriform. Outer lp simple, smooth inside, finely-crinkled outside, very slightly compressed above its centre ; basal lip well-rounded, its inner half distinctly evert- ed. Columella with a wide, simple oblique fold just below the base of the body-whorl, over which the thin inner lip is applied to join the labrum at the suture. Umbilicus small. Spiral incisions, six in the penultimate, forty in the body- whorl, extending to the columella, where they become crowded and fine. Very delicate, close-set, axial striz cross the incl- sions, which they punctate, climb, and crenulate their sides, and traverse the intervening flat spiral bands. Dim.—Length, 9°4 mm.; breadth, 61 mm. Length of aperture, 6°5 mm.; width, 2°9 mm. Locality.—Type, 200 fathoms, off Beachport, with two other examples; also in 100, 110, and 150 fathoms; off Cape Jaffa in 90 and 130 fathoms; N.W. of Cape Borda in 60 fa- thoms. In good condition, but none alive. Diagnosis.—It differs from A. roseus, Hedley, var. areatus, Verco, in having a much less acute apex, a more elevated spire, narrower incisions, more crowded axial striz, a less pro- 310 nounced columellar fold, and the absence of the colour-pat- tern. Variations.—One shell is somewhat more ventricose, another more elate, with more valid axial strie; the former has two faint rusty blotches of colour on the dorsum of the body-whorl, a little below the suture; the latter has the trace of a pinkish tinge. Pupa intermedia, Angas. Buccinulus intermedius, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1373. ees, ol liy.; 2. 11. "Type locality, Aldinga. R Adoock, Handlist of Aquatic Moll. of S. Austr., 1893, p. 10, O. Solidula intermedia, Angas, Pilsbry., Man. Conch, vol. xv., 1893, p. 145, pl. xxa, figs. 55, 56 It has been dredged dead in Hardwicke Bay, Spencer Gulf, Investigator Strait, St. Vincent Gulf, and Backstairs Passage, at all depths from 14 to 22 fathoms, and at 62 fathoms N.W. of Cape Borda. It has been taken alive at 15 fathoms, Inves- tigator Strait. It exhibits the following variations:—The middle third of the body-whorl may be slightly concavely compressed. The axial sculpture may vary from microscopic accremental striz, just punctating the spiral incisions, when these are narrow, or crenulating their edges when wider, up to fairly well- marked oblique striz, which divide the wide incisions into squarely-rounded shallow pits, and cross the intervening flat riblets. The spiral incisions may be equidistant all over the body-whorl, or absent from the upper half of the body-whorl, or they may be trebly distant here. They may be merely very fine and shallow punctate engravings, or rather wide furrows with crenulated edges, or latticed into squarish pits. But all variations grade into one another. Pupa hyalina, n. sp. Pl. xxix., fig. 11. Shell minute, diaphanous, fusiformly oval, five whorls. Protoconch distinct, glassy, smooth. Suture adpressed. Whorls sloping, convex. Aperture narrow, long, and pyri- form. Outer lip uniformly curved, simple, thin, continued into a round basal lip, which is thickened towards the colu- mella. The inner lip is a thin glaze over the body-whorl, and is expanded slightly beyond the pillar over the perforation. There is a curve of the columella forming a plait running into the basal lip, and a second well-marked oblique plait where the pillar joins the body-whorl. The spire-whorls have sub- lenticular wavy spiral incisions, which also cover the body- whorl, being most marked at the base, and nearly as well marked below the suture. Very fine, rather sinuous, accre- mental striz. Colourless. j 311 Dim.—Length, 3 mm.; diameter, 155 mm.; length of aperture, 2°2 mm. Locality.—Fowler and Streaky Bays (Tate). Myodora tasmanica, Tenison Woods. Myodora Tasmanica, n. sp., Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soe., Tasm., 1875 (1876), p. 160. Type locality—Long Bay, Tasmania. Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1901, vol. xxvi., part 3, p. 422, pl. xxvii., figs. 104-106. Dredged off Beachport in 100 fathoms, 5 valves; in 110 fathoms, 50; in 150 fathoms, 2; and in 200 fathoms, 2 valves. It was not taken in shallower waters off the same place, and has not been taken on the South Australian beaches. It ap- pears not to have been recorded from Victoria nor from New South Wales. Crassatellites kingicola, Lamarck. This shell was referred to by me in these Transactions, vol. xxix., 1905, p. 169, as C. ponderosus, Gmelin. It appears now that our C. castanea, Reeve, should be regarded as a variety of C. kingicola, Lamarck. It has been dredged in a subfossil state in soft limestone in the Port Adelaide Channel. One valve was taken in 40 fathoms, and two in 100 fathoms off Beachport, both small and poor. Hitherto, therefore, its habitat has been very re- stricted as to depth, viz., from 15 to 20 fathoms. Crassatellites discus, Hedley. Crassatellites discus, Hedley, Records Austr. Mus., vi., 1907, . 300, pl. lvi., figs. 26-27. Type locality, 80 fathoms, off Narra- een, New South Wales. None were dredged alive, but valves in good condition were obtained. Off Beachport, at 40 fathoms, 31 valves; at 49 fathoms, 22 valves; at 100 fathoms, 4 valves; at 110 fa- thoms, 20 valves; at 150 fathoms, 17 valves; and at 200 fa- thoms, 2 valves. Off Cape Borda, at 55 fathoms, 7 valves ; and at 62 fathoms, 5 valves. Off Cape Jaffa, in 130 fathoms, 14 valves. This seems not to occur in the gulfs of South Aus- tralia, but to be an ocean form, and to affect the deeper waters. Crassatellites carnea, Tate. Crassatella carnea, Tate; Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., vol. xiv., p. 263, pl. xi., f. 1, 14. Type locality—Yankalilla Bay. It has been dredged alive at all depths from 9 to 23 fathoms, most abundantly from 20 to 23 fathoms. Valves have been taken, small and in poor condition, off Beachport at 110 and 200 fathoms, and off Cape Jaffa, in 90 fathoms. Comparatively large valves were taken off Beachport in 40 312 fathoms, the largest being 25 mm. antero-posteriorly, and 20 mm. umbo-ventrally. Tate, in his original diagnosis, re- marked: “This species is very like (. aurora and CU. Banksii, Adams and Angas, inhabiting Bass Straits, with regard to colour, ornament, and crenated margin of valves. It is, how- ever, of a different form, is as widely removed from (. aurora as that species is from (’. Banksu; thus, C. Banksii is oblong- ovate, C’. aurora transversely ovate, and (/. carnea is more rotund. They may eventually prove to be variations in shape of an aggregate species.” The proportion of length to height in C. aurora is 24 to 17, or as 100 to 71. That of Tate’s type is 22 to 19, or 100 to 86°8. That of my largest is 25 to 20, or 100 to 80. There fore my largest shell approximates somewhat more to the type of (’. aurora than does Tate’s type of C. carnea, but is still much shorter; and as my larger shell is larger than Angas’s type, and is nevertheless shorter, and is an old stout shell, the difference is not. explained by the senility of Angas’s shell. C. carnea may consequently be retained for the pre- sent as a distinct species. Crassatellites banksii, Adams and Angas, var. angustior ; n. var. Crassatella banksui, Adams and Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1868, p. 427, pl. xxxvill., fig. 16. Type locality—Banks ees: Conch. Cab. Kuster, 1886, bd. x., abt. 1., p. 26, pl. vii., In 55 fathoms north-west of Cape Borda I dredged 16 small and 33 large valves of a species which corresponds with C. Banksw in its oblong-ovate shape and truncated posterior end and colouring. Its dimensions, however, do not corres- pond. It is narrower antero-posteriorly for the same height. CO. banksw is 16 mm. long by 10 high; mine are 12 mm. long by 10°2 high—hence the name angustior. My largest specimen is 23 mm. by 20°5. To be in proportion it should be 32°8 mm. long instead of 23. I have preferred to call it a variety rather than create another species based on this one difference. It has not occurred elsewhere in my dredging. Crassatellites producta, Verco. Crassatella producta, n. sp., Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 1895, vol. xixtj'p..92, plod., 2:72. Fifty valves were dredged off Cape Borda in 55 fathoms, in very good condition. Beyond this depth in the same neigh- bourhood at 60 and 62 fathoms; off the Neptunes, in 104 fa- thoms; and off Beachport, in 110 fathoms; from one to six valves in poor preservation were obtained, and none beyond. Its habitat is probably from 15 to 20 fathoms, up to 50. ; y ote “af 1 313 Crassatellites micra, Verco. Crasatella micra, Verco., Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 1895, vol. xix., p. 93, pl. 1, fig. 3. Previously dredged alive in 20 and 22 fathoms; one has since been taken alive in 16 fathoms, three miles off Tunk Head, and one perfect individual and 11 valves in 62 fathoms north-west of Cape Borda. Valves have been obtained off Beachport, 10 in 49 fathoms, and 12 in 110. Crassatellites probleema, n. sp. Pl. xxix., figs. 6, 7. Shell transversely-orbicularly oval, solid, projecting ante- riorly. Umbo prominent, incurved, prosogyre, acute. Post- dorsal side roundly sloping ; anterior dorsal side concave near the umbo, then nearly straight, continuing into a well-rounded front side; ventral border with a uniform open curve, merging into the slope of the posterior side, with an inconspicuous round angulation. The surface is cor- rugated with about twenty solid wide concentric ribs, more projecting at their upper border, wider than their interspaces. For about 2°5 mm. from the apex the surface is smooth. Inner border simple and smooth. Colour light horn-tint. Dim.—Antero-posterior diameter, 10°3 mm.; umbo-ven- tral, 9°4 mm.; sectional of the two valves, 4°25. Locality.—Off Beachport, in 100 fathoms, 2 valves; 150 _ fathoms, 14 valves. | Diagnosis.—In shape it is very like C. micra, Verco; but this is a much smaller shell, with an equal number of con- centric ribs, and these extend quite up to the apex. It closely approaches C. discus, Hedley, in the smooth area near the umbo, and in the marked concentric ribbing, but has the front much more produced, and the postero-lateral area not flat or truncated at the border. Variations.—In some the angle at the umbo is more acute and in others less than in the type, so that the shell is pro- portionally narrower or wider. In some, especially the wider ones, there is a tendency to slight truncation in the posterior part of the ventral border. Lima multicostata, Sowerby. lima multicostata, Sowerby, Thes. Conch., 1847, vol. 1, p. 85, tool. xxi., f. 38. Type locality—‘‘Mediterranean (?)’’ Reeve’s Conch. Icon., 1872, vol. xviii., pl. 1, f. 4; E. A. Smith, Chall. Rep., Zool., vol. xiii., 1885, p. 288; Tate, Trans. Proc. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 1886, vol. ix., p. 108; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soc., N. S. Wales, 1901, vol. xxvi., part 3, p. 440; Pritchard and Gatliff, Roy. Soc., Vict., 1904, vol. xvii., (N.S.), part 1, p. 259. Radula lima, Linné, Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 656, No. 91; Ten, Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc., Tasm., 1878, p. 56. Lima lima, Linn, var. multicostata, Sowerby, Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., vol. iv., 1902, p. 309. 7 314 Dredged alive at all depths, from 9 to 30 fathoms; em- bedded in sponge or attached inside dead Pinna inermis, ete. Off Beachport and Cape Jaffa, valves only, at 49, 110, 130, and 200 fathoms. One specimen, at 110 fathoms, off Beach- port, has 45 ribs; usually they have from 25 to 30. Lima bullata, Born, _ _Ostrea bullata, Born., Mus. Caes. Vindobon, 1780, p. 110, pl. vi., f. 8; Dillwyn, Desc. Cat., 1817, p. 270. Lima bullata, Born., Sowerby, Thes. Conch., 1843, vol. i., p- 84, pl. xx., f. 32, 33; Hanley, Cat. Rec. Bivalve. Shells, 1843, p. 266; Sowerby in Reeve’s, Conch. Icon., 1872, vol. xviii., p. 1, f. 3 aand b; Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 1886, vol. ix., p. 109, No. 162; Adcock, Handlist Aquatic Moll., S. Austr., 1893, p. 14, No. 202; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., vol. iv., part 5, 1902, p. 310. Radula (Iimatula) bullata, Born., Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 656, No. 93. Iima (Iimatula) bullata, Born., Tryon, Struct. and Syst. Conch., 1884, vol. iii., p. 287, pl. 182, f. 93; E. A. Smith, Chall. Zool., 1885, vol. xiii., p. 292; Tate and May, Proc. Linn. Soe., N.S. Wales, 1901, vol. xxvi., part 3, p. 440; Pritchard and Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc., Vict., 1904, vol. xvii. (N.S.), part 1, p. 260. ‘Lima strangei, Sowerby, in Reeve’s Conch. Icon., 1872, vol. xviii., pl. 1, f. 3a, b. Dredged alive at Port Lincoln in 9 fathoms, 1 very small; in Backstairs Passage in 18 fathoms, 1, and in 20 fathoms, 4, so that it is very rare in deep water. Valves have been taken off Beachport, Cape Jaffa, and off the Nep- tune Islands at 40, 60, 90, 100, 150, and 200 fathoms, gene- rally in poor condition, especially the larger examples. Lima angulata, Sowerby. Inma angulata, Sowerby, Thes. Conch., 1843, vol. i., p. 86, pl. xxii, f£. 39 and 4. Type tocality.—Panama and Bay of Caraccas, 10 to 12 fathoms. Sowerby, in Reeve’s Conch. Ieon., 1872, vol. xviii., pl. iii., f. 18; Tate, Trams. Roy. Soc., S. Austr., 1886, vol. ix., p. 109; Adcock’s Handlist, 1893, p. 14, No. 201; Hedley, Mem. Austr. Mus., 1902, vol. iv., p. 310. Radula (Mantellum) angulata, Sowerby, sp. Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1865, p. 656, No. 92. In Hardwicke Bay, Spencer Gulf, they occur in enor- mous numbers, from near shore to fifteen miles out, form- ing nests of small shells and fragments of shell in dead Car- dium valves, etc., in about 15 fathoms. They have also been dredged at all depths from 9 to 24 fathoms, alive, through- out Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs and Backstairs Passage. Off Beachport 4 well-preserved valves were taken in 110 fathoms, and 5 in 200 fathoms. It appears not to have been secured in Victoria or Tasmania, though taken off the coast of New South Wales in 50 and 75 fathoms, as valves. om wees arly 5) io? a ‘ 2 Pr petene 2 a eg em - a = . é J P “ay heat a ; mes i> ml s . At om “A bt if ae Seiahel ah SA HM sky : ou ° 4 72, 4 a / » 7 a4 P > ) < Shins yn om “ Y % 5 ' r ‘ , ‘ jaa x : * », 5 ; - . ‘ Te ‘ n . : a * ¥ ‘ h F . e ey “4 = é ca < Z . - og Ld . a 2 ‘; ¥; . eae) : . RA ary 4 p om) * 2 2 ? ‘6 been ot A 5s ‘ f > t fi a t a s - ¥ Z ee oe . . L . d e a? S 7 2 a "3 ~ i ‘ Se "7 y * 4 ‘ ; awe ’ yy 7 - om qis £3 , a r mie a = = , $ $e * T: < ‘ > 2 r ' : } tc. ‘ Se 48 : . BAGS Fares . a ¥ ee R.H.P ULLEINE Vol. XXXL, Plate XXIX. Hussey & Gillingham, Priuters, Adelaide. 315 Limza murrayi, Smith. Tima murrayi, Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1891, p. 444, pl. xxxv., f. 26. ero ee te, aa Hedley, Records Austr. Mus., vol. : setts, ’ Predtey, Records Austr. Mus., vol. vi., part 2, 1905, 46, f. 10. Type locality—100 fathoms off Wollongong, also 300 fathoms east of Sydney Heads, N.S. Wales. Dredged, separate valves, off Eeachport, in 100, 110, 150, 200 fathoms; off Cape Jaffa in 130 and 300 fathoms; and in 104 fathoms, 35 miles south-west of Neptune Islands. Limza austrina, Tate. Iimea austrina, Tate, Trans. Proc. Roy Soc., S. Austr., vol. ix., 1886, p. 73, pl. iv., f. 7. This is a common shell in deeper water. It has been dredged alive, at all depths, from 15 to 22 fathoms in In- vestigator Strait, Backstairs Passage, and off Newland Head ; 1 in 8 fathoms, Eastern Cove, Kangaroo Island; and 1 in 49 fathoms, Beachport. It seems to be most abundant about 20 fathoms. Valves have been obtained in Spencer and St. Vincent Guifs; as far east as Beachport, where it has heen taken at 40 and 49 fathoms in numbers, and good; at 100, 150, and 200 few and poor; and as far west as Cape Borda and the Neptunes, in 45 and 55 fathoms. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIX. B Adeorbis kimberi, Verco, ventral view. side view. Cyclostrema homalon, Verco, dorsal view. re side view. Gubbula reedt, Verco. . Crassatellites ’ probleema, Verco, exterior. 5 po THEOrIOr , Leptothyra carinata, Verco. . Cyclostrema denselaminatum, Verco. 10. b pachyston, Verco. 11. Pupa hyalina, Verco. 12. Acteon retusus, Verco. 13. Arculara dipsacoides Hedley, radula. 14. Torecula runcinata, V Watson, radula: A., rachidian; B., lateral; C.D., marginals. £O G0 1.09 OY 09 80 = 316 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated) FoR 1906-7. LAL LLL LP PLP LLP LLL MA PRA PL PLD PD ORDINARY MEETING, NovEMBER 6, 1906. THe PresipEnt (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.), in the 7 chair. Papers.—‘‘The Phosphate Minerals from Elder Rock,” by Dovucias Mawson, B.E., B.Sc., and W. T. Cooxz, D.Sc. “Geological Features of Part of Eyre Peninsula,’ by Dove- LAg Mawson, B.E., B.Sc. “The Wadella Springs and Asso- ciated Bog Iron-ore Deposits,’ by the same author. Mr. Howchin apologized for the absence of Mr. Mawson, and read the papers contributed by the latter. ORDINARY MEETING, May 7, 1907. THe Presipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.), in the chair. Nomrnations.—R. F. Purdue, Mining Agent, Launces- ton, Tasmania; H.C. E. Muecke, Agent, Adelaide; John Darling, Corn Merchant, Adelaide; Professor R. W. Chap- man, M.A., B.C.E., Adelaide University ; W. T. Cooke, D.Se., Adelaide University. Exuisits.—J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., a caterpillar fun- gus from Davenport, England. This fungus (Spheria milr- taris) is of a bright-scarlet colour and erect growth. It would appear that, owing to the caterpillar burying itself in the soil preparatory for its pupa state, the spores of the fungus very readily find their way into the creature’s body, which _ becomes filled with the mycelium of the plant. Mr. W. © Howcuin, F.G.S., exhibited a piece of barbed wire from a fence at Blackfellows’ Creek which had been struck by light- ning. The lightning had run along the fence for 5 or 6 panels, fusing the surfaces of the wires and welding together some of the barbs. Leaving the fence the charge struck a tree about a chain away, splitting the butt and tearing up the ground around. The PresipEent exhibited a fulgurite or lightning-tube. The portion shown was 18 centimetres 317 (about 7 inches) long and 33 millimetres (about 14 inches) in diameter. The wall of the tube was about 1°5 to 2 milli- metres in thickness, and was composed of fused sand, smooth- ed and glazed on the inner surface, rough like sandpaper outside, and longitudinally folded in about seven nodose corrugations. [t was very brittle. This fulgurite was given to Dr. Verco by Mr. Whitton, of Warrina, near Oodnadatta, who supplied the following particulars: —At the end of No- vember, 1902, a severe thunderstorm passed over the dis- trict, and a tremendous explosive report was heard, attend- ed by a marked vibration of the ground. The next day a black boy found, about three-quarters of a mile from the station, a stunted mulga-tree, one of whose branches was split and charred, and immediately below was a depression in the sand. Groping in this he found a piece of sand tube, and took it to the station. Mr. Whitton visited the spot and followed the tube down for about 12 feet, beyond which he could not go, because the sand rolled in as fast as he threw it out. The tube stood in almost a vertical position, and varied but little in diameter and in the thickness of its walls. These curious tubes, produced by lightning, are not uncommon in New South Wales, and are found, Mr. Mawson stated, in the high peaks of Mexico and in the Pacific islands, and on Mount Ararat they have been found to penetrate the Andesite rocks. Mr. A. H. C. Zrerz, F.L.S., Assistant-Director of the Museum, showed bones of kangaroos _ and the extinct “pouched hon” (Thylacoleo carnifex), found by Mr. Zietz and his son at Salt Creek, Normanville. The _ kangaroo bones were very clearly marked by the sharp-cut- ting teeth of the marsupial “lion.” Mr. Zietz also exhibited varieties of goldfish (Carassius auratus). These fish vary much in size, colour, and general appearance. Specimens have been obtained from the Murray and Torrens Rivers over a pound each in weight. The dark variety is numerous in both rivers. Those received in the Museum lately were killed by the influx of saltwater into the Murray. About a dozen varieties have been described. Papers.—“A New Species of Microtis” (M. orbicularis, Nov. sp.), by R. S. Rocers, M.A., M.D. “Notes on South Australian Marine Mollusca, with Descriptions of New Species,” Part v., by J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S. “Mineral Notes,’ by Doveras Mawson, B.E., B.Sc. “New Australian Lepidoptera,” by Oswatp B. Lower, F.E.S. “A Compari- son of the Various Types of Electric Radiation,’ by Profes- sor W. H. Brace, M.A., F.R.S. Professor E. H. Renniz, D.Sc., and THe PRESIDENT re- ferred to Professor Bragg’s scientific investigation of radiant 318 matter, and congratulated him upon the distinction conferred by the Royal Society of London, in electing him as a Fellow. ORDINARY MEETING, JUNE 4, 1907. Tue Presipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. NomInaTions.—John McConnell Black, Pressman, and R. H. Pulleine, M.B., C.M., both of Adelaide, as Fellows. Batitot.—Rudolph Fison Purdue, Mining Agent, Tas- mania; Hugo Carl Emil Muecke, Agent, and John Darling, Corn Merchant, both of Adelaide ; and Professor R. W. Chap- man, M.A., B.C.E., and W. T. Cooke, D.Sc., both of Ade- laide University, were unanimously elected as Fellows. Exuisits.—J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., exhibited two cases of Australian micro-moths, which, with ten other cases in the Museum, were collected by the late W. Guest, and re- arranged by Mr. Tepper; only about 2 per cent. of these are destructive or injurious in the garden and field. The Cryptophaga impunctata is very injurious to cultivated trees. Mr. Tepper also exhibited the contents of the crop of a black magpie, sent to him by Mr. J. W. Mellor, containing the remains of two species of insects, not generally eaten by birds; one of these a bug belonging to the same family as the bed-bug, and some berries, possibly from one of the Styphelias. Mr. Tepper also showed a cockroach (A taxigamia sp.) from Kalgoorlie (very similar to the warehouse insect) from Mr. Ashby. Mr. W. B. Poorz exhibited a num- ber of photo-micrographs of diatoms and transverse sections of the stems of plants, highly magnified. Mr. E. Asusy, a very handsome cock lyre-bird, from the Maconolly Ranges, and the skins of a megapode and young, from Northern Aus- tralia. Judging from the appearance of the country where the lyre-bird was found, Mr. Ashby thinks that these birds would thrive in the hills around Adelaide and on Kangaroo Island. He also mentioned instances of mimicry by lyre- birds. Mr. Asusy gave some further notes on the mound- building megapodes of Northern Australia, from information given by Mr. C. E. May, of Port Keats, who examined four nests of these birds in that neighbourhood. These nests were all slightly flattened on the tops, and more or less covered with small brushwood, which, it appears, had been thrown up by the birds themselves. This brushwood pre- vents the earth, of which the mounds are composed, from setting too hard. The flattening of the top is possibly caused © by the natives digging for the eggs and in so doing pulling © the top down. The megapode always selects a thick jungle © amongst tamarind-trees for its mound. Many of these tamarinds are, perhaps, 100 years old, and in some cases they grow out of the nests or mounds. These nests, evidently of considerable age, are used year after year by many gene- rations of egg-laying megapodes. Hach season the bird scratches and tunnels to a depth of from 2 to 5 feet into the old nest, at an angle of about 45 degrees, and lays 5 or 6 eggs, each one being placed 2 or 3 feet from its neigh- bour. There are reasons for thinking that these tunnels are used year after year, but this has yet to be proved. In nest No. 2, the dimensions of which are given below, the tunnel had been filled in with green leaves; a trail 60 feet long led up to where the newly-laid eggs had been placed. Measurements of four Mound Nests:— Diameter Circumference. Heightof Diameter 319 of Base. Mound. of Top. ft. ft. Eth ath. ft. No. 1 53 167 8 0 17 No. 2 ... 46 147 Cian 12: No. 3 ... 33 105 5/9 12 No. 4 ... 42 132 (ea 12 From these measurements it appears that a close similarity exists in the size and shape of the nests. No 1, the largest mound, is probably the oldest. OrpinaRY MEETING, JuLy 2, 1907. THE Presipent (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. Batitot.— John McConnell Black and R. H. Pulleine, M.B., C.M., were elected as Fellows. New Premises.—Tue PRESIDENT congratulated the Society upon meeting in its new room, and expressed a hope that the Government would erect some shelving for the library. OBITUARY.—THE PRESIDENT referred to the death of Mr. John Dennant, F.G.8., one of the Honorary Fellows, who had been connected with the Society since 1888, and had contri- buted to its Transactions several geological papers, and a series of papers on corals, which his death leaves incomplete. Exuispits.—Mr. Zietz, F.L.S., C.A.Z.S., exhibited birds’ skins from various parts of Australia, including thick- heads, finches, honey-eaters, and wrens. Mr. J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., (1) a stone-making fungus, Laccocophaium, McAlp. et Tepp.; (2) galls on apple-tree roots, showing mode of propagation of woolly aphis; (3) some rare specimens of Buprestide and Cetonide; (4) first speci- men of fruit-fly (Tephritis muse) found in South Aus- 320 tralia, which was picked up dead on a gravel path in Ade- © laide. Dr. Morecan exhibited—(1) Pelvis, sternum, and shoul- — der-girdle of the lyrebird, and similar bones of the magpie and parrot for comparison ; (2) syrinx or vocal organ of lyre- - bird; (3) contents of stomach of same, consisting of beetles, spiders, caterpillars, and small stones. Dr. Putueine, M.B., C.M., the male of the common trap- door spider. Tue Presipent exhibited a pair of fins of a fish attri- buted by Mr. Zietz to the butterfly gurnard, not the flying gurnard ; (2) a cuttlebone of an apparently new species re- sembling somewhat the Sepia elongata of the Red Sea; (3) a crab which had lost its left claw at the second articulation, showing a capsule springing from the joint, containing the embryo of the whole of the missing parts. PapEerS.—The following papers were laid on the table: —‘“Notes on South Australian Decapod Crustacea,” Part v., by W. H. Baxrr. ‘New Australian Lepidoptera, with Syno- nymic Notes,” No. xx., by OSwaLp B. Lower. “Descriptions of Australian Curculionide, with Notes on Previously-described Species,” Part v., by ARTHuR M. Lea, Government Entomolo- gist, Tasmania. OrpiInAaRY Meetine, August 6, 1907. THE PRESIDENT (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.8.) in the chair. Nomination.—Robert Thomson Melrose, of Mount Plea- sant, as a Fellow. Dr. PULLEINE, referring to the proposal to transfer the classified collection of plants in the Botanic Gardens to the experimental area, expressed his fear that in so doing many valuable Australian shrubs now growing in the classified bor- ders might be destroyed. For this reason, and also that a properly-classified garden for the study of botany might be secured, Dr. Pulleine proposed—‘‘That in the opinion of this Society the classified garden in the Botanic Gardens should not be abolished, but preserved in its present site, and as far as possible the natural orders and species should be repre- sented by Australian plants”; seconded by Mr. Buacx, and carried. It was further proposed by Mr. S. Drxon, seconded by Mr. Howcntn, and carried—-‘“‘That a copy of the above resolution be forwarded to the Chairman of the Board of Go- vernors of the Botanic Gardens.” Dr. Pulleine was requested to interview Mr. Holtze, the Director of the Gardens, in reference to this matter. | . - 321 a CF PaperSs.—The following papers were laid on the table : — “Revision of the Australian Psychide,” by Epwarp Meyrick, B.A., F.L.S., and Oswatp B. Lower, F.E.S., Lond. ‘Notes on South Australian Marine Mollusca, with Description of New Species,” Part vi., by J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S. Dr. Verco exhibited specimens of shells—mostly of small size— obtained from deep dredgings off Cape Jaffa, Beachport, and outside the Neptunes, and enlarged drawings of some of the more interesting of these shells by Dr. Pulleine. Dr. Verco gave some interesting extracts from the paper. Mr. Howcurn thanked the President for the information he had given them, and directed the attention of the meeting to two points of considerable importance brought out by these _ studies of shells—first, the reduction in the number of species, by comparing the specimens obtained from various localities, which proyed them to be synonymic; and in the second place * the ght hey may throw on the age of geological formations, particularly the age of the various members of the Cainozoic series. ORDINARY MEETING, SEPTEMBER 3, 1907. THE PresipEnt (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S.) in the chair. NomInaTions.—Noel A. Webb, barrister, of Adelaide, and H. A. Sweetapple, medical practitioner, of Parkside, as Fellows, and Herbert Basedow, science student, at present in Germany, as a Corresponding Member. Battot.—Robert Thomson Melrose, of Mount Pleasant, sheepfarmer, was elected a Fellow. Avupitors.—J. §. Lloyd, F.J.A., S.A., and Stirling Smeaton, B.A., C.E., were elected Auditors. Exuisits.—A. H. C. Zietz, F.L.S., exhibited a dark concretion of tubular form similar to the sandpipes which form round roots in sandy districts. The specimen, sent by Mr. R. F. Purdue, was found in the tindrifts at Gladstone, Tasmania, close to Purdue’s tinmines (alluvial), forty feet from the surface. W. H. Setway, an Acianthus caudatus, from near the Square Waterhole. J. McC. Buack, a Spren- gelia incarnata of peculiar form from the same district. Paprers.—R. S. Rocers, M.A., M.D., read a note de- scriptive of a new species of Orchid, Caladenia tutelata. “Notes on South Australian Marine Mollusca, with Descrip- tion of New Species,” Part vii., by J. C. Vzsrco, M.D., F.R.C.S. . THe AnnuaLt Meetinc, Octoser 1, 1907. THE PrReEsipenT (J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.8S.) in the chair. K 322 Battot.—Dr. H. A. Sweetapple and Noel A. Webb, soli- citor, both of Adelaide, were elected Fellows. Herbert Base- dow, science student, during his absence from Adelaide, was elected a Corresponding Member. The Annual Report and Balance-sheet were read and adopted. ELECTION OF OFFIcERS.—J. C. Verco, M.D., F.R.C.S., was elected President; Prof. E. H. Rennie, M.A., D.Sc., and Rev. Thomas Blackburn, B.A., Vice-Presidents; Walter Rutt, C.E., Honorary Treasurer; Samuel Dixon and W. H. Selway, the retiring members of Council, were re-elected, and Dr. R. 8. Rogers, M.A., was elected a member of Council in the place of Dr. Cleland, who had resigned. J. S. Lloyd, F.I.A., S.A., and Stirling Smeaton, B.A., were elected Auditors for the ensuing year. Exursits.—-Mr. J. McC. Brack, a specimen of Heh- chrysum teppert, a rare and graceful Composita, which has been found in Morialta Gully and at Mulgundawa and Dublin. Its close relation to Podolepis sessoni and P. siems- senia were pointed out, and it was suggested that it should rather be placed among the genus Podolepis than in that of Helichrysum. The following notice of motion was given by Dr. Rocers :—‘“‘That the Government be asked to provide funds for the appointment of a Government Botanist, with the special object of obtaining an expert knowledge of the en- demic vegetation of this State for economic purposes.” Paprers.—‘‘The Secondary Radiation due to Beta Rays,” by Pror. W. H Brace, M.A., F.R.S., and J. P. V. Mapsen, B.Sc. “Diurts parachila (sp. nov.), et Caladema gladiolata (sp. nov.),” by R. 8. Roczrs, M.A., M.D. “Further Notes on Australian Coleoptera, with Descriptions of New Genera and Species” (xxxvil.), by Rev. Tos. BLacksurn, B.A. ANNUAL (REPORT,...1906=-7. The Council of the Society is pleased to report a suc- cessful year’s work. This is evidenced by the papers and exhibits brought before the Society. It would appear, too, that increasing interest is being taken in its work by the public, a fair number of whom attend the monthly meetings as visitors. Ten members have been elected, a larger number than for some years past. ' 323 The membership of the Society consists at the present time of 9 Honorary Fellows, 73 Fellows, 4 Corresponding Members, and 2 Associates. Resignations have been received on the plea of inabi- lity to attend the meetings. It may be pointed out that every member of the Society is directly aiding scientific re- search, whether or not he attends meetings. Requests for the Society’s publications are constantly being made by scientific societies in Europe and America, and so every year the list of exchanges is increasing, and the library getting larger and becoming more valuable to those interested in scientific work. The additions to the Institute Buildings were com- pleted in June last, and declared open at an entertainment given by the Board of Governors of the Public Library, etc., on the 12th of that month. At this function it was an- nounced that the large western room on the ground floor (in which this meeting is now being held) was granted to the Royal Society. Since then the allocation has been offi- cially made by the Board. It is anticipated that the Government will furnish the room with a complete set of shelves for the accommodation of the library. If it can be arranged it is proposed that the work of Secretary and Librarian shall be made the work of one person, who shall be paid for his services, and who shall act in these capacities for both this and for the Royal Geogra- phical Society. The obituary for the year includes the names of two life members, the Hon. David Murray, who joined the Society in 1859, and Ebenezer Cooke, the late Commissioner of Audit, also H. C. Russell, an Hon. Member, and late Government Astronomer of New South Wales; David Fle- ming, Fellow, and some time Chairman of the Microscopical Section, and John Dennant, F.G.S., an Honorary Fellow, who died on June 13 of this year. Mr. Dennant, a resident of Victoria, was elected in December, 1888, and for nearly thirty years has been an active member of the Society. His first contribution ap- peared in the Transactions of the Society in October, 1888, in a paper entitled “Notes on the Muddy Creek Beds, with Brief Remarks on other Tertiary Strata of South-Western Victoria.” Some years later Mr. Dennant was associated with Professor Tate in compiling three papers on ‘‘The Corre- lation of the Marine Tertiaries of Australia.’ The interest each had in this work naturally drew Dennant and Tate to- gether, and thenceforward they became friends and fellow 324 workers until the death of the latter. Subsequently Mr. — Dennant made a special study of the fossil corals, resulting — in the communication of seven consecutive papers on ‘“De- scriptions of New Species of Corals from the Australian Ter- — tiaries,” illustrated by well-executed plates. This work led up to an examination of recent corals, on which he contri- buted two papers, “Recent Corals from the South Australian and Victorian Coasts,” and on “Madreporaria from the Aus- tralian and New Zealand Coasts.” Mr. Dennant was re- garded as an authority in Australasia in this department of science. Corals dredged in deep water off the coast of New South Wales by Messrs. Hedley and Peters, off the New Zealand coast by Mr. H. Sutuer, and off the South Austra- lian coast by Dr. Verco, were forwarded to him for examina- tion. His removal will be a loss to science. It is hoped some other member will be found to continue the work Mr. Dennant was doing so well. A letter of sympathy and con- dolence was sent by the Council to Mrs. Dennant. The resignation of Dr. W. L. Cleland as a member of Council has been received with great regret. Dr. Cleland was elected a Fellow in 1879, and has been on the Council for twenty-four years, for fourteen of which he acted as Secretary, and for three years was President. ‘g101pny ‘NOLVEKS ‘S ‘ax0TT ‘Sf "L061 “IST 10q0700 ‘oprejopy ‘qoo1109 punoj pue pozyIpny “IOINSBOLT, ‘LLAY AALIVA O10 9f9F Ol 0 99S . Of ATE a ee eh SdUTAeS ul souRleg ‘ G 814 me iS Suistzieapy “‘ 3S @ sie es te euoIzesIoAUON ‘‘ ae ee | = ae senboyp uo osuryoxy “S Tan ee hy Res A19uU0T4 -219 pue ‘eseqysog ‘sutjulig “ Ore, 3 a **. “Qsnagiuy yuve- * SE ee ar 20, . i < "+, SUOTJOWSUBIT,, JO o[Vg “* s 1:5 s << preg te get SUTAOW GAG) 666 Fe4_5 e 8.0.5 =e ue ; IOYeVIOIVD Dros Gein. e es eljeaysny Yyynog —sosem “ ul SUOTIVSIISOAT] DYIQUSTIG oe uodn sqiodey Suuig 104 Bia Og be = syoog uo ODVIIIVD S <9T Ger o eg suotgdi1osqng ug ran.) + eee cn SUINGOTVIVD —sjUvIn JUETIUIeAOXy ** —Areiqry “* | 0 QL 92 3: e , SUOTJOVSUBIT,,, 0 ear ozyVIYsN][I 07 ‘OeA “A 0 0 6 de WOIWOG [BROTAODSOAOTT, —uor1jeu0g ‘* 0 0 GG. ~~ WoRoeD _ S38 81njeN Pela De ee, a a —syuBIn “ NA too: ae UWOTPEG [BOTdOOSO.OI]L GRE, 5 Aegean 09 6 "1 WOTZEG [ROTTo]OoRTe a 208 es ibe a SULXOpUyT 0 0 GZ ~~ UOrTPoeg S}sl[VinzeEN plelq > Lee a ae st Buryst|qng O28 Bot. oe | +t Ayemog gekoy: eR eee aoe “is BurIyeV14SN] I] —suorydiiosqug ** 9 if 961 eee aoe sae Surquiig ¢ Il 97 aoe toe tae yee aouR] eg OL, —, SUOTPOBSUBIT,, Sq ‘906L (FSL 4099990 ee pe. oe £2) ‘8 oe BS SF +41 = ‘ NS OS TVAOU HL HALLAM LNQOOOV NI ESA SAS GAL 326 Y DONATIONS .TO THE. LIBRAR® For YeEAR 1906-7. TRANSACTIONS, JOURNALS, REPORTS, ETC. Presented by the respective Editors, Societies, and Governments, AUSTRIA AND GERMANY. Berlin—Konigl. Preuss. Meteor. Instituts, Veroffentlichungen der Ergebnisse des; Niederschlagsbeobachtungen, 1903 ; Bericht fiir 1906. ——— Konigl. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Ber- lin, Sitzungsberichte, 1906, Nos. 39-53; 1907, Nos. 1-38. ; ——-— Deutsches Meteorologisches Jahrbuch, 1905, Heft 1, 2. Gesellschaft fiir Erkunde, Zeitschrift der, 1906, Nos. 7-10; 1907, Nos. 1-6. ——— Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthrop., Ethnol. und Urgeschichte. Erganzungsblatter zur Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie, Jahrgang 38, Heft. 4-6; Jahrgang 39, Heft 1-3. —— — Deutsche Entomologische Zeitschrift, 1881, Heft 1, 2; and each year to 1906; 1907, Heft 1-4. ——— Inhaltsverzeichniss, 1881-99, Catalog der Coleopteren von Sibirien, 1880-81, 1893, 1899. ——— Deutsche Entomologische Gesellschaft—An Account of Professor Dr. Gustav Kraatz, founder of the above Society. ——— Deutsch Siidwestafrika und British Bechuanaland, Report for Year 1906. Freiburg—Naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu Freiburg, Berichte der, Band xli. Giessen—Oberhessischen Gesellschaft fiir Natur-Heilkunde, Berichte der, Band 1. (1904-6), Band i. Gottingen—Konigl. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Got- tingen, Math. Phys. Klasse, Nachrichten der, 1906, Heft 3-5; 1907, Heft 1-3. Geschaft- liche Mittheilungen, 1907, Heft 1. Hamburg—Mitteilungen aus dem Naturhistorischen Museum, Jahrgang 1-23, 1885-1905. Heidelberg—Berichte iiber Land- und Forstwirtschaft in Deutsch Ostafrika, Band i1., Heft 1, 2. Kiel—Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereins fiir Schleswig-Hol- stein, Schriften des, Band xili., Heft 1, 2. 4 ? 327 Miinchen—Sitzungsberichte der K.B. Akademie der Wissen- schaften zu Miinchen, Math. Phys. Klasse, 1906, Heft 2,3; 1907, Heft 1. Abhandlungen ; Band lxxvi. ee Zeitschrift fiir das gesamte Schiess- und Spreng- stoffwesen, Jahrgang 1, No. 17. Sete Naturhistorischen Gesellschaft zu Niirnberg, Abhandlungen der, Band xi., Heft 3. Report for year 1904. Vienna—Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien, Sitzung der Math. Naturwiss., Jahrgang 1907, Nos. 6-13, 14-17. ——— K.K. Gradmessungs Bureau, Astronomische Arbeiten d., Band xiv. ——— Verhandlungen der Oestreichischen Kommission fiir die Internationale Erdmessung, Dec., 1905. ——— Annalen des K.K. Naturhistorischen Hofmuseums, Band xx., No. 4; Band xx1., No. 1. , ——— Verhandlungen der K.K. Geologischen Reichsanstalt, Jahrgang, 1906, Nos. 1-18; Jahrgang 1907, Nos. 2-10. ——— K.K. Zoologische Botanische Gesellschaft in Wien, Jahrgang 1907, Band lvi.; Jahrgang 1907, Band lvii., Heft 1-5. Wiirzburg—Sitzungsberichte der Physikalisch-Medicinischen Gesellschaft zu Wiirzburg, 1906, Nos. 1-7. AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND. Adelaide—Public Library, Museum, and Art Gallery, Annual . Report, 1905-6. ——— School of Mines and Industries, Annual Report, 1906. ——— Department of Mines, Short Review, Half-year, to June 30, 1906. ——— Woods and Forests Department, Annual Progress Re- port, 1905-6. ——— Geological and General Reports, Northern Territory of South Australia, North-Western District; 1905, and Supplement to No. 53, 1906. ——— The Crown Lands Laws of South Australia for 1905. ——— Adelaide Philosophical Society, Natural History of South Australia, 1880. ——— Adelaide Chamber of Commerce, Annual Report, 1907. ——— Handbook of the South Australian Company, 1898. ——— Geological Report of the Stannary Hills Mines, by Dr. Logan Jack, F.G.S., 1907, presented by Mr. Sam. Dixon. 328 7 Brisbane—Queensland Department of Mines, Geological Sur- vey, Publications 201, 203, 205, 207-213. ——— Queensland Flora, vol. xvi., parts 7-9; vol. xvii., parts 1, 2,3, 5, 6; vol. xviil,, parte,2,:3. ——— Annals of the Queensland Museum, No. 7. The Weeds and Suspected Poisonous Plants of Queensland, parts 1-15, pages 1-246. Geelong—Geelong Naturalist, vol. i11., Nos. 1-3. Melbourne—Victoria Department of Agriculture, Journal, vol. iv., part 12; vol. v., parts 1-9. ——_-—-— Department of Mines, Bulletins Nos. 21, 22. Mem- oirs, 1907, Nos. 4, 5. Special Report. ———-— Department of Mines, Geological Survey Records, vol. i., part 4.; vol. it, part 1. Bulletins, 1907, Nos. 19, 20. ——_-—-— Mines and Water Supply, Annual Report, 1906. -———-— Victorian Yearbook, 1905. ; ———w— Royal Society of Victoria, Proceedings, vol. xix., New Series, part 2. —-—-—— Victorian Geographical Journal, vol. xxili., xxiv., 1905-6. ———— Victorian Naturalist, vol. xxii., No. 12; vol. xxiii., Nos. 7-11; vol. xxiv., Nos. 1-5. Hobart—Royal Society of Tasmania, Papers and Proceedings, 1903-5. Launceston—Denartment of Mines, Progress Reports, Sep- tember, 1906, to June, 1907. The Tasmanian Naturalist, vol. i., No. 1. Perth— Meteorological Observations, 1905. ——-— Department of Mines, Report, 1906. ——— Western Australian Natural History Society, Journal, No. 3, Catalogue of Books. ——— Geological Survey Bulletin, Nos. 24-26, 1907; No. 5, 1900. —-—— Government Gazette, Supplement to, June to Decem-. ber, 1905, Nos. 40, 43, 47, 54, 59, 76, 1906; Nos. 2,45 1016; 195,22) 20,23%, Al AOS O07. ——— Perth Catalogue of Standard Stars. 31° and 41° S., 1905. ——— The Next International Scheme, vol. lxv., No. 9, a Suggestion by W. Ernest Cooke. Sydney—Department of Mines, Annual Report, 1906. ——— Department of Mines and Agriculture, Agricultural Gazette, vol. xvii., part 12; vol. xviii., parts 1-9. Supplement to vol. xvii. Miscellaneous Publica- tion No. 1040. 329 Sydney—Department of Mines, Records of the Geological Sur- vey, vol. viil., part 3, 1907. ——— Royal Society of New South Wales, Journal and Pro- ceedings, vols. xxxvli., xxxvill., 1903-5; vol. xlL., September and December, 1906. ——w— Linnean Society, Proceedings, vol. xxxi., parts 3, 4, No. 123; vol. xxxii., part 1, No. 125; part 2, No. 126. ——— An Aroid New for Australia, by J. H. Maiden, Aus- tralian Museum, Report the 51st, 1905; 52nd, 1906. Memoirs, No. iv., part 10. Records, vol. vi., parts 4, 5. Nests and Eggs of Birds found Breeding in Australia, by A. J. North, vol. i1., parts 1 and 2. ——— Public Library, Report of Trustees, 1906, 1905. ——— Botanic Gardens and Domain, Report, 1906. ——— Botanic Gardens, Biographical Notes, Section D, Ad- dress by the President. . ——— New South Wales Naturalists’ Club, vol. 1., parts 4, 5. ——— Fisheries of New South Wales, Report of Commis- soners, 1905, 1906. ——— Fishes of Australia. ——— The Forest Flora of New South Wales, vol. i1., parts 11-20; vol. 1., parts 2-6. ——— Sydney University Calendar, 1906-1907. ——— Royal Anthropological Society of Australia, Journal, vol. vili., No. 5; vol. ix Nos. 1-6, 8, 9. A List of Cyclophoridz found in Australia, New Guinea, and adjacent groups of Islands, by J.C. Cox, M.D. Auckland—Auckland Institute and Museum, Annual Report, 1906-7. Christchurch—Canterbury Museum, Records, vol. 1., No. 1. Wellington—Special Reports on Educational Subjects. New Zealand Geological Survey, North-west Mines, Bulletin Nos. 2, 3. ————— Catalogue of Plants of New Zealand. BELGIUM AND HOLLAND. Brussels—Société Entomologique de Belgique, Annales de la, tome |. ——— Société Royale de Eo aue de Belgique, Bulletin, 1904-5. ——— Musée Royale d’Histoire Naturelle de Belgique, Mem- oires, tome iil., 1906. ——— Le Mouvement Sociologique International, Publica- tion No. 83 330 Liege—Société Royale des Sciences, Memoires, 3rd Series, tome vi. Amsterdam—Naturkundig Tydschrift voor Nederlandsch-In- die, deel Ixvi. CANADA. Halifax—Nova Scotian Institute of Sciences, Proceedings and Transactions. Ottawa—Canadian Department of the Interior, Hamilton Sheet, Kluanee Sheet. Geological Survey, An- nual Report, Paleontology, etc., vol. 1i1., part 4; vol. xv., 1902-3; 1901, and Maps, 1904, 1903, 1906; Preliminary Report and Summary Re- port. Maps, Nos. 59-65; 74-76; 82-83. ENGLAND, IRELAND, AND SCOTLAND. London—COonchological Society, Journal, vol. xi., No. 12; vol. xii., Nos. 1-3. —-—— Entomological Society, Transactions, 1902, 1906. ——— Royal Colonial Institute, Proceedings, vol. xxxi., No. 4. Report, vol. xxxviul., 1906-7. --—— Linnean Society, Proceedings, 1906. List of Mem- bers, 1906-7. ——— Royal Society of London, Year Book, 1907. Pro- ceedings Mathematical and Physical Sciences, vol. Alxxvill., Nos. a524-526; vol. alxxix, Nos. a527- — 532. ——— Biological Sciences, Series B., vol. Ixxvili., No B526; vol, lxxix., Nog: eb27-p33, —-—-— Royal Microscopical Society of London, Journal, 1906, parts 5, 6; 1907, parts 1-4. —-——-—~- National Physical Laboratory, Report, 1906. Col- lected Researches, vol. 11. --—— Royal Gardens, Kew, Bulletin, 1906. ——— The State Correspondent, etc., vol. xii., No. 10; vol. xill., Nos. 2-8. —-—— The Periodical, 1905, No. 32; 1906, Nos. 34, 36, 37; 1907, Nos. 38-40. —-—_— The British Association, Report, for each year from 1831 to 1884 (from the Engineer-in-Chief’s De- partment, 8S. Aus.). —- Gordon’s Tomb and Golgotha, by A. W. Crawley-Boe- vey, M.A., Bombay Civil Service, Barrister-at-law. Liverpool—Biological Society, Proceedings and Transactions, vol. xx., 1905-6. 331 Eueeanchester—Literary and Philosophical Society, Memoirs and Proceedings, vol. li., parts 1-3. ————— Geological Society, Transactions, vol. xXxXvill., part 16. ————— Field Naturalists’ and Archzologists’ Society, Report and Proceedings, 1906. _Cambridge—Philosophical Society, Proceedings, vol. xiii, part 6; vol. xiv., parts 1, 2. ——_———_— University Library, Report of Library Syndi- cate, 1906. Belfast—Natural History and Philosophical Society, Report and Proceedings, 1905-6: Dublin—Royal Dublin Society, Economic Proceedings, vol. 1., parts 8, 9. Scientific Proceedings, vol. 11., Nos. 10-12. Scientific Transactions, vol. ix., parts 4, 5. ——— Royal Irish Academy, Proceedings, vol. xxvi., section A, Nos. 1, 2; sections B, Nos. 4-9; section C, Nos. 5-16; vol. Sxvil.; section A, Nas 1, 2. Abstract of Minutes, 1905-6. Edinburgh—Royal Physical Society, Proceedings, vol. xvi., pp. 267-435; vol. xvil., pp. 65-80, 81-120. Sessions 1899, 1902. a Royal Society of Edinburgh, Proceedings. vol. XXV1., pp. 193-575; vol. xxvii., pp. 1-160. a Geological Society, Transactions, vol. vill., special part; vol. vill., parts 1, 2. FRANCE. Caen—Société Linnéenne de Normandie, Bulletin, series 5,. vol. ix., 1905. Nantes—Société des Sciences Naturelles de l'Ouest de la France, Bulletin, tome vi., Nos. 1-3. Paris—Société Entomologique de France, Bulletin, 1906, Nos. 15-21; 1907, Nos. 1-12; Annales, 1903, Nos. 1-4; 1904, Nos. 1-4; 1905, Nos. 1-4; 1906, Nos. 1-4; 1907, Nos. 1 and 2. Publications, tome ii. ——— La Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes, Nos. 432-443. ITALY. Florence—Societa Entomologica Italiana, Bulletino della, XXXvll., trim. 1-2. Milan—Societa Italiana di Scienza Naturali e del Museo Civico de Storia Naturale in Milano, vol. xlv., fase. 3, foglio 63; vol. xlvi., fasc. 1, fog. 54; Gene- ral Index, 1906. 332 Pisa—Societa Toscana di Scienza Naturali, Memorie, vol. xxll.; Processi Verbali, vol. xv., No. 5; vol. xvi, Nos. 1-3. INDIA. Calcutta—Imperial Department of Agriculture, Annual Re- port. ———w— Board of Scientific Advice, Annual Report, 1905-6. ——_—— Department of Agriculture in India, Memoirs, 1906, vol. 1., Nos. 1-3; vol. i, No. 4. Botanical@ Series, 1907, vol. 1., Nos. 3-5. Entomolog. © Series, vol. i., Nos. 1, 2, 4. Chemical Series, vol. i., Nos. 5,6. Botanical Series, vol.ii., No. 1. ———-— Indian Museum, Investigator, 1906, part 111. The © Alcyonarions of the Deep Sea. Annual Report, — 1905-6. . Madras—Government Museum, Bulletin, vol. v., Nos. 2, 3. From the Annals and Magazine of Natural His- — tory, 1906, series 7, vol. xviii. Ethnographic ~ Notes of Southern India, 1906. , Pusa—Agricultural Research Institute, Bulletin, 1906, No. — 4. First Report on Fruit Experiments. , JAPAN. Kyoto—Imperial University Calendar. Tokyo—Imperial University of Tokyo, College of Science Journal, vol. xxi., art. 2-6; vol. xxii. ——_— Seismological Society, Earthquake Investigation Com- mittee, Publication No. 22, art. 1-4, Nos. 23, 24; Bulletin, vol. 1., Nos. 2-4. ——— Asiatic Society of Japan, Transactions, vol. xxxiv., parts 1-4. MEXxIco. Mexico—Sociedad Cientifica, Memorias y Revista, tomo 22, num. 7-12; tomo 23, num. 5-12; tomo 24, num. 1-5. —-—— Instituto Geologico de Mexico, Boletin del, num. *) NORWAY AND SWEDEN. Bergen—Museums Aarbog, 1905, Hefte 2; 1906, Hefte 2, 3; 1907, Hefte 1, 2; Aarsberetning, 1906. —-—_-—w— Bergens Museum, Meersfauna von Bergen, Hefte 2, 3. Christiania—Sundry Geological Problems, by G. Henricksen, Inspector of Mines, Christiania, 1906. 333 eo Sntomologisk Tidskrift; Arg. 26, Hefta 1, 2. Arg. 27, Hefta 3, 4. — Geologiska Foreningens Forhandlingar, Band. ; xxxll., 1906; Band. xxviii., Hefte 1. a oe ee Vitterhets Historie och Antiquitets Aka- 4 demiens Manadsblad, 1903-5. » ——-_——_ A Short Handbook on Sweden, 1906. _ —-——— Fornvannen, Meddelanden fran K. Vitterhetshis- 4 torie ech Antikvitets Akademie, 1906. H Stavanger—Museum, Aarshefte, 16de Aargang, 1905. _ Trondhjem—Kongelige Norske Videnskabs Selskabs Skrifter, 2 1905. a Carl von Linnés Forbindelse med Norge af Ove " Dahl, 1907. : Russia. €t. Petersburg—Academie Impériale des Sciences de St. i _ Petersbourg, Bulletin, Classe Historico- Philo; 1904-1907, series 5, tome xxi.. No. 5; tome xxu., Nos. 1-5; tome xxili., Nos. ; 1-5; tome xxiv., Nos. 1 and 2; 1907, series : 6. Nos. 1-11. ———_—_—_—_—— Comité Géologique, Bulletins, tome xxii, Nos. 2, 4; tome xxill., Nos. 7-10. Mem- Gipes, ‘tomo xx. liv. 6, 7, 9, 12,18, 19; tome 20, liv. 2; tome 15, liv. 1. —_——_—_—_——_—— Russischen Kaiserlichen Mineralogischen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg, Verhand- lungen der, 1905; series 2, 1906. ——————— Materialen zur Geologie Ruslands. Her- ausgegeben von der Kaiserlishen Mineralo- gischen Gesellschaft, Band. xxiii., lief 1. Kiev—Société des Naturalistes de Kiev, Memoires, tome xx., liv. 2, 1906. Moscow—Société Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscow, Bul- letin No. 4, 1905; Nos. 1, 2, 1906. FINLAND. Finland—Der Geographische Verein in Finland, Meddelan- den af Geog. Foreningen, 1904-6. SwITZERLAND. Geneva—Société de Physique et de Histoire Naturelle, Compte rendu des Scéances, xxiil., 1906. ——— IL ’Institut National Genevois, Bulletin, vol. xxxvii. Lausanne—Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles, Bulletin, vol. lu., Nos. 156, 157; vol. liu., No. 158. Meteor: Observations faites au Champ-de I|’Air. , iar 304 Neuchatel—Société Neuchateloise des Sciences Naturelles, Bulletin, tome xxxii., year 1903-4. Ziirich—Annotationes Concilii Bibliographici, vol. ii., anno. 1906. SoutH AND CENTRAL AMERICA. Lima—Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas de Peru, Boletin del, Nos. 37-46. Secunda Memoria, 1904-5. Monte Video—Museo Nacional, Anales, tomo ili., entrega i. Rio de Janeiro—Observario do Rio de Janeiro, Boletin Men- sal, 1905-1906. SoutH AFRICA. Albany—Museum, Records, vol. i1., part 1. Cape Town—South African Museum, Report, 1906. ————— South African Association for the Advancement of Science, Reports for years 1905, 1906. —— South African Philosophical Society, Transac- tions, vol. xv., part 5, 1905; vol. xiii., part 2; vol. xvi., parts 4, 5; vol. xvil., part 1. Natal—South African Surveyor-General’s Department, Re- port, third and final. SANDWICH ISLANDS. Honolulu—The Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Occasional Papers and Report, 1906, vol. iv., No. 1; vol. ili., No. 1; 1907, vol. 11, No. 5. Disectaam Report, with Index to vol. ii. UNITED STATES oF AMERICA. Baltimore—John Hopkins University, Circulars, Nos. 3-9. History and Political Science, series xxiv., Nos. 3-10. American Chemical Journal, vol. xxxv., Nos. 5, 6; vol. xxxvi., Nos. 1-6; vom AK KWols, NOs, 1.105 Boston—Society of Natural History, Proceedings, vol. xxxil., Nos. 3-12 and index; vol. xxxili., Nos. 1-12. ——— American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Proceed- ings, vol. xli., No. 35; vol. xlii., Nos. 2-18. ——— University of California, Pubs. Zoology, vol. 11., No. 2, pp. 13-38, plates 3-7 ; do., do., American Arch- eology and Ethnology, vol. iv., Nos. 1-2. Col- lege of Agriculture, Nos. 177, 178. 335 Cambridge—Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard Col- lege, Report, 1905-6; Geological Series, Bulle- mms, volo alin., No. G5 vol. xlix.; vol. 1., Nos. 4 and 5, 8, 9; vol. li, Nos. 1-4. Chicago—Field Columbian Museum, Geological Series, vol. ii., Nos. 8, 9; vol. i11., Nos. 3, 4. Zoological Series, vol. vil., Nos. 2, 3. Indiana—Academy- of Science, Proceedings, 1906. Kansas—Kansas University, Bulletin, vol. vi., No. 2; vol. ware No: 3. ‘ ——— The University Geological Survey of Kansas, Bulle- tin, 1903-1904, vol. viii. Massachusetts—Tufts College Studies, vol. 11., No. 2 Missouri— Missouri Botanical Gardens, Annual Report, 1906. New York—Public Library, Bulletin, vol. ix., No. 2; vol. x., Nos. 9-12; vol. xi., Nos. 1-7. — Studies from the Rockefeller Institute for Medi- cal Research, vol. v., 1906. ————— American Museum of Natural History, Journal, vol. vi., No. 3. Memoirs, Whole Series, vol. vi., part 1; vol. v., part 3; vol. x., part 1; vol. xiv., part 1. Memoirs, Geological Fossils, 1904, vol. ii, part 1; 1905, vol. iv., part 5; 1906,. vol. vill., part 1; 1907, vol. iv., part 6. Guide Leaflets, Nos. 24, 25. Academy of Sciences, Annals, vol. xvi., part 3; vol. xvii., part 1. --———— The Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences, vol. 1., Nos. 4, 8, 9. —_——— — Cold Spring Harbour Monographs, No. 6. ———— — Carnegie Institution of Washington, Zoological Experimental do., do., Nos. 4-7, Yearbooks, No. 5, 1906. = — American Museum, Journal, vol. vi., No. 4; vol. iaieaiNos. 1,2, 4, 5. -———— The Journal of Geography, vol. v., No. 8. Ohio—Wilson Bulletin, Oberlin College Library, Nos. 56, 57. ———Scientific Laboratories, Denison University, Granville, Bulletin, vol. xiii., art 3. Philadelphia—Academy of Natural Sciences, Proceedings, vol. lviii., parts 1, 2. SEnaEEEEEEEEEEEE American Philosophical Society, Proceedings, vol. xlv.,. Nos. 182, 183; Transactions, vol. xxi., part 3. —_—————— The Philadelphia Commercial Museum, Re- port, 1898. St. Louis—The Academy of Science of St. Louis, Transac- tions, vol. xvi., Nos. 1-7. 336 Washington—Smithsonian Institution, U.S. National Mu- seum, Bulletin, No. 39, parts P and Q: No. 56, part 1. Proceedings, vols. xxx., xxxi. Contributions, vol. x., parts 3, 4; vol. xi., part 1. Annual Report, 1905, 1906. An- nual Report of Board of Regents, 1905. Bureau of American Ethnology, Bulletin No. 32. ~-—~—-—~—— United States Geological Survey, Professionai Papers, series A, B, C, No. 51, a70, 387, B77, 049, c77; No. 52, B89, 055; No. 54, A76, B95: Nos. 51°55; —————— Department of the Interior, Annual Report, No. 26; Bulletin, Nos. 283-285, 289, 290, 292, 293, 295, 298, 299, 301, 302. Se Water Supply and Irrigation, Paper, Nos. 119, 154, 157, 159-162, 165, 167, 169, 171, 172, 174, 175, 177, 179-181, 184-186. a Topographic Maps, folios 136-140. —_—————— Academy of Sciences, Proceedings, vol. viii., pp. 167-403, 407-491; vol. ix., pp. 1-274. Philippine Islands—Manilla, The Far Eastern Review, vol. iv., No. 1. Trenton—New J ersey, Archzologia Nova Caesarea, by Charles Conrad Abbott, M.D. Urbana—lIllinois State Laboratory of Natural History, Bul- letin, vol. vil., articles 6-9. 337 moot OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC., OCTOBER, 1907. Those marked (1) are Life Fellows. Those marked with an asterisk have contributed papers published in the Society’s Transactions. Any change in the address should be notified to the Secretary. Date of u F Mastion Honorary FELLOWS. 1893. *Cossman, M., Rue de Maubeuge, 95, Paris. 1897. *Davip, T. W. EpcEeworta, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., Prof. Geol., Sydney University. 1876. Exuery, R. L. J., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., Gov. Astron., the Observatory, Melbourne, Victoria. 1890. *Erueripcr, Rozerr, Director of the Australian Museum of New South Wales, Sydney. 1905. Girt, THomas, I.S.0., Under-Treasurer, Adelaide. 1905. *Hepiey, Cuas. H., Naturalist, Australian Museum, Syd- ney. 1892. *Marpen, J. H., F.L.S., F.C.S., Director Botanic Gardens, Sydney, New South Wales. 1898. *Mryrick, EK. T., B.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Thornhanger, Marl- borough, Wilts, England. 1894. *Wiuson, J. T., M.D., Prof. of Anatomy, Sydney University. . CoRRESPONDING MEMBERS. 1881. Bamery, F. M., F.L.S., Colonial Botanist, Brisbane, Queensland. 1907. *Basrpow, Herrsert, Breslau University, Germany. i880. *Forntscue, Pau, Inspector of Police, Palmerston, N.T. 1893. Srrerron, W. G., Palmerston, N.T. 1905. THomson, G. M., F.L.S., F.C.S., Dunedin, New Zealand. FELLOWS. | 1895. *Asupy, Epwin, Royal Exchange, Adelaide. 1902. *Baxer, W. H., Glen Osmond Road, Parkside. 1907. Buack, J. McConnexz, Alfred Street. Norwood. 1887. *Buacksurn, Rev. Tuomas, B.A., Woodville. 1886. *Brace, W. H., M.A., F.R.S., Prof. of Mathematics and Physics, University of Adelaide. 1905. Brookman, George, North Gilberton. 1882 Brown, H. Y. L., F.G.S., Gov. Geologist, Adelaide. 1893. BrummMitt, Ropert, M.R.C.S., Gilberton. 1904. Brunxkskintt, George, Semaphore, S.A. 1906. Bunpry, Miss Exvien Mixing, 148, Molesworth Street, North Adelaide. 1907. CHuarpman, R. W., M.A., B.C.E., Prof. of Engineering, University, Adelaide. 1904. CHRisTiz, WILLIAM, Adelaide. 1879. *CLELAND, W. L., M.B., Ch.M., J.P., Colonial Surgeon, Resident Medical Officer Parkside Lunatic Asylum, Lxe- turer in Materia Medica, University of Adelaide. 1895. 1907. 1907. 1887 1902. 1904. 1904. 1880. 1896. 1904. 1896. 1899. 1891. 1883. 1902. 1893. 1902. 1900. 1897. 1884. 1856. 1888. 1905. 1894. 1907. 18O 7. 1907. 1884. 1883. 1886. 1907. 1907. 1904. 1885. 1905. 1869. 1891. 1893. 1857. 1900. 1871. 1881. 338 Crevanp, Joun B., M.D., Perth, Western Australia. *Cooxe, T. W., D.Sc. Lecturer, University, Adelaide. DARLING, Joun, Kent Terrace, Norwood. * DIXON, SAMUEL, Bath Street, New Glenelg. Epaquist, A. G.. Hindmarsh. GARTRELL, JAS., ’ Burnside. Gorpon, Davin, Gawler Place, Adelaide. "Goxpmn, Groren, A. M., F.C.8., Analyst and Assayer, Ade- aide. GREENWAY, THos. J., Adelaide. GRIFFITH, H., Hurtle Square, Adelaide. Hawker, E. W., F.C.S., Adelaide. *Hiaain, A hose ’FILC., Assistant Lecturer on Chemistry, School of Mines, Adelaide. eae Mavriceg, I.L.8., Director Botanic Gardens, Ade- aide. *Howcuin, Watter, F.G.S., Lecturer on Geology and Paleontology, University, Adelaide. InirrE, JAs. Drinkwater, B.Sc., Prince Alfred College, Kent Town. James, THomas, M.R.C.S., Moonta, JEFFREYS, GEO., Gilbert Place, Adelaide. *JoHncock, Cuas. F., Morphett Vale. *Lea, A. M., Gov. Kntomologist, Hobart, Tasmania. Lennon, A. A.. M.D. (Lond.), MR. C.S., Lecturer on For- ensic Medicine and on Chemical Medicine, University, Adelaide, and Hon. Physician, Children’s Hospital, North Adelaide. Luoyp, J. S., Alma Chambers, Adelaide. *Lower, Oswatp B., F.E.S. (Lond.), Broken Hill, New South Wales. *“Mawson, Doveuas, B.Sc., B.E., Lecturer on Mineralogy and Petrology, University, Adelaide. Mayo, Gro. G., C.E., Hon. Secretary, 116, Franklin St., Adelaide. Metrosz, Rosert THomson, Mount Pleasant. *Morean, A. M., M.B., Ch.B., Angas Street, Adelaide. Muecke, Hueco, C.E., Grenfell Street, Adelaide. Munron, H. S., North Terrace, Adelaide. Puituippes, W. H., Adelaide. Poort, W. B., Savings Bank, Adelaide, PULLEINE, Re Ti MB. C.M., Adelaide. Purpvug, R. F. Mining Agent, Launceston, Tasmania. REISSMANN, CHARLES, M.A., M.D. (Cantab), B.Se. (Lond.), etc... Adelaide. *RENNIE, Enywarp H., M.A., D.Sc. (Lond.), F.C.S.. Profes- sor of Chemistry, University of Adelaide. *Rocers, R. S8., M.A., M.D., Flinders Street, Adelaide. *Rurt, WALTER, Chief Assistant Engineer, Adelaide. SELWAY, W. H. , Treasury, Adelaide. Simson, Aueustus, Launceston, Tasmania. Smeaton. THomas D., Mount Lofty. SmEAToN, Stirtine, B.A., C.E., Engineer-in-Chief’s Office, Adelaide. SmitH, Ropert Barr, Adelaide. *STIRLING, Epwarp (on O.M.G., M.A.; “M:D.,) Fase F.R.C. Se Professor of Physiology, University of Ade- laide, Director of S.A. Museum. es 1906. 1907. 1904. 1886. 1897. 1894. 1902. 1889. 1878. 339 Snow, F. H., Mutual Chambers, Adelaide. SweetappLte, H. A., M.D., Park Terrace, Parkside. Taytor, Witiiam, St. Andrews, North Adelaide. *Trprer, J. G. O., F.L.S., Entomologist, S.A. Museum. (Corresponding Member since 1878). *ToRR, ya G., LL.D., M.A., B.C.L., Brighton, South Aus- tralia. *TuRNER, A. Jerrerts, M.D., Wickham Terrace, Brisbane, Queensland. VANDENBERGH, W. J., F.R.S.L., F.R.S.E., F.R.M.S., J.P., Barrister and Solicitor, Pirie Street, Adelaide. Varpon, JoserH, J.P., Gresham Street, Adelaide. *Verco, JosePH C., M.D., F.R.C.S., Lecturer on the Prin- ciples and Practice of Medicine and Therapeutics, Uni- versity of Adelaide. Warnwrient, KEK. H., B.Se. (Lond.), Wellington Road, Maylands. Ware, W.L., J.P., Adelaide. Way, Rieut Hon. Sir Samvuet James, Bart., P.C., D.C.L., Chief Justice and Lieutenant-Governor of South Australia, Adelaide. Wess, Noet A., Barrister, Waymouth Street, Adelaide. Wauitsreap, Howarp, Currie Street, Adelaide. *WootnovucH, Water Grorce, D.Sc., F.G.S., University, Sydney, New South Wales. > Zretz, A. H. C., F.L.S.;-C.M.Z.S., Assistant Director South Australian Museum, Adelaide. ASSOCIATES. Cotiison, Miss Epirn, B.Sc., Flinders Street, Adelaide. Rosinson, Mrs. H. R., ‘‘Las Conchas,”’ Largs Bay, South Australia. 340 APPENDICES. FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION OF THE Popal Soctety of South Australia (Incorporated). TWENTY-FOURTH ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE For THE YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1907. EVENING MEETINGS. The monthiy meetings of the Section, held during the winter months, have been well attended, and the exhibits numerous and instructive. On October 16, 1906, Dr. Ramsay Smith gave an in- teresting lecture in the Prince of Wales Lecture Theatre (kindly lent by the University for the occasion) on his tour through Northern Australia and the Hast. The lecture dealt specially with the Australian aboriginals in their ethnology and customs, and was illustrated by a large number of ex- cellent lantern slides. November 20. Dr. R. 8. Rogers, M.A., delivered the Chairman’s Address, which had been unavoidably postponed. His subject was the work of Robert Brown, the Naturalist on board the “Investigator” with Flinders. The lecturer emphasized the debt which Australia owes to Brown, who amidst great difficulties collected and named a very great number of Australian plants. April 16, 1907. Dr. Pulleine gave a lecture on “‘The Classification of Australian Birds,” illustrated by a great number of specimens. May 21. Papers were read supplying observations made during the Easter excursion to Kangaroo Island, as follows : — Dr. R. 8. Rogers, on ichthiology; Mr. J. W. Mellor, ornith- ology; Mr. Griffiths, entomology; and Mr. W. H. Selway, on botany. June 18. Mr. D. Mawson, B.E., B.Sc., gave an interesting account of his journey to Mount Kosciusko, “the roof of Aus- tralia.’ July 16. Dr. H. Pulleine, on the “Classification of 341 _ Spiders,” with their life history, habits, etc., illustrated by + i NGO oe ma » 7 eel he references to the common house and garden spiders. August 20. Mr. J. G. O. Tepper. F.L.S., discoursed on “Natural History Objects of Common Interest,” based on a miscellaneous collection of insects forwarded to him by an anonymous correspondent. EXcuRSIONS. The first of the year was held on October 13 at Grenville Glen by invitation of Mr. G. J. Ireland, when an opportunity was afforded of exploring the sources of Brown Hill Creek at Crafers. The leading feature was the collection of botanical specimens which were in great profusion along the creek, a spot that is not much disturbed by man or beast. Next followed the three days’ excursion on November 10, 11, and 12, with Myponga as the rendezvous. This district is one of the best within comparatively easy reach of the city for botanical work. Im this locality are to be found many rare specimens of interest not met with in the Mount Lofty Ranges. The party was comfortably provided for at private houses. On the second day after arrival the party was con- ducted to Lovely Valley, on the Yankalilla Road, and on the following day the swampy country was exploited, where collectors had an interesting time amongst both land and water plants. Orchid-hunters were particularly well favoured. This perhaps most interesting order of all our native flowers has become quite an interesting feature of all the field work since its special introduction by our late Chairman, Dr. Rogers, who is a recognized authority on the subject, and has described four new species and three new to the State, during the year, in the Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia. The annual picnic was held on December 15 at the Na- tional Park. Following the afternoon’s enjoyment, the Chair. man, Mr. J. McC. Black, invited the party to tea at the Belair Hotel. During midsummer two marine excursions were ar- ranged, which took place in February and March. The Port Adelaide River, as far as the Outer Harbour, was the selected ground for dredging operations. On these occasions members _ belonging to the Microscopical Section joined in the outing, and interesting results were obtained. The Easter holidays were taken advantage of by a num- ber of members, who arranged to visit Kangaroo Island. This was the first occasion upon which the section had gone so far afield. Penneshaw was made the centre for operations, and excursions were made to Antechamber Bay, the south coast, and Mount Thisbe, at the head of American River. The 342 special studies were ornithology, entomology, and botany. The collectors in each of these branches were amply repaid for the journeyings, and the Easter trip to Kangaroo Island will probably become an annual fixture. May 4 found the members again in the field at Upper Sturt, taking the road wia the National Park. The results obtained on this excursion were chiefly ornithological. It is gratifying to note that the native birds, whilst driven from the open by the extension of the areas of closer settlement, find in the park a secure retreat. Hallett’s Cove has special attractions for the naturalist, and on June 3 fifty members, with the Microscopical Section, journeyed thither for a whole day’s excursion, which yielded points of interest in most departments of natural-history studies. On June 15 the Mount Lofty district was again visited, the vicinity west of the railway station being explored. The district is the home of the #pacris, and the scrub was a beau- tiful profusion of red colourings from this favourite flower. Mr. T. D. Smeaton led the party on this occasion, and amongst many other observations drew attention to the geclogical for- mation of the hills, and the consequent peculiarities of their physical geography. Athelstone, at the foot of the Black Hill, is a popular locality, and a good number travelled thither. It was suit- able weather for climbing, and some of the members gained the summit of the hill. Botanists were particularly well re- warded in collecting early varieties of plants. July 27 was the one day of the year’s arrangements that could not be counted a success. The appointment was a walk across the swampy country from the Glenelg Railway to a ridge of pine forest on the Grange seacoast. The weather and the place were equally uninviting, and the few mem- bers who essayed the journey were disappointed with the re- sult. Blackwood easily holds the palm for botany of all the districts near to the city, and by the kind permission of Mr. C. Downer, the Craigburn Estate was traversed as far as time would permit, on August 17. Where the flowers are, there also are the insects and the birds, and the naturalists always enjoy a ramble in this district, for so much is to be observed. For business purposes, the year for the Section closes on September 30, and the annual general meeting is held on the third Tuesday of the same month. The last excursion during the business year, therefore, was held on the holiday proctaim- ed for September 1. This gave the opportunity to hold a three-days’ outing to Victor Harbour. The party left on 343 the Saturday afternoon, and broke the journey for a ramble in the Aldgate scrub, after which tea was arranged, and the train taken to complete the journey to the Harbour. It was eight years since the section had paid a visit to the place. On the second day they drove out towards Square Water- hole, where many rare things are to be found, and amply repaid for the visit. The third day a trip was taken to the glaciated pavement, known as “Selwyn’s Rock.” The coast- line was not neglected by the members, and the excursion was regarded as a success. . From this summary of the evening- and day-work of the year it will be seen that the Section has had its time and opportunities fully and profitably occupied. The members on the roll number 114. which is an in- crease of 10 for the year. J. McC. Buack, Chairman. BH. A. Lock, Hon. Sec. NINETEENTH ANNUAL REPORT OF THE NATIVE FAUNA AND FLORA PROTECTION COMMITTEE OF THE FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA, FOR THE YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER, 1907. In the past year some further work has been done with regard to the proposed Kangaroo Island reserve. On April 20, by arrangement made through Mr. T. H. Smeaton, M.P., the Chairman, Mr. Dixon, and Mr. Ashby, had an interview with the Premier, who intimated that, in consequence of the lessees of portion of the 300 square miles asked for demand- ing too high a price for the surrender of their holdings, the Cabinet could grant only the Cape Borda lighthouse reserve, containing 60 square miles. Regarding the trustees for the reserve, the Premier requested that a scheme for their ap- pointment should be sent to him. Subsequently a letter was sent, on behalf of the committee, thanking the Premier for the promise of the 60 miles, suggesting that the Act consti- tuting the park should provide for further extension to the area originally asked for, and recommending that the fol- lowing divisions of natural history, namely, general zoology, ornithology, marine zoology, and botany, should be repre- sented upon the board of Trustees, one gentleman represent- img each division being nominated by the University, and one representing each division by the Royal Society. No reply has yet been received; but the committee hope that their suggestions may be adopted, and that mistakes such 344 as have been made in appointing the Board of the National Park be thus avoided. The committee is pleased to learn that the Crown lands in the districts of Barossa, Para Wirra, and Mount Crawford have been proclaimed a kangaroo dis-— trict, and that kangaroos will be absolutely protected there- in for a period of ten years. They have under consideration the question of recommending the proclamation of other dis- tricts. 7 The Committee is also glad to know that nature study is now*to find a place in our public-schools curriculum, a course which they recommended at a deputation which waited upon the Minister of Education about fifteen years ago. Samu. Dixon, Chairman. Adelaide, September 17, 1907. "L061 ‘9T tequieydeg ‘eprejepy | ae ‘sxoqypny { “TUL “Cl WaT MA IOINSVOTT, ‘UOF] ‘SUaLIVAA “9 axoTT '§ “£ "qo01109 punoj puke peyIpny 6 ST 68> : 6 ST 68F 0 FL YA tee eee ase eee eee soueleg (a9 Oi > Oe A ones Ietow o oO} plthcs suolydisosqng ‘* \ e y G wee tee SeBe4sog ce 0¢9 0 “3 fe ay data puv yooq-eynurpy “ 0° Gis =" - “ie L061 ‘8T 10q 0 OL O wat a y “* Suristzieapy “| se a: ‘Aqoroog [VAoyy ey} Wory query “ 0. OFT a ie é eh “" Teyejoreg “ G56. 08 pee “' J-906T OF suorgdrsosqng oj, 96-5) ae ca a a di suluiug Ag | CHCl T " QOBL “t0qo70Q ‘Are}0.A00g WOIZ paAto0eyT i 1@) ‘TUNLIGNAdX “SLaIGoO ayy ud = “LO6L ‘WAAC WALA aaaqNa UVa AHL WO GUOLIGNddXiy ONV SLdIGoay AO INGWALV IS NAS ONLI ALANNA LOL LALLA PS PPPS <(CaLVYUOduOOND VIIVULSAV HLAOS FO ALAIOOS TVAOU AHL AO NOIWLOUS SLSTIVUALVN @ TH 346 MALACOLOGICAL SECTION OF THE Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated). ANNUAL REPORT, 1906-7. The work of revising the census of S.A. mollusca was continued, and the following is the revised list : — Family STOMATIIDA. 53. STOMATELLA IMBRICATA, Lamarck. Anim. S. Vert., 1822, vol. vi. (2), p. 209. 54. GENA NIGRA, Quoy & Gaimard (Stomatella). Voy. Astrolabe, Zool., 1834, vol. i11., p. 307, pl. lxvi. bis, f. 10-12. Stomatia (Gena) strigosa, A. Adams. ; 55. GENA TERMINALIS, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., 1905, vol. xxix., p. 166, (pl. xorxa, a. 4-5, Family TURBINIDA. 56. Turso JourDANI, Kiener. Rev. Zool., 1839, p. 324. 57. TURBO GRUNERI, Philippi. Zeits. fur Malak., 1846, p. 98, No. 6. 7. circularis, Reeve. 58. TurBo UNDULATUS, Martyn (Limaz). Univ. Conch., 1784, vol. i., f. 29; L. angus, Martyn; Simson, Ten. Woods. 59. TuRBo STAMINEUS, Martyn (Limaz). Univ. Conch., 1784, vol. ii, f. 71. TZ. torquatus, Gmelin: 7. lamellosus, Philippi. 60. ASTRALIUM FIMBRIATUM, Lamarck (Trochus). Anim. S. Vert., 1822, vol. viil., p. 12. 7. sguamiferus, Koch. 61. ASTRALIUM AUREUM, Jonas (Trochus). Zeits. fur Malak., 1844, p. 168. Carinidea granulata, Swainson: C. tasmanica, Ten. Woods. 62. ASTRALIUM RUTIDOLOMA, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr.,-1893,,vol. xvii.,.part 1., p.d 92; pl. qat.-9- 63. LeprotHyra ROSEA, Ten. Woods (Monilea). Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1876, p. 154. Collonia roseo-punctata, Angas. 64. LepToTHyRA JOSEPHI, Ten. Woods (Cyclostrema). Proc. Roy Soc. Tasm., 1877, p. 147. 65. LEPTOTHYRA ARENACEA, Pritchard & Gatliff. Proce. Roy. Soc. Vict., 1902, vol. xiv. (n.s.), part ii., p. 181, pl. ix, fy 66. LEPTOTHYRA CARINATA, Verco. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., 1907, vol. xxxi., pl. oxi. ce: . +a ~— a ee ee” ee a ” _— ' mee —_— = “* 347 Family PHASIANELLID &. 67. PHASIANELLA AUSTRALIS, Gmelin (Buccinum). Syst. Nat., 1788, p. 3490, No. 173. B. tritonis, Chemnitz; P. buli- moides, Lam. ; P, varia, Lam.; P. decorata, Chenu. ; picta, De Blain ; lehmanni, Menke ; preissi, Menke; venusta, “Reeve ; pulchella, Ten. Woods; delicatula, Ten. Woods; subsan- guinea, Tryon. 68. PHASIANELLA VENTRICOSA, Quoy & Gaimard. Voy. Astrolabe, 1834, vol. iii., p. 237, pl. lix., f. 8-9. P. solida, Desh.; perdiz, Phil. ; brevis, Menke ; turgida, Phil.; deles- sertt, Chenu ; sanguinea, Reeve; zebra, Reeve; venosa, Reeve; peticulata, Reeve. 69. PHASIANELLA VARIEGATA, Lamarck. Anim. 8S. Vert., 1822, vol. vii., p. 53. P. unifascialis, Kiener,; nivosa, Reeve; fulgurata, Reeve ; angasi, Crosse ; splendida, Phil.; luneo- lata, Wood ; viridis, Anton ; rubens, Lam. "70, PHASIANELLA ROSEA, Angas (Hutropia). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1867, p. 114, pl. xiii., f. 24. 71. PHASIANELLA VIRGO, Angas ( Butropia). Prop, Zool. Soc. Lond., 1867, p. 115, pl. xi., f. 25. Family DELPHINULID. 72. Liovia AUSTRALIS, Kiener (Delphinula). Icon. Coq. Mes tesd. vol x. p. 8) pl. iv., f. 7. 73. LioriaA CLATHRATA, Reeve (Delphinula). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1843, sp. 21. 74. LioTIA SUBQUADRATA, Ten. Woods. Proc. Lin. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1878, vol. i1., p. 236. . 75. Liot1a MAyANA, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., 2899, vol. xxiii., p. 227, pl. vi., f. ba-5e. ZL. discoridea, Ten. Woods (non Reeve). 76. LioTIA DENSILINEATA, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1899, vol. xxili., p. 228. 77. Liotia Tasmanica, Ten. Woods. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1876 for 1875, p. 153. JZ. incerta, Ten. Woods. 78. LioTia HEDLEYI, Pritchard & Gatliff. Proc. Roy. meee Vict., 1899, vol. xii., p. 105, pl. viui., f. 8, 9, 10. 79. Lrorta ALAZON, Hedley. Records Austr. Mus., 1905, vol. vi., p. 49, f. 14. Family CYCLOSTREMATID A. 80. CycLosTREMA INSCRIPTUM, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Austr., 1899, vol. xxiii., p. 216, pl. vii. f. 3 a and b. 81. CycLostrema TaTEI, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1878, p. 862, pl. liv., f. 10. 82. CyCLOSTREMA HARRIETT, Petterd. Journ. of Conch., 1884, p. 141. 348 83. CYCLOSTREMA HOMALON, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1907, vol. xxxi., p. 305, pl. xxix., f. 3 and 4. 84. CYCLOSTREMA PACHYSTON, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., 1907, vol. xxxi., p. 306, pl. xxixy;,f. 10. 85. CYCLOSTREMA DELECTALILE, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8: Austr., 1699; vol.’ xxiii.,'p. 246, pliwns £rd& 86, CYCLOSTREMA DENSEL AMINATUM, Verco. Trans. Roy. 8. Austr., 1907, vol. xxxi., p. 306, pl. xxix., f. 9. 87, CycLOSTREMA CHAROPA, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Austr., 1899, vol. xxili., p. 217, pl. vil., f. 2a-2c. CC. mera, Petterd. 88. CycLOSTREMA ANGELI, Ten. Woods (/issoza {%)). Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1877 for 1876, p. 153. 89. CycLosTREMA. CREBRESCULPTUM, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., 1899, vol. xxili., p. 219, pl. vi., f. 5, probably © only a variant of C. angeli, Ten. Woods. 90. CycLosTreMA micron, Ten. Woods. Proc. Roy. Soe. Tasm., 1877 for 1876, p. 147. 91. CyCLOSTREMA WELDII, Ten.-Woods. Proc. Roy. Soc. © Tasm., 1877 for 1876, p. 147. C. susonis, Ten. Woods; Cur- sonella australis, Angas. 4 92. CYCLOSTREMA CONTABULATUM, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Austr., 1899, vol. xxii, p2222; pli wusrase: 93. LoppERIA LODDER#, Petterd (iotia). Journ. of © Conch. Lond., 1884, p. 135, No. 2. | 94. PseupotioT1a micans, A. Adams (Cyclostrema). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1850, p. 43. Lotta angasi, Crosse; Inotia speciosa, Angas; Liotia gowllandi, Brazier ; var. graci- — hor, Tate. Family TROCHIDZ. 95. CLANCULUS FLAGELLATUS, Philippi (Trochus). Zeits. f. Malak., 1848, p. 105. C. floridus, Philippi. 5 96. CLANCULUS LIMBATUS, Quoy & Gaimard (Trochus). Voy. Astrolabe, 1834, vol. ili., p. 245, pl. Ixii., f. 1-6. G morum, Philippi: ae ‘variegatus, A. Adams. 97. CLANCULUS MAXILLATUS, Menke (Monodonta). Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 14. i 98. CLANCULUS YATESI, Crosse. Journ. de Conch., 1863, | p- 379, pl. xiii., f. 1; C. conspersus, A. Adams; var. C. s@G3aaE depressa, Crosse; var. philippi, Koch; var. aloysii, Ten. Woods, raphael, Ten. Woods; var. philomenw, Ten. Woods; var. purpuratus, Pilsbry. a" 99. CLANCULUS RINGENS, Menke (Jfonodonta). Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 14. 100. CrancuLus DUNKERI, Koch (7'rochus |M onodonta]). — Abbild. Besch. Conch., 1843, vol. i. , part iii., p. 67, pl. ii.) fam C. rubens, Adams & Angas. q 349 101. CLANCULUS LEUCOMPHALUS, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1905, vol. xxix., p. 168, pl. xxxi., f. 9, 10, 11. 102. CLancuLus PLEBEIUS, Philippi (7rochus). Conch. Cab., 1846, p. 326, pl. xlvi., f. 10. CC. nodoliratus, A. Adams; Gibbula multicarinata, Ten. Woods; C. angeli, Ten. Woods; var. consobrinus, Tate. 103. CLancuLus ocHRotevcus, Philippi (Trochus). Conch. Cab., 1846, Band 1i., Abt. 11., p. 243, pl. xxxvi., f. 16. 104. CLANCULUS EUCHELIOIDES, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1893, vol. xvii., p. 193, pl.1., f. 8. 105. CLhancuLus unpatus, Lamarck (Monodonta). En- eye. Meth., pl. eccexlvii., f. 3 a, 6. Trochus smithi, Wood. 106. Monoponta (AUSTROCOCHLEA) CONSTRICTA, Lamarck. Anim. s. Vert., 1822, vol. vii., p. 36. Labio porcatus, A. Adams; Trochocochlea multi-carinata, Chenu; Trochus ez- tenuatus, Fischer; var. teniata, Quoy & Gaimard ; var. zebra, Menke. 107. Monoponta (AUSTROCOCHLEA) STRIOLATA, Quoy and Gaimard. Voy. Astrolabe, 1834, vol. ili., p. 253, pl. lxii., f. 18-22. Labio fuligineus, A. Adams; Trochus concameratus, Wood. 108. MonoponTA MELANOLOMA, Menke. Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 14, No. 50. Labio corrosa, A. Adams; Diloma hec- tori, Hutton; Trochocochlea chloropoda, Tate. 109. DiLoma opontTiIs, Wood. Index Test. Sup., 1828, ee, pl. visi f. 37. 110. Ditoma aDELAIDH, Philippi. Conch. Cab., 1846, p- 140, No. 168, pl. xxiv. f. 1. Gbbula depressa, Ten. Woods; Diloma australis, Ten. Woods; Gibbula tesserula, Ten. Woods. 111. CanTHariDuS LEHMANNI, Menke (Trochus). Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 18, No. 70. Phasianella elegans, Lamarck (non Gmelin); Trochus pictus, Philippi (non Wood); 7. ram- buri, Crosse; T. lesweuri, Fischer. 112. CANTHARIDUS PULCHERRIMUS, Wood (Trochus). In- dex Test., Sup., 1828, p. 18, pl. vi., f. 45. Trochus preissi, Menke; Thalotia maria, Ten. Woods. 113. THaLtoTia conica, Gray ;Jfonodonta). King’s Austr. Survey, App., 1827, vol. ii., p. 479, No. 28. Trochus pictus, Wood; Monodonta turrita, Menke; Thalotia dubia, Ten. Woods. 114. THaLoTiA cHLORosTomA, Menke (Trochus). Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 17, No. 68: 115. THaLotTia NEGLECTA, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1893, vol. xvii., part i., p. 194, pl. i., f. 6. 116. THALOTIA BLANDIANA, Crosse (Trochus). Journ. de Conch. 1864, p. 339, pl. xiii., f. 1. 350 117. THALOTIA ABNORMIS, Crosse. Journ. de Conch., 1864, p. 341, pl. xiii., f. 2. 118. THALOTIA FREYCINETI, Fischer (Trochus),. Journ. de Conch., 1878, p. 64. 119. PHASIANOTROCHUS CARINATUS, Perry (Bulimus). Conch., 1811, pl. xxx., f. 1; B. eximius, Perry; Monodonta rosea lineata, Lamarck; Trochus badius, Wood; 7. australis, Quoy & Gaimard; 7. peroniu quoyi, Philippi; 7’. ividus ver- miculosus fulmineus, Kiener. 120. PHASIANOTROCHUS BELLULUS, Dunker (T'rochus). Abbild. Besch. Conch., 1845, vol. i1., part 2, pl. vii., f. 6. 121. PHASIANOTROCHUS IRISODONTES, Quoy & Gaimard (Trochus). Voy. Astrolabe, 1854, vol. ii1., p. 246, pl. Ixii., f. 7-12. Monodonta virgata, Menke; T. iriodon, T. virgula- tus, T. minor, T. schrayert, Philippi. 122. PHASIANOTROCHUS NITIDULUS, Philippi (Trochus). Zeit. fur Malak, 1849, p. 171. 123. PHASIANOTROCHUS APICINUS, Menke (Monodonta). Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 15, No. 58. 124. Banxivia Fascrata, Menke (Phasianella). Sya. Meth. Moll., 1830, pp. 51, 141. P. fulminata, P. undatella, Menke; B. varians, Krauss; B. purpurascens, B. major ni- tida, A. Adams. 125. Le1opyRGaA picTuRATA, H. and A. Adams. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 3rd Series, 1863, vol. xi., p. 19. 126. Leropyrea octTona, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1891, vol. -xiv., part’ 2, p..260,1261, plait. .5: 127. GIBBULA TIBERIANA, Crosse (Trochus).. Journ. de Conch., 1863, p. 381, pl. xiu., f. 2. Cantharidus decoratus, Adams & Angas; Gibbula aurea, Ten. Woods; Thalotia tes: selata, Ten. Woods; G. smaltata, Fischer. 128. GiBBULA REEDI, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr, 1907, volicxexxail, p. 20 (spl soa sie, 129. GipBuLa cox1, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1867, p» 115. "pli saint, de 26. | 130. GIBBULA LEHMANNI, Menke (Turbo). Moll. Nov. Holl. 1843, p. 13, No. 48. 131. GrppuLa TasMANICca, Petterd. Quarterly Journ. of Conch., Leeds, 1877, vol. i1., p. 103. 132. Mrvonta PREISSIANA, Philippi (Trochus), Zeits. fur Malak., 1848, p. 123. Gibbula porcellana, A. Adams; G@. weldu, Ten. Woods. | 133. MINOLIA VITILIGINEA, Menke (Trochus). Moll. | Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 18, No. 73. Margarita tasmanica, Ten. Woods. | 134. Mrnovia pHitippENsis, Matson (Trochus [Solariel- la|). Journ. Lin. Soc. Lond., 1881, vol. xv., p. 92. | 351 135. CaLLiostoMA MEYERI, Philippi (7'rochus). Zeits fur Malak, 1848, p. 101. 7. levis, Hombron and J; Zizyphi- nus armillatus, Reeve; Z. euglyptus, Adams. 136. CaLLIosTOMA NoBILE, Philippi (Trochuws). Conch. Cab., 1846, Bd. ii., Abt. ii., iii, p. 86, pl. xv., f. 6, and pl. xxxvill., f. 1; 7. rubiginosus, Valenciennes; Z. splendidus, Philippi. 137. Cattiostoma ausTRALIS, Broderip (T'rochus). Zool. Journ., 1830, vol. v., p. 331, tab. suppl. 49, f. 3. 138. CaLLiostomMa CILIARE, Menke (7'rochus). Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 17, No. 66. 139. CaLLIosToMaA RUBROPUNCTATUM, A. Adams (Zizyphinus). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1851, p. 167. C. spinu- losum, Tate. 140. CALLIOSTOMA HEDLEYI, Pritchard & Gatliff. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 1902, vol. xiv. (n.s.), part 2, p. 182, pl. ix., f. 4. 141. CaLLiosTtomMa LeGRANDI, Ten. Woods (Zizyphinus). Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1876 for 1875, p. 154.. 142. CALLIOSTOMA POUPINELI, Montrouzier, (T'rochus [Zizyphinus|). Journ. de Conch., 1875, p. 40, pl. iv., f. 6. Z. comptus, A. Adams; C. purpureo-cinctum, Hedley. 143. CaLLiostoma ALLPorTI, Ten. Woods (Trochus | Zizy- phinus|). Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1876 for 1875, p. 155. 144. CALLIOSTOMA ZIETzZI, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. S8. ees wool xxix., p. 166, pl. xxxi., f. 1, 2, 3. 145. CaLLIostoMA INCERTUM, Reeve (Zizyphinus). wonen. Icon-., 1863, vol. xiv., pl. v., f. 28. 146. ASTELE SUBCARINATUM, Swainson. Proc. Roy. Soc. Van Diemen’s Land, 1854, vol. 111., p. 56, pl. vi., f. 1-2. Hu- trochus perspectivus, A. Adams; Calliostoma adamsi, Pils- bry; Zizyphinus subgranularis, Dunker. 147. ASTELE MULTIGRANUM, Dunker (Zizyphinus). Mal. Blatt, 1871, vol. xviii., p. 169. 148. ASTELE CALLISTON, Verco. ‘Trans. Roy Soc. §. ee 1 90a, vol: xxix., p. 167, pl. xxxi., f. 7, 8. 149. Minos PETTERDI, Crosse (Fossarina). Journ. de Conch., 1870, p. 303, 1871, pl. x1i., f. 1. Fossarina simsoni, Ten. Woods. 150. Eucuetus saccatus, Menke (Monodonta). Moll. Nov. Holl., 1843, p. 14, No. 51. TZvrochus aspersus, Koch. 151. EucHELUsS scaBriuscuLus, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1867, p. 215, No. 181. H. tasmenicus, Ten. Woods. 152. Buchelus vieumbilicatus, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. =. Austr:, 1893, vol. xvii., part 1, p. 196, pl.i., f. 4. 153. EUCHELUS FENESTRATUS, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. @ustr., 1895, vol. xvii., part 1, p. 195, pl. 1, f. 2. j 154. EvcHELUS pPumiILio, Tate. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. mustr., 1893, vol. xvii., part 1, p. 196, pl.i., f. 3. 4 352 155. EucHELUS amPpuLLus, Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., 1893, vol. xvii., part 1, p. 197, pl. 1., f. 156. BasILissa RADIALIS, Tate /Seguenzia). Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., ‘1890,° vol: x11.,° pr 192) pl ix. f. Ge vam bilix, Hedley (Astele), Records Austr. Mus., 1905, vol. vi., part 2, p. 48, f. 13. Family UMBONIID 2. 157. TEINOSTOMA CANCELLATA, Tate (Vthalia?). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1878-9, p. 139, pl. v., f. 11 a to e. 158. Te1nostoma Lucipa, Adams & Angas (WNeritula). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 35. en 159. ADEORBIS VINCENTIANA, Angas. Proc. Zool. Soe. ond, 1880,-p. 417, pl. xl. 9: 160. ADEORBIS KIMBERI, Verco. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., 1907,. vol, xxxi., p. 308, pl, 2x1x.,,4. 1 amar, Family NERITIDA. 161. NeriTta MELANOTRAGUS, E. A. Smith. ‘Alert’ col- lection, Zool., 1884, p. 69, No. 82. WN. migra, Gray ‘non Chemn.); WV. atrata, Reeve (non Chemn.); 1’. saturata, Hut- ton. 353 MICROSCOPICAL SECTION OF THE Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated). ANNUAL REPORT, 1906-7. OrFricers.—Chairman, Mr. W. Fuller; Vice-Chairman, Mr. W. B. Poole; Committee, Messrs. D. Gordon and D. Maw- son, B.E., B.Sc.; Minute Secretary, Mr. H. A. Whitehill; Hon. Secretary, Mr. E. J. Bradley, Dover Street, Malvern ; Auditors, Messrs. S. Smeaton, B.A., and T. Godlee. In submitting the report for the year 1906-7 the Com- mittee is pleased to state that the Section has entered the new quarters provided for the Royal Society and its Sections. During the past session the average attendance of members at meetings and excursions has been maintained to the standard of previous sessions, whilst the roll of members shows that steady progress is being made, despite the fact of the usual lo.s through death and resignations. The Committee de- plores the death of Mr. David Fleming, a foundation mem- ber and past Chairman, who was holding office as Vice- Chairman at the time of his demise, and also the death of Miss Heyneman, a foundation member. The position of the Section generally is now more favour- able to progress than at any time in its previous history, and a more active interest is manifested by members, who, on the whole, are displaying a greater tendency to take up special lines of original research. The constitution of the Section has been slightly remodel- led, and the regulations regarding the number of officers and admission of honorary corresponding members have been nex led. The following meetings and excursions have been held during the session : — September 23, 1906.--Annual general meeting, at which n address was delivered by the Chairman, Mr. W. Fuller, on “The Miscroscope in Science and Commerce.” October 23.—Paper on “The Construction, Stocking, and Maintenance of the Fresh-water Aquarium,” by Mr. S. Smea- ton, B.A. November 27.—Mr. G. Quinn read a paper on ‘Some Parasitic Fungi found in our Gardens, and Methods of Pre- vention,” illustrated by diagrams and specimens. March 23, 1907.—Dredging excursion, Port River. March 26.—Exhibition of work done by members during the summer recess. L 354 April 20.—Excursion to Patawalonga River, via Fulham. April 23.—Paper by Mr. W. B. Poole on “Diatoms,” with diagrams and various specimens of many species, etc. May 28.—Exhibition of specimens of microphotography by Mr. W. B. Poole, Hydrozoa by Mr. Bradley, and Rotifera by Mr. Showell. June 12.—Conversazione in connection with the opening of the new rooms. June 25.—Exhibition and descriptive account by Dr. E. Angas Johnson of a number of Bacteria and Parasites affect- ing man and beasts, and also exhibition of cancer of mouse ob- tained by artificial inoculation. July 23.—Conversation meeting and exhibition of Micro- photographs by Mr. Dollman. August 24.—Excursion to Blackwood. August 27.—Paper on “Desmids” by Mr. E. J. Bradley, illustrated by blackboard sketches and living specimens. September 24.—Excursion to Happy Valley. Epcar J. Brapiey, Hon. Secretary. MICROSCOPICAL SECTION OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BALANCE-SHEET, SESSION 1906-7. Receipts. rh Pee Subscriptions, 1906-7 : ao SIG Balance in hand beginning ‘of Session — j ees Grant from Royal Society = 9) 040 £19 1x2 Expenditure. s. d Subscriptions, 1906-7, paid to Piigeae bi Het ia Society . 8117516 Postage and Duty Stamps" ~! 3 Bs ote 2. 8 8 Stationery and Printing oe a ae oe 214 0 Attendance ahi sae 5 de ae 140 Balance in hand ae ae nie Aa bing 319 0 £19142 Epear J. Brapiey, Hon. Secretary. Audited and found correct. i S. SMEATON, | ae THEO. GODLEE, | Auditors September 17, 1907. 355 Wein LNDEX. [Generic and specific names printed in italics indicate that the forms described are new. | Acmea flammea, 101. Actzon roseus, var. — retusus, 309. Adeorbis kimberi, 308. Amazonstone, 123. Amelora polychroa, 171. _ Annual Meeting, 321. Annual Report, 322; Field Natu- ralists’ Section, 340; Native Fauna and Flora Committee, 343; Mala- cological Section, 346; Micro- scopical Section, 353. ; Anodontonyx, 257; Table of Species, 258; A. antennalis, 266; chalceus, 263; consanqguineus, 262; creber, 262; gravicollis, 260; Harti, 259; hirticeps, 266; indignus, 264; languida, 265; micans, 263; nigro- lineata, 266, 298; rectangulus, 264; _ tetricus, 261; vigilans, 260. Anthropological Notes on Northern Territory Tribes, 1. Arcularia dipsacoides, 214. Arsipoda kingensis, 298. Atermonocheila, 238; A. longipes, 239 Baker, W. H., Notes on South Australian Decapod Crustacea, 173. Balance-sheet, 325. Barytes Sand Crystals, 119; Radial- Nodular Barytes, 120. Basedow, H., Anthropological Notes on Northern Territory Tribes, 1. Bathyarca perversidens, 222. Blackburn, Rev. T., Further Notes on Australian Coleoptera, 231. Blastobasis anthoptera, 118; mono- zona, Bog-iron ore deposit, 177. Bragg, Prof. W. H., Comparison of some Forms of Electric Radiation, 79; Nature of Réntgen Rays, 94. Bragg, Prof. W. H., and Dr. W. T. Cooke, Ionisation Curve of Meth- ane, 111. Bragg, Prof. W. H., and J. P. V. Madsen, The Quality of the Secondary [Ionisation due to B _ Rays, 300. Byrrhomorpha, 275; B. 276; Table of Species, 276. Cesyra platyxantha, 118. ot gladiolata, 210; tutelata, areatus, 309; Caleana major, 127. Callianassa wquimana, 182. Caterpillar fungus, 316. anomala, Caulobius ferrugineus, 239. Cavolina inflexa, 107; tridentata, 107; trispinosa, 107. Cebysa conflictella, 207. Ceratoplax punctata, 176. Cereyon kingense, 231. Chrysotile, 123. Cis leanus, 285. Clania, 196; Table of Species, 196; C. Dewitzi, 196; hemitricha, 199; ignobilis, 197; Lewinii, 198 ; photidias, 199; tenuis, 197. Cho balantium, 108; pyramidata, 108; subula, 108. Cocculina coercita, 102. Coleoptera, Notes on 231. Condylocardia ovata, 109; trifoliata, 109 Australian, Cooke, Dr. W. T. [see under Bragg and Mawson. ] Crassatellites banksii, 312; carnea, $11; discus, 511; kingicola, 311; micra, 513; probleema, 313; pro- ducta, 512. Crustacea, eapod, 173 Cryptodromia depressa, 180. Cryptophagus tasmanicus, 232. Cryptopora brazieri, 106. Ctenaphides gymnostictus, 164. Cuna concentrica, 109; delta, 109. Curculionide, Descriptions of Aus- tralian, 129. Cyamiomactra communis, 108; mac- troides, 108. Cyclostrema denselaminatum, 306; homalon, 305; pachyston, 306. Cycloxanthus carinatus, 173. Cymatium kampylum, 102. Dennant, Mr. J., Obituary Notice of, $23. Diphyllocera kirbyana, 281. Diuris palachila, 209. Donations to the Library, 326. Drillia hecatorguia, 215. Dromia octodentata, 179. Elder Rock, Phosphate from, 65. Electric Radiation, 79. Elinostola, 193; F. hypomela, 193. Enamillus mauricei, 235 [see Saro- thromerus. | Entometa ignobilis, 207. Kochrois lezochroa, 114; trisema, 114. Erynnis amalia, 170 oe rag monoda, 115; 114. South Australian De- Minerals paraleuca, Kumeta Ernesti, 207. Eyre Peninsula, Geology of, 71. Fellows, etc., List of, 337. Field Naturalists’ Section, 340. | Frenchella, 268; Tables of Species, 269; F. calorata, 269. Fulgurite from Warrina, 317. Gafrarium angasi, 109 Gadinia angasi, 105 Genduara cinerea, 207. Geology of Eyre Peninsula, 71; Wadella Springs, 77. Gibbula reedi, 307. Glossocheilifer addendus, 241. Glycimeris pectinoides, 226; sor- didus, 227. Gypsum, deposited by a Spring, 78; from Southern Yorke Peninsula, 120; from Patawalonga Creek, 122; gypseous tufa, 123. Haplonycha Griffithi, 239 [see Platydesmus]. Helcioniscus limbatus, 100. Hopatrides, 286. Hopatromorpha, 286, 289; Table of Species, 290. Hopatrum, 286; Table of Species, Z2ol¢ Fi. Marstersi, 287; Macleayt, 288; misellum, 288. Hyalarcta, 193; H. huebneri, 195; nigrescens, 194; ptiloclada, 195. Hypographa eremoea, 171. Ionisation Curve of Methane, 111. — Secondary, due to B Rays, 500. mon A. M., Descriptions of Aus- tralian Curculionidae, 129. Leda crassa, 217; dohrni, 217 ; sare vA pala, 217; verconis, iL TEEPE, New Australian, 114, Library, Donations to, 326. Libythea geoffroyi, 169. Lightning, Effects of, on a barbed- wire fence, 316. Lima angulata, 314; 514; multicostata, 513. Limea austrina, 315; murrayi, 315. Limacina inflata, 107. bullata, Limopsis erectus, 220; eucosmus, 219; tenisoni, 218; tenisoni, var. penelevis, 218; vixornata, 219. Lissarca pubricata, 221; rhomboi- dalis, 221. List of Fellows, etc., 5357. Lower, O. New Australian Lepidoptera, 114, 169 [see under Meyrick]. Lyre-bird, Remarks on, 318. Macrones Besti, 296. Mechidius capitalis, 283; caviceps, 283; raucus, 281; relictus, 282. Malacological Section, Annual Re- port, 346. 356 Mangilia spica, 215. Mandalotus, 129; Table of Species, 131; M. albonotatus, 160; arciferus, 145 : arcuatus, 154; avenaceus, 160; Blackburni, 143: Blackmorei, 163; bryophagus, 143; carinativentris, 148; Carteri, 150; cellaris, 187; Coatesi, 153; crassicornis, 156; crudus, 137; Fergusoni, 157; geminatus, 141; granulatus, 147; humeralis, 159; imitator, 149; intercoxalis, 138; inusitatus, 163; litoralis, 144; longicollis, 146; maculatus, 162; mirabilis, 152; niger, 152; nodicollis, 155; ochreonotatus, 161; pilosus, 138; pinguis, 138; sabulosus, 150; scaber, 138; seticollis, 157; seto- sus, 155; similis, 158; simulator, 139; sterilis, 136; Sydneyensis, 151; trisinuatus, 154; tuberculi- ventris, 142; vacillans, 140; variabilis, 139; valgus, 137; ¢ ventralis, 137. Mawson, D., Geological Features of Eyre Peninsula, 71; do., Wadella Springs, 77; Mineral Notes, 119. Mawson, D., ‘and Dr. W. T. Cooke, Phosphate Minerals from Elder Rock, 65. Melissoblaptes spodoptera, 171. Mesomorphus, 286. Methane, Ionisation Curve of, 111. Meyrick, E., and O. B. Lower, Re- vision of the Australian Psychide, (te Microscopical Section, Annual Re- port, 353. Microtis, A New, 63; M. orbicu- laris, 63. Mineralogical Notes, 119. Modiola linea, 106; penetecta, 225. Modiolarca tasmanica, 105. Mollusca, Notes on South Australian Marine, 99, 213, 305. Mucialla crypsimera, 172; Jleuco- spila, 172; macromorpha, 172. Myodora tasmanica, 311. mh longicornis, 252; parva, 232. Nacella_ crebristriata, 101; stowe, 101 Nanophyes Allent, 166; maurus, 166; nigrovarius, 167; pallidicornis, 167; V-notatus, 166. Native Fauna and Flora Protection Committee, Annual Report, 343. Neolepton rostellatum, 106. Nephogenes amphisema, 117; dro- serodes, 116; drymelanthes, 116; pycnoda, 116. Neso, 273; Table of Species, 274; N. ducalis, 274. 101; parvay » = , Northern Territory, Anthropology of, 7% Nosphisthis Perkinsi, 267. Nucula beachportensis, 216; micans, 215; obliqua, 216. Nuculina concentrica, 220. Ocnodus, -277;, Table of Species, 278; O. eens, 278 ; lugubris, 278 ; porosus, 280; scissiceps, 279; sus- piciosus, 279 ‘see Caulobius]. Ocystola agramma, 118. (Bnochrodes, 115; O. crossoxantha, 115. Officers of the Society, Election of, 522. . Oiketicus, 199; O. bicolor, 207; elongatus, 200; felinus, 207; mac- alisteri, 207; tertius, 200. Onthophagus carmodensis, 233; ocel- liger, 233. Orchids new to South Australia, 125; three new Species of, 209 Pachygastra, 281. Panisa circumdata, 207. Paracharactis, 205; Table of Species, 200; P. cautopsis, 205; delocephala, 206 : erionota, 206; Leeuwinii, 205. Paratooite, 68. Paropsis acclivis, 296. Patella hepatica, 99; ustulata, 99. Petinopus, 240. Philobota dasycopa, 117; spheno- leuca, 117. Philobrya cuboides, 223. Pholadomya arenosa, 230. este Minerals from Elder Rock, scious, 284 ; Table of Species, 285; P. decipiens, 285; dubius, 285; porcellus, 284. Pinnoteres hAolothuriensis, 177; sub- globosa, 179. Platydesmus, 270; Table of Species, mo; P. inamenus, 272; inusitatus, 272; major, 271; obscuricornis, 270; sulcipennis, 271. Plutorectis, 201; Table of Species, mul; P. boisduvalii, 202 ; grisea, 204; gymnophasa, 204 ; hyaloscopa, 203; lurida, 204; melanodes, 201; zanthochrysa, 202 ; zophopepla, 203. Pontonia minuta, 189. Poroleda ensicula, 218. uae australiensis, 185; gracilis, Psychanisa circumdata, 207. 357 Psyche albifrons, 207. Psychide, Revision of the Australian, 192; Table of Species, 193 Pteroheleus, 290; Table of Species, td al Sa brevicornis, 294; bullatus, 293; gracilicornis, 293; puer, 295; regularis, 292; simplicicollis, 292; ventralis, 294. Pteropoda, South Australian, 106. Pterostylis furcata, 125. Pupa hyalina, 310; intermedia, 310. a enn: Electric, 79; Rontgen Rays, 94. Rogers, Dr. R. S., A new Microtis, 65; three new Species of Orchid, 209 ; three Species of Orchid new to South Australia, 125. Rontgen Rays, 94. Sarepta obolella, 218. Sarothromerus, 237. Scitala, 241; Table of Species, 245; S. ambigua, 253; aureorufa, 254; calescens, 252; convexicollis, 248; coxalis, 254; hospes,251; ino, 249; juvenis, 256; languida, 298; Neme- sis, 250; mnemoralis, 248; palli- dula, 276; rorida, 251; rugosiceps, 247; ~sericans, 255; subsericans, 256 [see Anodontonyx and Serices- this. ] Sciton variicollis, 275. Sepia braggi, 213. Sericesthis pruinosella, 273; su- turalis, 275 [see Anodontonyx]. Siphonaria albida, 104; baconi, 104; diemenensis, 103; stowe, 105; zonata, 105. Spilosoma cosmeta, 170. Stolzite, 123. Telesto monotherm, 169. Thelymitra venosa, 125. Thracia concentrica, 229; lincolnen- sis, 229; myodoroides, 228. Thylacoleo carnifex, Remains of, at Normanville, 317. Torcula runcinata, 308. Trichelasmus basalis, 236. Trigonia margaritacea, nalli, Trogoderma rigua, 232. Verco, Dr. J. C., Notes on South “eae Marine Mollusca, 99, Vermicularia flava, 214; nodosa, 102. Wadella Springs, Geology of, 77. Wollastonite, 124. var. bed- A9718—Hussey & Gillingham, Printers, 106 and 108, Currie Street, Adelaide, South Aust, ‘4 ike Tie waon titi weg “Satire ait Tes Cesta vnae, erOriinyé a. Af, wisi te Vidal’ :Oef ULe ; a Tin" ales r¥' hig Rule dow rd gis - eho Toads. SOS plea ‘aid ne 2 (UR Sins 2 Bm! Ail ate ; ON}. (ake q gis ; fire EOS OR NOS Pe CORR. Son ott CSTD la weit bie OET % POS bw Vivatayn SUy ey idays SO8a- BY ‘ OCR Ser gitar elt hes... alreqes wee TES pe asentye oy f i ie pp a i : ti i < ae ection ree fe a Lai iaME CLO We ae SET Tae day . a ¢ a * Pe ° Ma ; CGV reais phan } SAT cae, eS ps ee ‘ ; wiht mel-A |, 2 a8 gol ies ca ST be atin ' il (ty ts # t cic “av t vag r . a8 ] ot Diy @ Blagst) Fol aatise 4 ; TOS TAHT SO cole “ : ‘ 4 . AP s sz woh f 4 err f sits ** bu eae es ™ “hoe rf He ¥ ‘ Tvs mae ites Te Ome, ct re ii ateanl tae be ¥). tees, oC oe Pv r ’ “ . ry .% : . ¥ €,. fe er aera te aida na? dfiseuadee Rhee ts he p vs ‘ ' - > : e 7 4 > he ‘ bf "Pa OV Grea: OOS ; 2 eS 7h alten Wie AN aR , ‘ © iat ele —% : . . ie ee LP by: RPS wife ’ - Meta ature cy a tara vigns il cod Sa cd ae id 44% maine, Mh Sida h UY: a a yz ' é {fen Vy Cbs": , vi Mog dusiie sti winds i} ax ran WEF tik oar Se ‘ . shen cis } ti ote, DY SC aa ed 7 7 . a ‘ a . : ck -%: al a { 4 3 fe OP aw SS - ‘ ‘hiie ac aay 9 mY | Q° atdlindn. eo ce am QTd x Cris iS ee Oe ea ated Oy age ; futon vanes ath ‘ eas Ypres 3 Y BIS? a ate ae ,, 2 ) hE a pet a ge mena 52 Acne ar ae : “? BP) ib i bi | +9 i Pi 4 mC ie " ra pice ro mets FAO asian Slo hid pee ag woe Aas rreristts. j " . ry eR eur ks if ‘ ~2 one, ty F oT Rr eS iastroti . DADE i ca ye 4 abe Vv. eng dag ae PR AND REPORT OF THE ROVAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA. (INCORPORATED). am *s en dhe Ss a eee pee : xy te } feet xe RTL i. ie [Wits EicuTeen Piatzs AnD Forty-two Ficurses 1n tHE TExr. | i ~¢ ‘EDITED BY WALTER HOWCHIN, F.GS. PRICE, NINE SHILLINGS. “ane Z a | Adelaide : | £2 ‘ _W. ©. RIGBY, 74, KING WILLIAM STREET. cas | DECEMBER, 1908. ? « Europe and America should be addressed ‘‘ per WV. C. » care Messrs. Thos. Meadows & Co., 34, Milk Street, iia _ ss Cheapside, London.” die meets ai St Vere ieee oe a ae ae yer Ye my 5am itn * na «'% ‘ he ee ee WN, TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS RE PO ca ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA ees Ue Oe EL (Wits EIGHTEEN PLATES AND Forty-TWO FIGURES IN THE TEXT. ] EDITED BY WALTER HOWCHIN, FE.GS. PRICE. NINE SHILCINGS. Adelaide : W. ©. RIGBY, 74, KING WILLIAM STREET. DECEMBER, 1908. Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from Europe and America should be addressed ‘per W. C. Rigby, care Messrs. Thos. Meadows & Co., 34, Milk Street, Cheapside, London.” Royal Society of South Australia (INCORPORATED). Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY SIR GEORGE R. LeHUNTE, K.C.M.G. — —@- — OFFICERS FOR 1908-Q. President: JOSEPH C. VERCO, M.D., F.R.C.S. Vice=Presidents: PROF. E. H. RENNIE, M.A., D.Sc., F.C.S. REV. THOMAS BLACKBURN, B.A. fbon. Treasurer: WALTER RUTT, C.E. thon. Secretary and Sealbolder : G. CG. avo en: Members of Council: W. HOWCHIN, F.G.S. (Editor and Representative Governor). W. B. POOLE. R. S. ROGERS, M.A., M.D. SAMUEL DIXON. W. H. SELWAY. EK. ASHBY. Auditor : J. S. LLOYD, F.1.A.S.A. fey NTS. QO Page. Brage, Prof. W. H., and Dr. J. P. V. Mapsen: An Experi- mental Investigation of the Nature of the y Rays. No. i. Rogers, Dr. R. S.: Description of a New Species of Orchid -Mapsen, Dr. J. P. V.: The Ionization Remaining in Gases after Removal from the Influence of the Ionizin Agent Brage, Prof. W. H., and Dr. J. P. V. Mapssn: ee Wiener: mental Investigation of the Nature of the y een Now it Turner, Dr. A. J.: New Australian Ppaprcopters of the Families Noctuide and Pyralide ... Lower, O. B.: New Australian Le idoptera. “No. xxv. ... Woo.novucH, Dr. W. G.: Notes on the Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges, Chiefly the Portion East of the Onka- paringa River. Plates 1. and ii. Baker, W. H.: Notes on Some Species of the Tsopod Family Spheromide, from the South Australian Coast. Plates im. Go. x. vi Mapsen, Dr. PY. : Secondary ¥ Radiation Verco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on South Australian Marine Mol- lusea, with Descriptions of New Species. Part viii. Plates xi. to xiil. aa Lea, A. M.: Descriptions of Australian. Curculionidae, with Notes on previously-described Species. Part vi. MIAIDEN, J. H.: A ol alia to the Botany of South Australia ZiETz, A.: Description of a hitherto Undescribed Species of Shark from Investigator Strait : A Synopsis of the Fishes of South Australia. Part 1. A Synopsis of the Fishes of South Australia. rere is. : Brace, Prof. W. H.: On a Want of Symmetry shown by Secondary X-Rays. (Abstract.) ... ue ve aK: Brace, Prof. W. H., and J. L. Guasson: On a Want of Symmetry shown by Secondary X-Rays . Lower, O. B.: Descriptions of New Australian Hesperiadz ——$_______ New Australian Tortricina .. Cuarpmsn, Prof. R. W.: The Strength of South Australian Timbers _... _ Wenco, Dr. J. C.: Notes on 1 South Australian Marine Mol- lusca, with Descriptions of New eepeman Part ix. Plates xiv. to xvill. .. Biacksurn, Rev. T.: Further Notes on Australian Coleop- tera, with Descriptions of New Genera and PECOES: No. xxxvili. D. z ae a ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ... AnnvuaL REpPorRT a BALANCE-SHEET Enpowment Funp = Donations TO THE LIBRARY... List or Fretitows, Etc. Pe . APPENDICES. Annual Report, etc., of Field Naturalists’ Section ... Twentieth Annual Report of the Native Fauna and Flora Protection Committee of the Field Naturalists’ Section Annual Report, etc., of the Malacological Section ... anal aan” etc., of the Microscopical Section ... ndex é er ti ae ede th; 3 1 ll 12 =“ “ay ae) Cw, ‘ernat Wom a ONG eee 5, aa ’ ODES) ith. + vival m4 \, AG Sak a mii Niet Oe pao Fs We) 490i wit Yo Wis yi ea tat eae PEAR TO, Beas. ro “ft to” Ree cae at) Suey ree ee wet! (ieiut tee ee PE ae 4 rt Pt ire 4 AD OMiE When, iy DIETER Tie crewis Ln “itt it 1a i4 (we A ema eae ey ee ee ‘oa ay aad ' ive TS Tera io teovih Leos ae 7 stirs cbs hy eerie. a ed ‘ hy ti " tl aye fe ft ‘jon s. retilieese F TRI ee ee ee ee, A Srdahh ody 7 . wav... A All gee yin revel) snk wlingh ; att i Sf H.W . | (Ulsie. GE ner) ieee tet Fr F ,4 * pes ee i hui H ’ hy vi , a ta, if i “ vie ; i i. . 4 ¢ eu { tf eee ‘ > (iN to) VB Same eG ? ti? | j [. tas? (@gi8 hives 5 j ; 7] 5 ip ‘ j : ” i i : Z I? ‘ ~) iy , yo i! i f ? : ‘ ( + vi fx ; BRS Pt i atin bl 7 : i4 hav } f hte ; : ; : { f ry “GE § i ‘ y< ‘i 4 i j 5 “ i 2 - i f BEE eet f : } 5, 3 4 ag ich Pa . ¥ ¥ 7 a) AM fl oye uae » rer “ Li bh . ae ; i+ { [ede Met) Ol) are ‘ tis ef f ‘i y Neg ty tl , fey AN EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION OF THE NATURE OF THE y Rays.—No. 1. By W. H. Brace, M.A., F.R.S., Elder Professor of Mathe- matics and Physics in the University of Adelaide, and J. P. V. Mansen, D.Sc., Lecturer on Electrical En- gineering. [Received January 2, 1908; read May 5, 1908.] In papers recently published in the “Proceedings of the Royal Society of South Australia” (May and June, 1907) and in the “Philosophical Magazine” (October, 1907) an at- tempt was made to show that the ether-pulse theory of 7 and X-rays might prove to be incorrect after all, and that most of the known properties of these rays could be explained more simply and directly on the supposition that they were material and consisted of neutral pairs. The arguments were based on comparison of known phenomena with deduc- tions from each of the two opposing hypotheses. At that time there did not seem to be any opportunity of appeal to a decisive experiment. The object of this paper is to give a preliminary account of an investigation which appears to us to give a final answer as regards the y rays, and to show that they are material in nature. Secondary radiation, which is excited in an atom by a passing wave or pulse, must be distributed symmetrically with regard to a plane passing through the atom perpendicu- lar to the direction of motion of the pulse. If we speak of the primary pulse as going forwards, the secondary radia- tion is just as likely to go backwards as forwards. This is a well-recognized principle. For example, J. J. Thomson divides the secondary radiation, due to 7 rays, into two equal parts, which he supposes to move away symmetrically in opposite directions, and, for convenience of calculation, paral- lel to the direction of the primary rays (Cond. of Electricity through Gases, p. 406). Supposing, therefore, a pencil of y rays to pass normally through a plate so thin that its absorption may be neglected, the secondary radiation should be exactly the same on the two sides of the plate—in amount, in quality, and in distribution; and it ought not to be pos- sible to discover, by any comparison of the secondary radia- tions on the two sides, which is the face of entry and which of emergence. A 2 Consider now the ionization-chamber represented in fig. 1. The two ends are closed by plates, of which A and A’ are alike; so also are B and B'. The substance of A and 4’ is different to that of B and B’. The nature of the side walls is immaterial. A pencil of y rays passes along the axis of the chamber, which is re- presented by a dotted line. The ionization current. within the chamber is measured as usual by inserting a high potential electrode Fig: 1. connected to an electroscope. When the plates 4 and B are inverted, Se ay is a change in the amount of the current; so also when A' and B’ are inverted. By an extension of the principle already stated, it ought not to be possible, on the ether-pulse theory, to dis- cover which way the rays are going, up or down in the fig- ure, by comparing the consequence of inverting A and B with that of inverting A’ and B’. As a matter of fact, the direction can be discovered with ease; the more easily the greater the difference between the atomic weights of A and B. For example, in one experiment of ours the chamber was of cylindrical form, 3 inches high and 10 inches diameter. Ra The plates used were of alumin- ium and lead. The thickness of ,; each plate was a little less than 2mm. Inversion of the top plats we SS 4%, A:;and..B; made .a, difference, init; 72 4ola aan favour of Al of less than 1 per cent., 2.e., the current was slightly larger when Al was next the chamber. On the other hand, inversion of the kottom plates made a difference of 44 per cent. in favour of Pb, z.e., the current was 44 per cent. larger when the Pb was on top. The details are shown in the figure. Allowance was made for all radiation other than that which proceeded down the conical opening in the lead block. It may be well to point out that this effect cannot be ascribed to any complication due to secondary or tertiary rays. No doubt the radiation in the chamber is very com- plex; but the fact is immaterial. Provided that the cham- ber is symmetrical in the first place, then the secondaries A 6) i must be symmetrical also if the ether-pulse theory is cor- rect, and therefore the tertiaries and so on. Nor is it neces- sary to consider whether the secondary radiations are B rays or scattered y rays. Also, it must be remembered that the secondary radiations which enter the chamber have their origin almost entirely in a very few millimetres of material bordering on the chamber. Therefore, the y rays are in almost exactly the same condition, both as to quality and as to quantity, when they excite secondary radiations from the top plate as they enter the chamber, and secondary radia- tions from the bottom plate as they leave. The details of the experiment may be varied greatly ; but in all the cases we have tried the want of symmetry is obvious. In fig. 3 are shown the details of one other case, in which carbon and lead were the materials used, and the form of the 3 (1) Curent unith plalis arrauged a1 abre= STF (2) ” Dl Mickbccty P87 ewortelt 4-000 = SL, (3) Qe inl), but bave PR hauged G a hoa SOS Fig. 3. chamber was different. It seems unnecessary to give more, because, in the first place, the experiments are easy to re- peat; and in the second place, the complete quantitative analysis of the figures depends on several factors, the influ- ence of which is imperfectly understood, such as the previous screening of the rays, the form of the chamber, and the re- spective parts played by the original y rays, cathode rays, and secondary y rays, if any such exist. The experiments, as they stand, show how far away is that symmetry which the ether- pulse theory demands. It seems to us that there is no escape from the conclusion that the y rays are not ether pulses. Let us, therefore, proceed to consider the hypothesis that the y rays are material. In the paper already mentioned, it was argued that they might well consist of neutral pairs, lable to be broken up on encountering atoms or parts of A2 4 atoms; and that the secondary cathode radiations might be the negative particles thus set free. Let us suppose, provi- sionally, that the particles, when set free, move at first in the direction of the y stream, but are subsequently scattered in the usual manner of Bf rays. [It is here that the absence of symmetry arises. On the pulse theory the particles should go equally backwards and forwards ; indeed, if they were ejected by atomic explosions, the result of energy accumulated from passing pulses, as sug- gested by J. J. Thomson in the case of X-rays, they would move equally in all directions. | Wigger gives a table (Jahrbuch der Radioaktivitat, Bd. ll., p. 431) showing that the y rays are absorbed according to a density A BC D law pretty strictly, except for small thicknesses of substances of large ‘ atomic weight. ik enn: Assume this law to hold good, and : also assume for the present that the ab- A’ Bcd’ sorption of B rays follows the density ‘| law. The latter is only roughly true, of ___|_- ay Be course; but we may deal with quanti- ties in a broad fashion first, and make the proper amendments afterwards. Fig. 4. We can now compare the quan- tities of cathode radiation which should emerge from the far sides of two plates of different densities p and p’. Let these be represented by AD and A'D’ in the figure, and let BC and B'C' be corresponding strata of equal weight: in. fact, let AB/A'B'=BC/B'C’=CD/C'D' =p'/p. Wer the plates be crossed by equal pencils of y rays, as shown in the figure. A certain quantity of y radiation is absorbed in crossing BC’. In the language of our present hypothesis we should say that a certain number of y particles are stripped of their positives, and the negative remainders go on. An equal number of negatives are set free in B’'C’ because the two strata are of equal weight. Of those set free in BC only a certain number emerge from the face D, because of the absorption of the plate CD. Since CD and C'D’ are of equal weight, a similar absorption occurs in the case of the particles set free in B'C’. Thus the same number emerge from each plate. Integrating for all effective strata, the whole cathode radiations emerging from the two plates are equal. i We thus find that if the absorption of B and y rays both followed the density law, the secondary cathode radiation on the far side of a plate—we may call it the “emergence” radia- D tion—would be the same for all materials. There should be no such relation between the amount of the radiation and the atomic weight of the plate, as various observers have shown to be true for the secondary cathode radiation of “incidence,” a relation which is closely parallel to that found in the case of B rays. Experiment is in agreement with this theory, for it shows that no such relation exists in respect to the emergence radia- tions; in marked contrast to what happens in the case of the radiations from the front sides of plates of various mate- rials, the incidence radiations. It is true that the emergence radiations are not all equal, but this is to be expected, because (1) the amount of second- ary cathode radiation depends, as Kleeman has shown, on the previous screening of the y rays; (2) the 8 rays are not ab- sorbed strictly according to a density law; (3) the y rays also depart from this law. We have made no serious attempt as yet to disentangle the effects of these various disturbing factors. In fact, the task promises to be long and intricate, for it will be necessary to find out how much of the loniza- tion in the chamber is due to each class of rays; to discover the law of distribution of the radiations in space, so that the form of the chamber may be allowed for, if necessary; to find out the nature of the departures from the density law of those B and y rays which are in question; and so on. _ Nevertheless, the results are satisfactory, so far as we have gone. The amount of emergence radiation is found to depend on the previous screening of the rays. In one case the in- version of a C, Pb pair of plates from C, Pb to Pb, C, altered the current in the ratio 1:1:11 when the rays had been pre- viously screened by Pb; but in the ratio 1:°96 when the screen was changed to C. Again, when the rays had previously pass- ed through an iron screen, the inversion Pb Fe to Fe Pb changed the current in the proportion 1:1:12, but when a lead screen was substituted for an iron one the change was 1:1°04. In illustration of the effect of the second disturb- ing factor mentioned above, we have found that, other things being equal, the substances of small atomic weight give the most secondary radiation, in a general way; and it may be no coincidence that in some cases we have found Sn and Fe to give surprisingly small amounts. This is in agreement with what is to be expected, for it is clear, on consideration of the argument already given, that the greater the B ray absorption of a substance in proportion to its density, the less “emergence” radiation should issue from it. Some observers have found Sn and Fe to possess exceptional absorbing pow- ers. We do not wish, however, to lay any stress upon these 6 last observations, some of which we may not have interpreted correctly ; but we mention them in order to show that the ine- qualities that are found to exist between the emergence radia- tions of various substances promise to be reducible to order as soon as the difficulties of interpretation have been sur- mounted. Let us now consider the cathode radiations on the front sides of the plates. Of the cathode particles set free in BU and moving at first in the direction of the y rays, a certain proportion, say p, is returned by what is beyond. These move towards the face A, and a certain number of them succeed in reaching it and emerging therefrom. In the case of the other plate the proportion returned is p’. The absorption in B'A' is the same as in BA, because the weights are the same. Comparing the two plates, stratum by stratum, we. find that the “incidence” radiation of one plate is to the ‘nci- dence radiation of the other plate as p to p'’. Now p and p' are the well-known constants of the B rays. ; When a stream of y rays is allowed to fall upon a plate the cathode radiation which issues from the place of inci- dence must be divisible into two parts. One consists of scat- tered B particles derived from the stream of such particles which was travelling with the y rays before incidence, and which was formed during the previous transit of the screens employed, solid, liquid, or gaseous. This part is scattered to an extent which depends on the atomic weight of the plate, according to the usual law of 8 particles. The other part is originated in the plate itself in the manner just described, and the amount of it is also regulated according to the 8 ray law. When, therefore, observers have measured the second- ary radiation, due to y rays, and have found a law corre- sponding to that for B rays, the reason of the correspondence has been that they really were measuring the secondary radia- tion due to B rays. Properly speaking, the secondary radia- tion, produced by y rays, or, rather, from y rays, is propor- tional to the density of the substance traversed (cf. Wigger’s table), and this is only another form of the law of absorption of y rays. The relative importance of the two parts of the incidence radiation just mentioned must depend on the circumstances of the experiment.) The researches of Kleeman (Phil. Mag., Nov., 1907) show very well how the second part, which is influenced by previous screening, modifies the effect of the (1) In a recent letter addressed by one of us to ‘‘Nature,’’ too great a preponderance was assigned to the first part under all circumstances. 7 first part, which is not so influenced, but which follows the law of B rays strictly. It is easy to show, by comparing corresponding strata at the front and back of one plate, that the incidence radia- tion should be somewhat less than p times the transmitted radiation. Somewhat less, because the cathode radiation, which is turned back, is scattered and softened in the process. To sum up:—On the ether-pulse theory we ought to find perfect symmetry in the secondary radiations from the two sides of a plate. But experiment shows nothing of the kind. On the material or neutral-pair theory, the “incidence” radiations should follow the 8 ray law. This is known to be the case. The emergence radiations should not follow the B ray law, and experiment shows that they do not. If the density law held for both B and y rays, and if the y rays were homogeneous, the emergence radiations should all be equal. As already explained, experiment shows that the ob- served inequalities give promise of ready explanation, on the ground that no one of these suppositions is quite true. It is, perhaps, better not to extend the preliminary ac- count of these experiments by any lengthy discussion of the issues arising from them. Many points that invite considera- tion have been discussed already in the papers first referred to. Moreover our own further experiments are incomplete, and their full interpretation is not yet certain. We will, therefore, confine ourselves to one or two questions which seem of special interest. The X-rays resemble the y rays so closely that it is practically inconceivable that the two radiations should be essentially different. The secondary cathode radia- tions, which are set free when X-rays impinge on any mate- rial, must therefore have been part of the X-ray stream, and must start their independent existence by moving on in the line of the X-ray motion. Their velocity is much smaller than that of the secondary cathode rays due to y rays, and they are much more readily scattered. It may still remain an open guestion whether or no the X-ray stream contains ether pulses. Perhaps their existence must be supposed in order to explain the velocity experiment of Marx, and the diffraction experi- ment of Haga and Windt. Possibly they are also required in order to explain Barkla’s polarization experiments: but we do not think that the experiment described by Barkla in “Nature” (October 31, 1907). is in any way decisive. It seems proper to consider a possibility that the nega- tive particle, when it moves on in the original line of motion of the pair from which it came, retains also its original velo- city. It is a striking fact that the cathode particle, due to the y rays, has the same speed, very nearly, as the 8 particle 8 issuing from the original radioactive material. And it looks quite unlike a coincidence that similar comparisons can be made in the case of the X-rays. The secondary cathode radia- tions due to these rays have velocities which, at the least, are of the same order as the velocities of the cathode particles in the X-ray bulb. If we examine the table given by Innes (Proc. Roy. Soc., Aug. 2, 1907, p. 461), and if we may be allowed to adopt an interpretation differing somewhat from the author’s, but more natural, it seems to us, in view of the conclusions of this paper, we find that the velocities of the electrons emitted by all the metals are practically the same, zinc being an exception, because it is unable to break up the hardest rays. We find that the velocities range from about 6x 10° to 75x10° for soft rays, and 6x10° to 8x10* for hard rays. Remembering that bundles of X-rays are very heterogeneous, the natural conclusion seems to be that the softest rays give the slowest speeds, and that the velocity of the secondary rays increases with the hardness of the X-rays from which they are derived.‘2) Now the hardness of the rays grows with the speed of the cathode particles in the bulb. Is it then possible that the cathode particle is first set in motion by the electromotive force in the bulb, strikes the anticathode, and picks up a positive there, becomes neutral, and is now called an X-ray, is subsequently stripped of the positive, and becomes a secondary cathode particle, the iden- tity of the negative remaining the same throughout, and its speed invariable, or nearly so? The difficulty comes in when we try to consider the part played by the mass of the positive. Probably it becomes necessary to consider it as small compared to the mass of the negative. In many ways such a supposi- tion would fit in very well. We should then understand why the positive is so hard to isolate: also a radioactive atom, in ejecting a y particle would not lose appreciably in weight. Lilienfeld believes he has found the positive electron to be less massive than the negative. (Deutsch. Phys. Gesell. Verh., 9, 7, April 15, 1907.) And, again, may not the 8 and y forms be interchange- able at times? A y particle, which had been stripped of its positive, and become a secondary cathode, or B ray, would be lost to measurement as a y ray; and we should thus have an explanation of how the y rays are “absorbed,” and why the absorption follows an exponential law. And in the same way, if a B particle picked up a positive, it would disappear from view as a B particle, it would be “absorbed.” (2) eo independent experiment, Bestelmeyer (Ann. d. Phys., xxii., p. 429, 1907) and Cooksey (Amer. Jour. of Science, Oct., 1907) arrive at the same conclusion. 9 Although we have made a few experiments with mag- netic fields, we have not yet come to any conclusions as to whether or no there are y pairs which have become loosened in the attachment of positive to negative, forming a softer and more ionizing radiation. Their existence might be suspected since there is an analogous effect in the case of X-rays; and probably they would be found more at the back of the pene- trated plate than in front of it. A few further experimental illustrations are shown dia- grammatically in Figs. 5-7, with the explanations attached. IETS 4 —— fb ES ee a 7 ae t, S76 it is (0 ba=——=--—---4 b= =-=------4 SS SSS SS SS SS SSE The upper figure shows the general arrangement. The lower figures are diagrammatic, and show the currents for different ar- rangements of the Pb and Al at the bottom of the chamber, and at the top, with the exception of the plate through which the y rays enter. Inverting the top plates makes little difference where the upper of the two plates at the bottom is Al, but an appreciable difference when it is Pb, because in the latter case a good deal of secondary radiation is thrown upwards by the Pb, and there is a tertiary from the top plate. The same, when the conical opening is completely filled by a Pb stopper :— 12°6 12°6 Waa 18°3 The differences show the effects of those rays only which do not pass through the Pb stopper :— . 27-7 28-7 39°9 44-7 These show the effect of inverting that portion only of the top plate Jhe Same, unth Pb spp where the y rays enter. oe ey -_ Three Pb plates =-55 em., Al plate =—-16 cm. Shel fa 2 Fig. 6. 10 Cast a: say ere ieicwe, erat as es3 — — (24-2! {2¢3} 132 | 1314, brs fs] [ee S38 eacae : iakce ue loses — =o Has Fig. 7. The upper figure shows the general arrangement. The wall of the cylindrical vessel was of brass; a Pb or an Al lining could be inserted as shown. The lower figures are diagrammatic, and show the currents for different arrangements of Pb and Al at top, bottom, and sides. Inversion of the plates, through which the y rays pass into the chamber, makes little difference; but there is a great alteration if the ‘material is changed on which the y rays ‘fall, or the emergence radiation from the top_ plate. The base is of less importance than in fig. 5; but the sides of more importance. This should clearly be so, for geometrical rea- sons. When the conical opening was filled by a Pb stopper, the -eurrents were all reduced considerably, but retained the same proportions pretty nearly. On the other hand, when a small pencil of 8 rays was ad- mitted through a hole in the centre of the top plate, a change of the material of the bottom became more effective, and of the sides less effective than before; but this difference became smaller when thin Al sheets were so placed as to scatter the 8 rays on their entry into the chamber. In conclusion, we should like to add that Wigger was the first, so far as we know, to show clearly that the secondary radiation of Al, on the far side of the plate, might be greater than that of Pb. A comparison of the emergence radiations of different metals was made by Dawes (Phys. Rev., xx., p. 182), who showed that they did not follow the law of the incidence radiations. The same effect was indicated in the experiments of Eve (Phil. Mag., Dec., 1904). We have little doubt that the interesting experiment of Mackenzie (Phil. Mag., July, 1907) is to be explained on the lines indicated in this paper. In fact, it is clear that this is the case in a broad sense; but it is difficult to give a complete explanation until the laws are so completely worked out that they can be applied to the interpretation of experiments, which are really very compli- cated, although at first sight they may seem to be simple. val DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF ORCHID. By R. 8. Rocrrs, M.A., M.D. [Read November 5, 1907.] Prasophyllum occidentale, sp. nov. Plant.—A somewhat dwarfed species, varying from 5 to 8 in. in height; the fistula in the sheath placed high up, sometimes immediately below the spike. Leaf-lamina greatly exceeding the spike, extending in my smallest specimen 43 in. beyond the fistula, and in my tallest 6 in. beyond this point. The spike not crowded, consisting of from ten to fourteen green flowers. Flowers.—Lateral sepals about 3 lines long, slightly bi- dentate, united except in their distal fourth. Dorsal sepal somewhat shorter (24 lines), erect, acuminate, concave. Late- ral petals narrow-lanceolate, very slightly shorter than dorsal sepal. Labellum.—Sessile, about 2 lines long, reflexed about the middle, tip acuminate: membranous portion fairly wide and slightly crenulated, callous part continues a short distance beyond the bend ; does not protrude Pees the free tips of sepals. Column.—Middle lobe quadrangular. Lateral appen- dages about same height as rostellum; unequally lobed, the smaller one being given off about middle of appendage. Stig- matic plate speckled in my specimens. I found this orchid growing close to the shore at Streaky Bay on September 26, 1907. Only four specimens were col- lected, and three of these were seeding, so that it should be looked for at the beginning of the month. It bears a superficial resemblance to the Western Aus- tralian form, P. macrostachyum, from which, however, it may be distinguished by its relatively long and narrow petals, by the extent to which its lateral sepals cohere, and by the great length of its leaf-lamina. There is no recorded member of the genus in this State with which it is likely to be confused, unless it be P. fuscum. In this species the lateral sepals are free, whereas in the new form they are connate, a feature which at once makes the diagnosis easy. 12 THE IONIZATION REMAINING IN GASES AFTER REMOVAL FROM THE INFLUENCE OF THE IONIZING AGENT. By J. P. V. Mapsegn, D.Sc., B.E. |Read April 7, 1908. | INTRODUCTION. Jn a paper by Professor Bragg and Mr. Kleeman,” a theory of initial recombination was advanced to explain the cause of the lack of saturation in gases exposed to the action of the a particles of radium. The effect was found to be due to the immediate action between a parent molecule and the electron which was ejected from it as a result of the lonizing influence of the a particle. It was shown that it was easy to reconcile with this theory the result of an experiment described by Professor Rutherford,'?) which suggested that it is easier to obtain the saturation current in a gas when the gas is quickly removed from the influence of the ionizing agent before testing. Rutherford’s experiment would, of course, indicate that the process of initial recombination would be completed in a very short time after a molecule had been ionized. However, as explained in a later paper by Professor Bragg,‘%) it was not essential to the theory of initial recom- bination that the process should be completed within any set time, in which case many important considerations would result. The author undertook the repetition of Rutherford’s ex- periment, and the non-success of some preliminary attempts led to the further suggestion that for a certain length of time it was conceivable that the positive and negative ions might remain in a state of incomplete combination, their final re- combination being precipitated by some change of conditions. The existence of such partially combined pairs of ions would help to explain much of the mechanism of phosphorescence, and would appear to have some connection with the clusters described by J. B. B. Burke,‘ which were the product of ionization, and gave rise under some conditions to phosphor- escent glow, contained energy, and yet were not electrified. (1) Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xxix., 1905. (2) Phil. Mag., vol. 47, p. 158. (3) Phil, Mag., May, 1906. (4) Phil. Mag., vol. i., p. 342, 1901. 13 Again, in some experiments described by C. D. Child ® upon the are through mercury vapour, clusters very similar in nature to those described by Burke are met with, and their behaviour was only explained on the hypothesis that recom- binations between positive and negative ions were not always complete or stable, and that the clusters so formed were, under suitable conditions, readily broken up, giving rise to ionization. It may not be out’ of place at this point to remark that the nucleus of such clusters might possibly be formed either by the partial recombination of a positive and a negative ion which have each had time to become attached to neutral molecules of the gas or by the immediate partial recombina- tion of a parent molecule and the electron ejected from it by the process of ionization. Just as this paper was near completion the results of an investigation by Von Erich Barkow ‘ came to hand, in which the existence of neutral pairs of ions, evidently produced in the former manner, offers a ready explanation of the effects observed. It was, however, more with the idea of finding out whether a cluster is formed in the latter way that the work of this present paper was carried out. When two oppositely charged ions, approaching each other, are at. a distance apart “7” (in the present case ‘‘r’’ is of the order of the molecular free path). the particles will revolve in closed orbits around each other. if the kinetic energy due to their relative motion is less than 2 < (e being the charge on an ion). An electrical field will tend to disturb this motion, and it is one of the purposes of the present paper to decide whether some such state of semi- combination can persist for an appreciable time, and a separ- ation of the ion be eventually effected by an electrical field, or by a field conjointly with other causes. Returning to the experiment described by Rutherford, little detail information is given in regard to the apparatus used. It is stated that instead of measuring the current. with the uranium oxide covering one electrode, the air which had passed over the uranium was forced between two concentric cylinders between which the electromotive force was acting. It seemed probable that. the apparatus described by him earlier in the same paper (p. 144) had been used, in which air, after passing through cotton wool and over the uranium surface, was forced through a wire gauze, and then between (5) Phys. Rev., vol. xxii., pp. 221-231, April, 1906. (6) Annalen der Physik, p. 317, No. 7, 1907. 14 two cylinders of 2°8 and 1°6 cms. diameter respectively, a potential difference of 32 volts between the cylinders being found sufficient to completely remove all the ions from the gas. The distance of the gauze from the central electrode and the size of gauze used are not definitely stated. It will be To Elechrometer Sulphur 70 Earth a] To Cells jor Uranium : [bearer ' Fig. l. shown in the present paper that the form of the saturation curve obtained in such an apparatus depends largely upon these two latter factors, as well as upon the potential differ- ence between the cylinders, and also their size. In attacking the question of the ionization in gases after their removal from the action of the ionizing agent, two direct — - methods suggest themselves. In the first place, ionized gas may, as in Rutherford’s experiment, be blown into a chamber in which the ions are to be collected by an electric field. In this case care must be taken to enable the ions to be passed rapidly into a uniform electric field, so as not to subject them at first to a weaker field. To pass the ionized gas through a fine gauze as Ruther- ford did would appear the most convenient method to adopt in such a case, although, as will be shown later, it by no means, in all cases, approaches the ideal condition. In the second method, the ionizing agent may be allowed to act upon the gas which is enclosed in a suitable ionization chamber, and then either the chamber or, what is usually more convenient, the ionizing agent may be removed before the electromotive force is applied between the electrodes. Both these methods have been used in the present in- vestigation. Since the shape of the ionization curve obtained in the presence of the ionizing agent is found ‘7 to depend upon the effects of both general and initial recombination, it is import- ant, no matter which of the above methods is used, in com- paring the saturation curves with and without the presence of the ionizing agent, to eliminate the effects of general re- combination. Also, diffusion of the ions to conducting sur- faces would produce many of the effects which one might ex- pect to be shown by clusters which could be separated by a sufficiently intense field. § 1. Tue ACTION OF GAUZES. The first experiments were carried out with an apparatus as shown in fig. 1. Air was used in these experiments, and after passing through a plug of cotton wool was drawn by a water-pump, with suitable pressure regulator, at a speed of 10 cms. per second, over the surface of uranium oxide. Thence it passed through a gauze and between two cylindrical electrodes of 2 cms. and 4 cms. diameter respectively. The outer electrode was connected to a set of small accumulators, the other terminal of the cells being connected to earth. The central electrode was 10 cms. in length, and was supported in a sulphur plug, which in turn was protected by an earthed ring. By suitable keys the central electrode could be con- nected either to the electrometer or to earth. A Thompson Quadrant Electrometer was used, giving a deflection of 75 scale divisions per volt. 15 (7) Bragg and Kleeman, Trans. Roy. Soc., S.A., vol. xxix., 1905. 16 As a similar form of apparatus has been frequently em- ployed where the introduction of a gauze suggested a ready means of localizing the field which was to be used for collect- ing the ions which were blown along a tube—as, for example, in the experiments of Townsend ‘) upon diffusion of ions and (9) in experiments upon the ions which are produced from flames, etc.—it is of some additional interest to know what effects may arise from the introduction of such a gauze. A short account will therefore be given of some preliminary ex- bd gee Iiroaln a ahi Sd [Boe teppei === — foe bi 7m i ad eine re ed 4 em Peer eb ed to Tbe tale EN et aNTZERAM Basa Sh eNRaNSSREea bal EAA pyceee uc d peer een 120 00 U0 Ni, WD 0 Figs. 2 and 3. ee periments in which the size and nature of the gauze and the distance between the central electrode and the gauze were varied. The curves, fig. 2, show the results of experiments with a brass gauze having 40 strands to the inch, two sets of wires being interlaced at right angles to each other, each wire (8) Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., excil., A 1900, pp. 129-158. (9) Langevin and Block, Comptes Rendus, cxxxix., 1904, p. 792. being of “0065 inches diameter. The curves (A+), (B+), (C+), show the relation between the potential difference of the electrodes, and the corresponding electrometer deflections r 0°5 minute for distances of 7, 14, and 28 mm. between the gauze and the flat end of the central cylindrical electrode, the gauze being positive to the central electrode. The curves (4 —), (B-), (C—), are corresponding curves obtained when the gauze was negative. Fig. 3 shows similar curves using a brass guaze with 20 strands to the inch, each wire being -010 in. in diameter. 17 TABLE A. Diameter of Deflection for 400 volts. Wires, in. Deflection for 50 volts. Material. Strands per in. mrass yx tic. - 20 ‘010 14 Brassx ... 11 “0185 i-D5 irassx ... 14 “O15 1-33 Brass~x _... 40 “007 he Iron x ius 14 013 1:25 Iron x ad 21 ‘016 1°34 Galv. Iron x 14 -0135 £26 Copper || ... 16 013 1:14 Copper || ... 32 013 1°5 x Represents crossed wire-mesh gauzes. || Represents parallel wire gauzes. A large number of other gauzes were similarly tested, in- cluding some which were built in the form of grids, with one set only of straight wires arranged parallel to each other. As figs. 2 and 3 are, however, typical, the results obtained with some of the other gauzes are given in Table A in terms of the deflections per 0°5 minute at potential differences of 400 and 50 volts respectively between the cylinders with the central electrode in all cases 28 mm. from the gauze. The state of the surface of the gauze was found to have little effect, even when the gauze was wetted, and in the case of iron allowed to rust slightly. At intervals during each set of experiments the draught was stopped and a reading taken of the amount of ionization which entered the chamber independently of the draught. No special precautions were taken to dry the air, and on one or two occasions the amount of ionization produced by the uranium showed changes which were apparently due to slight dampness of the uranium surface. This accounted for the reduction in the amount of ionization which was observed on such occasions, as the path of the a particles through the gas would be slightly reduced. it will be observed in both figs. 2 and 3 that there is no very close approach to saturation, although the approach is 18 much closer in fig. 3 than in fig. 2, even when large poten- tial differences are applied between the electrodes. The re- sults with the gauze positive are in all cases larger than with the gauze negative. Also, the number of ions reaching the central electrode in a given time decreases for any given value of potential difference between the cylinders, as the distance eune cay | iss) Se Ae hes ee ee er en | Mercury trap Mey from Centre Gauze to : Llectrometer. A Sulphur P. Top Gauze | GY Middle. . die co ee - 4 # Bottom. between the gauze and the end of the central electrode is in- creased. When, therefore, even very large potential differ- ences are maintained between the electrodes, the number of ions which reach the central electrode in a given time may give a very false measurement of the number of ions which actually reach the gauze in that time. 19 It appears from the curves that it is the strength of field in the immediate neighbourhood of the gauze and not so much the actual difference of potential between the inner and outer cylinders that. determines the number of ions received by the central electrode. As in the experiments so far de- scribed, this field was by no means uniform, it was decided to re-design the apparatus so as to provide for this condition. An apparatus as shown in fig. 4 was constructed, hav- ing three gauzes set parallel to each other with their planes at right angles to the axis of the tube. The central gauze, to which the electrometer was connected, consisted of a brass gauze with 20 strands to the inch, each wire being ‘01 in. in diameter, soldered to a thin metal ring and carefully at- tached to a ring of sulphur in such a way as to allow the air to pass only through the gauze. Earthed metal rings, as shown in the diagram, were found necessary to protect the sulphur from the direct influence of the high-potential plates. On each side of this middle gauze were arranged gauzes which could be easily replaced, and so that their distance from the middle gauze could be varied. In the first set of experiments these gauzes were of brass with 40 strands to the inch, the distance between the top and middle gauzes being 65 mm., that between the bottom and middle gauzes 75 mm. In fig. 5, curve (A —), is shown the effect of varying the potential applied to the top gauze, always, however, keeping 20 it negative, while maintaining the bottom gauze at a nega- tive potential of 41 volts. A draught of 10 cms. per second was maintained as in the earlier experiments. It will be seen from the curve, that with 50 volts applied to the top gauze, a much larger current passes to the middle electrode than when the top gauze is connected to earth; but that fur- ther increases in the potential of the top gauze cause very little further increase in the current. Curve (4+), in the same figure, shows how the current varies when the bottom gauze is still maintained at a potential of —41 volts, but with the potential of the top gauze varied through a range of positive values. With the bottom gauze at —41 volts, and the top gauze at +500, practically no current passed to the middle electrode—that is to say, a large number of negative ions which would otherwise be drawn to the middle elec- trode are now completely dragged through it. Similar re. sults occurred when the bottom gauze was maintained at a positive potential of 41 volts, the greatest diminution in the current to the middle gauze being observed when the top gauze was made negative. To prevent any interaction of the two fields above and below the middle screen, the gauze was replaced by a screen consisting of two gauzes, similar to the first, set parallel to each other and at a distance apart equal to 2 mm. Curves (B—) and (B+), fig. 5, were then obtained by following out the procedure described in the previous test, from which the curves (A —) and (4+) were derived. The same type of re- sult is obtained, but greatly reduced. Single gauzes with finer mesh produced much the same effect as the double gauze. It appears from these results that when the wider single gauze is used for the central electrode, some of the ions which it should apparently stop are blown completely through it, and more the wider the gauze; but that these are collected by the gauze when the field in the top chamber drives them with sufficient force against the draught. If, then, the top gauze be of the same sign as the bottom gauze, any field in the top chamber greater than about 100 volts per cm. ensures practically all the ions being caught by the middle electrode. In subsequent experiments the top chamber was always so arranged, and the screen of two gauzes was used as the central electrode. The strength of field in the lower chamber was varied and corresponding currents measured. Curves were obtained for depths of bottom chamber, 75 mm., 11°55 mm., and 235 mm., respectively. The capacity was determined by an auxil- lary condenser in each case, and after correcting the read- 21 ings for the slight alterations in capacity produced by the change in position of the gauzes, the curves for the different width chambers were found to practically coincide for all except very weak fields. When, therefore, the bottom gauze is negative, we may conclude that for fields stronger than 50 volts per cm. very few, if any, positive ions penetrate far into the bottom cham- ber through the lower gauze; otherwise, effects due to recombination in that chamber should have been observed clearly when the depth of the lower chamber was varied. The smaller values of current, obtained when the bottom gauze was negative and the top positive, were due to the action of the field in the top chamber, more particularly its arrangement in the immediate vicinity of the wires of the middle gauze. per Leer meee | 2 aie lee i he = on of Saal mes 016 in. diam oe ee 16. 28 52.4.0 wires pe lotted line Curves - ee Brass Wire Gauzes Bro.’ : Sanh rands per Wires ‘O10 in did 0065- » “a ; Bees abe Bek Asee tt ai see ISza aa B50 16 . . - 0065. + ' soo . 700 volls Fig. 6. In fig. 6 are shown the results obtained with different gauzes for the bottom electrode, and varying fields applied to the lower chamber; the field in the top chamber being maintained, in all experiments, at 100 volts per cm., arranged in such a direction as to prevent the escape of the ions through the middle gauze. The depth of the lower chamber was 11 mm.; the dotted curves are for bottom gauzes of crossed strands of 50, 40, and 20 meshes to the inch re- | spectively. The full line curves are for bottom gauzes made of copper-wire ‘016 in. in diameter, set parallel, and equi- 22 distant from each other, and of 8, 16, 24, 32, and 40 wires to the inch respectively. The crossed gauzes give results falling very well into line with those from the paralled wire grid, in which the smaller the mesh the harder it was to obtain saturation. It is not- able that with all the intermediate gauzes an approach is shown to the same value of maximum current as the field strength is increased. With very fine gauzes very intense fields would seem necessary to drag all the ions through the gauze, while with gauzes much broader than about 16 to the inch ions are apparently readily drawn from distances considerably below the gauze. All the curves given were obtained from results of ex- periments in which the bottom gauze was positive. When it is made negative, and the top gauze also negative, very little difference is found in curves for strong fields; with weak fields the values obtained with the gauze positive are as a rule slightly higher than with the gauze negative. Of numerous gauzes tested, the 20 to the inch crossed brass gauze, with diameter of strand ‘01 in., gave the nearest approach to an early saturation, and was used in subsequent experiments. Rutherford, in his paper already referred to, has shown that gauzes exert a large influence in discharging ions from gas blown through them ; he finds that the effect depends, ap- parently, upon the ratio of the space occupied by the air between the meshes, and the extent of metal in the gauze. As, however, his experiments were performed with a field acting upon one side of the gauze, it seemed necessary to repeat the experiments with no field acting on the gauze, as from the experiments described above it would seem that under this condition the discharging power of the gauze should be even greater than as determined by Rutherford. The experiment was arranged so that gauzes could be set parallel to and ‘5 cm. below the bottom gauze of the chamber used in the previous experiments. A field of 300 volts per cm. was applied to the lower side of the electro- meter gauze and 100 volts per cm. above it, thus preventing ions from escaping through the electrometer gauze. Read- ings of the current were taken with and without the gauze which was to be tested, in position. The ratio of these two readings was taken as a measure of the discharging power of the gauze. In fig. 7 are plotted the results for parallel grids cor- responding to Table B. There appears a certain value of 23 the ratio—air to metal surface—below which the discharg- ing power rises very rapidly. This effect is similar to that which would result from considering the gauze as a limiting TaBLeE B. Discharging Powers of Gauzes. ‘ Diam. of Distance Air. : 5 Material. aidan Wires, in between Wires, = Ta een i pies inches. in inches, Metal. i Copper || ... 8 ‘016 °127 8:0 thal Copper || ... 16 ‘016 050 3:2 13 Copper || ... 24 ‘016 ‘027 shag d 175 Copper || ... 32 ‘016 ‘016 10 3'0 Copper || ... 40 016 ‘010 6 12°0 Copper || ... 16 ‘013 054 38 125 Copper || ... 32 013 ‘020 14 2°12 meee... LL °0185 "072 10 1°35 Brassx ... 15 *0155 °051 10 15 lron x OS We: 013 ‘058 13 15 lron x err ‘010 ‘05 2°6 1°45 lron x ala. he ‘013 ‘046 118 18 lron x antes DN) ‘018 032 ay 27 Brassx ... .20 i ‘04 E2 1°65 rae. 6... «25 ‘0095 ‘03 BY 2°5 Tron x A535 26 0245 0245 6 3°85 Brassx ... 40 ‘007 ‘018 4d , 5°45 Copper x ... 120 0025 ‘037 iz 49°0 x Represents crossed mesh gauzes. || Represents parallel wire grids. 24 case of a set of parallel tubes of small diameter as used by Townsend in his experiment upon the diffusion of ions. Comparing these results with those of fig. 6, it is seen that, taking for comparison the brass gauze of 40 meshes per inch, each wire, ‘007 in. diameter, and the brass gauze of 20 meshes per inch, each wire ‘010 in. diameter; although their discharging powers are as 5°45 to 1°65, nevertheless with a field of 700 volts per cm., applied to their upper sur- faces, exactly the same number of ions are drawn through each. Again, twice the number of ions are drawn through the parallel wire gauze having 24 strands to the inch, as through the similar wire gauze having 40 strands per inch— when a field of about 1,060 volts to the cm. is applied in each case—although their discharging powers are respectively 1°75 and 12. § 2. Returning to the result shown in fig. 5. It has so far been assumed that the effects observed were due solely to the intensity and distribution of the field around the wires of the middle electrode. A question, however, suggests itself as to whether the whole, or only part, of the diminution in cur- rent which is observed when the fields on either side of the middle gauze are in the same direction is due to the with- drawal of ions from the lower chamber; for when the two fields are opposed in direction no ions cross the top chamber, while when the fields are in the same direction, some appa- rently do cross it. It seemed conceivable that there still might be something akin to partially combined sets of ions which, although un- affected by the weaker fieid of the lower chamber, produced ionization in the top chamber under the influence, not merely of an intense field, but as the result of ions moving in an intense field, through clusters such as have been already sug- gested. This would also explain the lack of saturation shown in the curves of fig. 6. An experiment was performed in an independent appa- ratus. Two ionization chambers, provided with aluminium windows, through which Rontgen rays could pass, were bal- anced electrically against each other. Through the one was drawn air which had been just previously subjected to the influence of either radium or uranium, the ionization having been subsequently removed by a weak field; through the other chamber a supply of air was drawn at the same speed. No alteration in the balance could be observed. Again, a ring of copper-wire was made active by exposure to thorium emanation, and placed on the upper surface of the 25 middle gauze. Readings were taken—/a) With the copper ring active, and air which had previously passed over the uranium surface drawn through the chamber. (/) With the ring active, but the uranium removed, and still using the draught. (c) With air passed over the uranium surface after the activity of the ring had disappeared. The results showed that the amount of ionization produced by the copper ring in air was the same as in the air which had just pre- viously passed under the influence of uranium. Again, had the want of saturation, shown in the curves of fig. 6, been due to the presence of clusters, or partially com- bined pairs of ions, an alteration of the shape of these curves might have been, expected if the number of ions was reduced without altering the number of clusters. No alteration in the shape of the curves could, however, be detected when. the uranium was moved some distance further from the gauze, or even when the ionization was still further reduced by plac- ing along the axis of the tube leading to the gauze a wire maintained at a few volts difference of potential from its surroundings. Recently a paper by M. de Broglie ‘°) has appeared, in which tests similar to those just described have been pevr- formed upon the gases coming from flames. His results are in agreement with the foregoing in so far that no clusters are found when water vapour is not present. Having found no support to the cluster theory, we must look to diffusion for an explanation of the _ curves in fig. 6. The distortion of the field in the imme- diate neighbourhood of the wires of the middle gauze and its penetration through the wider gauzes have accounted for the results shown in fig. 5. The came cause, in gradually pre- venting diffusion of the ions to the lower side of the bottom gauze, will explain the difference in shape of the ionization curves obtained with broad- and with narrow-mesh gauzes, also the approach, in many cases, to the same final value of current, as the field strength is increased. One difficulty which arises in the foregoing explanation is that while the field exerts its influence through the air spaces of the bottom gauze, if the gauze be positively electri- fied, negative ions will, of course, be more readily drawn to the lower surfaces and sides of the wires of the gauze than if the gauze were uncharged; and positive ions should, appa- rently, be similarly repelled with a force which depends upon the strength of the field. Now, it is known “9 that when a (Ga) Le Radium, tome iv., No. 7, July, 1907. (10) J. J. Thomson, Elements of Electricity and Magnetism. 26 positively charged body of small size is brought very close to a body of much larger dimensions similarly charged, the repulsion which normally exists reduces in value to zero and changes to an attraction when the small charged body is brought within a certain critical: distance of the surface, this distance depending upon the charges on the small body and the surface, respectively, and on the curvature of the surfaces. This seems to offer the explanation of the marked difference which exists in the shapes of the ionization curves obtained with broad- and with narrow-mesh gauze, as the field strength is varied; for in the case considered positive ions are blown by the current of air against the lower gauze surface, which is but weakly electrified when the field in the chamber above is weak. As the field in the chamber is increased the fringe, which passes through the gauze, is strengthened, and the force which is exerted upon the positive ions by the draught is not sufficient to bring them to within the critical distance of the lower surface of the gauze to cause attraction. As the positive ions in air are larger and more massive than the negative, it is to be expected, when the lower gauze is nega- tive, that for a given field in the chamber above, less negative ions would be received by the electrometer gauze than in the corresponding case where the bottom gauze is positive. This, we have seen, does occur when the field is weak. Since, when a strong enough field is applied, the same maximum value of current is obtained, whether the bottom gauze be positive or negative, and also for a large range of gauzes exposing very different amounts of surface, the most natural conclusion is that under such circumstances all the ions of one sign which reach the lower surface of the gauze are drawn through the gauze without loss in number and are then collected by the central electrode. § 3. It has been shown by Bragg and Kleeman that the lack of saturation in a mixture of air and ethyl-chloride is con- siderably greater than for air. Their theory of initial re- combination explains this difference, and one of the objects in view at the commencement of the present experiment was to decide whether such an effect: persisted for a time after the act of ionization by an a particle had been completed. As the results so far obtained show the difficulty there exists in eliminating the effects of diffusion when the ions are blown through gauzes, a comparative test between the behaviour of such a vapour as ethyl-chloride and air seemed as much as could at the time be safely derived. It was arranged to pass a mixture of ethyl-chloride with — a small proportion of air from one gasometer through the — a 2 gauze chambers which have been described in fig. 4 to a second gasometer. A gauze was inserted, and enabled the draught to be carefully adjusted during each observation. Readings were taken with the lower gauze at potentials of 50 and 600 volts respectively. The depth of the chamber was 11 mm. The mean value of the ratio of the readings with the fields of 555 volts per cm. and 45 volts per cm. was found to be the same for the mixture of ethyl-chloride and air as it was for air only, its value being 1°05. Nitrous oxide was similarly tested, and gave a similar result. The velocity of the gas through the chamber was, in these experi- ments, about 5 cm. per second. The uranium was 5 cm. below the bottom gauze, so that approximately two seconds elapsed before the products of ionization from the centre of the uranium cylinder reached the gauze. Change in velocity of the draught was found to have no appreciable effect upon the result. The experiment indicates that air, ethyl-chloride, and nitrous oxide, although giving distinctly different ioniza- tion curves when the ionization is measured in the presence and during the influence of the ionizing agent, show no difference in behaviour from each other when the ionization is collected from them after their removal for a period of two seconds or more from the influence of the ionizing agent. § 4. It was now deemed advisable to make use of the second method of experiment, as mentioned in the introduction. The general arrangement of the experiment was such as to allow the a radiation from radium to act for some little time upon the gas to be experimented upon, this being en- closed in a suitable ionization-chamber, and both electrodes meanwhile being connected to earth. A lead screen was quickly interposed between the radium and the chamber ;: the electrometer electrode was simultaneously disconnected from earth, and a strong field immediately applied between the electrodes. The field was left on for a time, sufficient to en- sure all the ions to reach the electrodes. It was then re- moved, and the charge, which had been collected on the in- sulated electrode, was measured by a quadrant electrometer. The radium bromide was held in a small metal cup placed at A (fig. 8) some little distance below the floor of the ioni- zation-chamber B. This chamber consisted of a brass case connected to earth; in its floor was cut a circular opening of 12 cm. diameter. The hole was covered by a thin sheet of mica, Ff, which rendered the case gas-tight, but was thin enough to enable the a radiation to penetrate between the 28 E L2 F/ ea Li Ky St aE ‘ a aE ewe Fig. 8: electrodes. For introducing gas to the chamber a metal plug was provided, which could be screwed into the opening be- low the mica, and while air was being exhausted from the chamber a small screw, operated from the outside, enabled a by-pass to be opened between the space on either side of the mica sheet. The lower electrode, C’, consisted of a brass gauze insulated from the case, attachment to it being made from the outside by an insulated wire. The upper electrode, D, consisted of a brass plate 8 cm. diameter, supported by a rod passing through sulphur insulation and being connected to one set of plates of a sliding condenser as in the experi- ments of Langevin.@D An aluminium semaphore, G, enabled the a rays to be entirely shut off, when necessary, during the swing of the pen- dulum without reducing to any great extent the 8 and y radia- tion which entered the chamber. A plate of lead, 7, about 2 mm. thick, attached to the pendulum, was arranged so as to swing between the radium and the opening in the ioni- zation-chamber. In this lead plate was cut a hole 1°5 cm. square, and the amplitude of swing was such that the a rays (1) Ann. de Chim. and Phys., 7me ser., tome '28-39, 1908. 29 could pass into the chamber only for a short period during the motion of the pendulum. The pendulum at the same time operated a contact A’, by means of the pin /,, and this operation connected the electrode, (’, to a high potential de- rived from the small accumulator cells, 7', joined in series with a high resistance, #. Prior to the movement of the pendulum these cells were connected to earth through the key, A,. A second pin, L,, attached to the pendulum, oper- ated another key in such a way as to complete an auxiliary circuit which released a second pendulum at a definite in- stant. This second pendulum, after an interval of 1.25 sec., operated a second relay, which connected the electrode, UC’, to earth by means of the key, A,. The pins, 1, and L,, could be set in any position upon the pendulum, and by this means the field between the elec- trodes, ( and JD, could be applied at any definite instant during the swing of the pendulum, and removed after always the same lapse of time, viz., 1.25 sec. With the range of field strength employed, this time was sufficient to allow for the collection of all the ions which had been produced by the a particles crossing the chamber. The distance between the electrodes, ( and D, was ad- justable. To make the effects of ordinary recombination small it was advisable to keep the distance between C and D small, but as this decreased the volume of gas which could be ion- ized, it was found necessary to work with a distance between the electrodes of 1°8 cm. To perform an experiment, the pendulum, having been drawn to one side and held by means of a catch, the lead plate, //, was set so as to screen the chamber from the radium, the keys, K, K,, K,, being closed, make contact to earth, the key K,, being left open. The second pendulum was drawn aside and held in position by a clutch. The condenser was closed. By means of electromagnets the main pendulum is released, and at the same time the key K raised. The pin, L, is set so that the gauze, (’, is not electrified until the lead screen, 7, again shuts off the radium; Z, and L, then strike their keys respectively at the same instant; C is thus electri- fied, and the second pendulum set swinging. The first pen- dulum is caught at the end of its swing. When the second pendulum has accomplished its swing it causes the key, K,, to be closed, and the gauze ( is thereby connected to earth. A constant interval of 4 sec. was now allowed before opening the condenser, S—this for each reading—and at the end of that time the electrometer was disconnected from earth by K, and the key, K, closed. The charge communica- ted to the electrometer was measured in terms of the first and 30 second swings by the formula deduced by Langevin, Le., e} Hear i oS where 6 is the charge communicated to the electro- iselnlh see e and e' are the first and second swings, and m a factor which in this case had a value of ‘65. Even with the sliding condenser it was not possible to eliminate small effects due to rise of potential in the system, ), when the gauze, CU, was electrified. To make sure that this effect as well as leakage was eliminated by subtracting readings with the semaphore on and off a separate experiment was performed. The pin, L, was set so that the field was on all the time the chamber was exposed to the a radiations. Results of experiments with the semaphore on and off were subtracted. The curve obtained showed close agreement with that obtained with the pendu- lum removed (and the saturation curve obtained in the ordi- nary manner) and formed a valuable check upon the relia- bility of the whole apparatus. In this form of experiment ordinary recombination is not eliminated, and to allow for it we must consider the ar-— rangement of the ions in the chamber, as they cross it under the influence of the field. As shown by Langevin, if in the first place the ions be assumed to be uniformly distributed | jh seifn di akd ine ae eileen hl lec eke Cet eee ene pall coli [ht dad olf dita lod anal cole [adel ba Volts per ci. and the velocity of the positive and negative be v cm. per sec. under unit P.D. (per. cm.), the time taken for an ion to move across the chamber from electrode to lagiiora ee where L v is the distance between electrodes. If time be reckoned from the instant the field is applied, after an interval of time a recombination will have ceased. The number of ions lost 31 v by recombination in crossing the chamber will be a | Ln? at where ¥ is the density of the ions in the space of length, /, at a time, ¢/, trom the start: Zz, . ° ae vy \ 2 Nat «| (Z — 2vt) (yea) dt = NL =) =< log, (1 + “5 ) Hence a curve can be plotted as in fig. 9, showing the rela- tion between field strength and the number of ions which reach the electrode starting with a given initial density. In fig. 9 the full line curve is drawn according to the formula which has just been deduced, the value of V being determined in the usual way from a knowledge of the value of the saturation current, the capacity of the system, and the dimensions of the ionization chamber. The value of the was 5°10° ions per cub. cm. The circles show the results of experiments upon air, and it will be seen that they fall very nearly upon the theoretically determined curve, show- ing that ordinary recombination is sufficient to account for the observed effects. However, it is necessary to show that the effect due to initial recombination was large enough to be detected had it been present. Using for comparison currents at field strengths of 390 and 80 volts per cm., it will be seen from the curves given by Bragg and Kleeman, in their paper upon “Initial Re- combination,” that between these values of field strength a very considerable percentage of initial recombination is observable when the ions are collected in the presence of the ionizing agent; but the exact amount depends upon the speed of the a particles producing the ionization. By re- moving the pendulum and obtaining saturation curves in the ordinary manner with the apparatus used in the fore- going, it was found that after allowing for the effect of ordinary recombination there remained between these values of field strength a rise of about 5 per cent., due to the effects of initial recombination. This amount was such as could have been readily detected in the pendulum experiments. As the time which elapsed between the stopping of the action of the ionizing agent and applying the field in these experiments was 1-20th sec., it appears then that no evi- dence can be obtained from the experiments of the non-com- pletion of the act of initial recombination in air within a period of 1-20th sec. after the act of ionization. 32 Similar experiments were next performed upon ethyl- chloride. The experimental results are shown on the dotted diagram by (0); again it is seen that ordinary recombination accounts for the results. By a separate set of experiments, as previously de- scribed, it was found that between the values of field strength 390 and 80 volts per cm. a rise of 9 per cent. was to be expected from the pendulum experiments in the case of ethyl- chloride, if the effects of initial recombination had been pre- sent. This, again, was of such a magnitude that it should have been readily detected. In the cases, therefore, of air and ethyl-chloride, which both show large effects due to initial recombination when the ions are collected by a field during the action of the lonizing agent, no such effect can be observed when the field is applied as soon as 1-20th sec. after the act of ionization is performed; the act of initial recombination being fully completed within this period. § 5. Having now shown that effects of initial recombination do vot last an appreciable time, it seemed possible, by means of the apparatus described in fig. 4, to obtain an in- dependent verification of the theory of initial recombination. For since the arrangement of the gauze in that apparatus made it possible to obtain a measure of the number of ions which reach the lower gauze in any given time, it was to be expected, if the ionizing agent were placed, first, above the lower gauze, and directly in the ionization chamber; and, secondly, just below that gauze, with a current of gas carrying the ions into the chamber ; that, after making proper allowances for the effect of ordinary recombination in the latter case, the current obtained in the first case should be much greater than in the second. For the purpose of obtaining a steady draught, and at the same time to work under any pressure with different gases, the apparatus of fig. 4 was slightly modified. The tubes were placed horizontally, and the gas was circulated by means of a piston moving in a long cylinder, the ends of which communicated to corresponding tubes leading from the ionization chamber. The piston could be moved at a very uniform speed by means of a suitably geared electro-motor. The ionizing agent consisted of a small quantity of radium, enclosed in a lead cell. A V-shaped slit 1:2 cm. deep, with paral- lel faces ‘75 mm. apart, restricted the a rays to a fan-shaped space on emerging from the cell. The cell was placed so that 33 the slit was in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the ioniza- tion chamber, and a small sliding door cut in what has been so far called the lower gauze of the chamber enabled the cell to be introduced when necessary. The air was carried across the radium cell and through the ionization chamber with a velocity of 7 cm. per sec. A thin aluminium sheet, sufficient to stop all the a particles, could be moved over the slit when required, and the difference between the readings without and with this sheet over the slit gave a measure of the ionization produced by the a particles. In a particular experiment with a piece of tinfoil cover- ing the radium, equivalent to about 1°55 cm. of air at atmospheric pressure, and working under a pressure of two atmospheres, the saturation current with the radium in the ionization chamber corresponded to a deflection of 80 scale divisions in 10 sec. With the radium 8 mm. from the gauze, and with a draught of 7 cm. per sec., the current was 53 scale divisions per 10 sec. Thus the loss of ions in the first “115 sec. after the ionization was produced=34 per cent. By increasing the pressure and determining the saturation eurrent with the radium placed directly in the ionization chamber it was possible to determine the greatest density of ionization which had been produced in the previous ex- periment. An increase of pressure equivalent to a shortening of the range of the a particles by °34 mm. gave a decrease in current corresponding to 3°0 scale divisions per second. The section at the opening of the slit was ‘(08 cm. x1 cm., the capacity of the system 125 cm., and the electrometer gave a deflection of 340°0 scale divisions per volt. Thus, 4°1 x 10® ions are produced per cub. cm. per second just be- yond the slit. The greatest density produced, therefore, in the air as it is blown across the slit 1s 4°7x10° ions per cub. cm. Now, if we suppose all the ionization to be of this same density, the number of ions which will disappear by ordinary recombination in the period ‘115 sec. is 36 per cent. The actual number as found was 34 per cent.; it is, therefore, seen that to account for the 34 per cent. difference in ionization which has occurred after ‘115 sec., if we are to suppose it due entirely to ordinary recombination, a value equal to that of the maximum density must be assumed for the whole of the ionization. Now it is clear, not only from the geometry of the beam of radiation which is used, but also from the fact that the ionization proceeding from a small heap of radium bromide decreases with the dis- tance from the radium, that the density of ionization in the beam must reach values very much smaller than the maxi- 34 mum. Since the loss due to recombination depends upon the square of the density, the experiment described indicates the existence (in addition to general) of a process of initial recombination, which is completed within a very short period after the act of ionization. SUMMARY. Experiments upon ionized gas blown through gauzes are in agreement with the theory of Bragg and Kleeman, that there exists an initial recombination between a molecule ionized by a rays and the ejected electron or electrons. Two methods of experiments described show no trace of such effect when the gas is examined 1-10th—1-20th of a second after the act of ionization. Initial recombination is thus to be considered initial in respect to time. The action of gauzes, electrified or vunelectrified, upon lonized gases blown through them is to be explained by the aid of the theory of diffusion. An arrangement of gauzes as herein described allows of the removal by an electric field of all the ions of one sign from a very defined region in a tube along which the ions are carried by a current of gas. The ionization produced in air by Réntgen rays or by a wire made active by exposure to thorium emanation is the same in air which has just previously passed under the influence of uranium radiation as in air not so treated. In conclusion, I wish to express my indebtedness and sincere thanks to Professor Bragg for suggesting these ex- periments, and for much advice and help during their progress. University of Adelaide, 1907. AN EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION OF THE NATURE OF 7), RaAYS.—NO., 2. By W. H. Brace, M.A., F.R.S., Elder Professor of Mathe- matics and Physics in the University of Adelaide; and J. P. V. Mapssn, D.Sc., Lecturer on Electrical Engineering. [Read May 4, 1908: a preliminary summary was given on April 7.] In a previous paper (Trans. Roy. Soc. of 8.A., 1908, p. 1) we have given a preliminary account of an investigation of the properties of the secondary radiation due to y rays, and discussed the evidence thus afforded as to the nature of the rays. The first section of the present paper contains an ac- count of further experiments, and the second.a list of the pro- perties of the secondary radiation, derived in part from the work of other observers, and in part from our own. In the third we have tried to show that the properties are readily explained if the y-rays are supposed to be material, but are not easily to be reconciled with the ether-pulse hypothesis. § I. In the former paper we showed that on the neutral-pair hypothesis the connection between the amount of secondary B ‘radiation emitted from the front side of a plate struck by y rays and the atomic weight of the material of the plate should be approximately the same as for the 8 rays. It is, of course, known that this is actually the case. Also, we showed that the 8 radiation emitted from the other side of the plate, the side from which the y rays emerge, should be the same for all substances, provided three things were true, viz. : — (1) The y rays were homogeneous ; (2) The y rays were absorbed according to a simple den- sity law ; (3) The B rays were also absorbed according to such a law. If these laws did not hold, and to the extent to which they did not hold, the “emergence” radiation would not be the same for all substances. The experimental evidence which we submitted showed that the emergence radiation was not connected with the atomic weight of the material by the same law as that whica held for the incidence radiation and for B rays: that it was B2 36 much more nearly the same for all substances, and that such differences as existed (¢.g., carbon generally gave more than lead) appeared to be proper, in view of the conditions stated above. As the results we had obtained seemed to be sufficient to give a criterion between the material and the ether-pulse theories, we thought it right to publish the details of the work as far as we had carried it. We have now made a more thorough investigation of the nature and amount of emergence radiation. We believe that we are in a position to connect together all the effects atten- dant on the absorption of the y rays, and the consequent pro- duction of B rays, to a first approximation at least. Included in these effects are some which have come to light during this work, the neutral-pair theory having led us to their discovery. It is not a very easy thing to obtain an exact measure of the emergence radiation. When a stream of y rays is shot into an lonization-chamber through a plate forming one of the chamber walls, a very large proportion of the ionization produced is actually due to the emergence rays of the plate. But if the plate is taken away, the place of these rays is sup- pled, to a varying extent, by secondary rays, made in the air or emergent from the last substance traversed by the rays. A normal stream of y rays always contains f rays; if these are stopped by a screen, fresh 8 rays emerge from the other side of the screen. It is impossible, therefore, to measure the emergence rays by subtracting the value of the current when the above-mentioned plate is not in position from the value . when it forms part of the chamber wall. Such an operation might conceivably show a negative emergence radiation. It is, in fact, necessary to remove the B rays from the stream of y rays by some means which is more effective than a screen. A powerful magnetic field can considerably purify the y-ray stream for a short distance along the path. Owing to the action of the air, B rays will reappear again in mea- surable amount after the rays have traversed a few centi- metres ; nevertheless, we have found the method to be fairly satisfactory so far, and will doubtless be able to improve it when better information is available for the calculation of the remaining errors. The method has already been employed by G. Kucera (Bulletin International de |’Académie des Scien- ces de Bohéme, 1905), but it was finally abandoned. be- cause the magnetic lines of induction penetrated the ioniza- tion-chamber, and affected the paths of the secondary 8B rays, and therefore the magnitude of the current. We therefore placed a thick iron screen (2°5 cm.) between the magnet and the chamber; the y rays passed through a hole in the iron. 37 Reflector a Al fail Al Pail. Screens — --e-s = = ta fee This quite satisfied the purpose for which it was intended, and we were therefore provided with the means of testing the effects of a y stream fairly free from B rays. We used a magnetic field of about 2,500 units. The details and dimensions of the apparatus are shown in fig. 1. The radium was placed at the bottom of a conical hole made in a massive lead block. Plugs of various materials and different thicknesses were turned to fit exactly in the hole. The screens were brought to the position p,p by means of a sliding frame, which passed through an opening in the side wall of the ionization-chamber. This was done to avoid the necessity of opening up the cham- ber, an operation which often makes readings unsteady for a short time. The electrode consisted of two concentric circles of thick copper-wire, connected by short crosspieces, as shown. The chamber itself was kept at 400 volts. The radium was a fine specimen, which Dr. Herman Lawrence, of Melbourne, was so very kind as to lend us. It was contained, when we received it, in a small brass vessel covered with mica, over which a little wax had been run. Being very anxious to avoid any trace of emanation escaping into our apparatus, and at the same time to run no risk of injuring the specimen, we covered it still further with asbestos, placed the whole in a thin brass vessel, just big enough to hold it, and soldered down the lid. Thus the radium was at all times sufficiently screened 38 to cut out most of the normal 8 rays, and, indeed, some of the soft y rays as well. The Dolezalek electrometer was fitted with a fine quartz fibre: one volt moved the scale-image through four metres. The zero was fairly steady, and conse- cutive readings generally agreed to three per cent.; the diffe- rences were by no means wholly due to the electrometer. As appears to be usual in the measurement of such smal] cur- rents, we were somewhat troubled by unaccountable distur- bances, but on most days these were not enough to interfere with the general results. Having set up the apparatus in this way, we proceeded first to compare the incidence and emergence radiation of various substances. This was done by the measurement of the current under three different arrangements : — (a) When those parts of the top and bottom walls of the chamber through which the y rays passed were made of the thinnest Al foil (p,p and q,q, in the figure) ; (6) When a plate of the substance, of proper thickness, was so placed at p,p that the rays passed through it into the chamber ; (c) When a plate of the same substance was made to form part of the top wall, at ¢,q¢, so that the y rays struck it after crossing the chamber. We took }—a as a measurement of the emergence radiation, c—a@ as a measurement of the incident. Some results which we obtained in this way are contained in the following table, in which the numbers refer to the movement of the scale in 30 seconds, 10=1 mm. : — TABLE. Comparison of emergence and incidence radiations. Soft y rays. Hard y rays. Incidence. Emergence. Incidence. Emergence. C 170 2280 58 1150 Al 280 1810 120 795 S 340 1575 154 685 Fe 487 1350 163 560 Cu 558 — 202 523 Zn 618 1160 224 485 Sn 1051 1170 333 303 Pb 1723 2001 497 470 The figures here given show the very large want of symmetry between the radiations on the two sides of a plate. Our pre- vious experiments proved the existence of this want of sym- metry ; but it is now shown more clearly and satisfactorily. The results still require correction before they can be considered accurate. It will be clear that b —a, the emergence 39 radiation, is too small in all cases, because the screen, when placed on the bottom of the chamber, stops a certain amount of 8 radiation, which is made in the air just underneath the plate, and is out of reach of the magnet, as well as some fast 8 radiation which comes from lower down, and is strong enough to escape from the magnetic field. This is reckoned in @, but not in 2; so that on this account all the emergence radiations are too small by a certain constant amount. We have not yet succeeded in determining this constant with any accuracy. We believe it to be mainly due to the fast B rays, which emerge with hard y rays from the upper surfaces of the magnet poles, of the lead block, and of the plug. It can- not be much less when the plug is removed, and must there- fore be of more relative importance to the results for hard rays than for soft, since the total observed effects are smaller in the former case. Its magnitude is, perhaps, indicated with some accuracy by the fact that when a lead plug of 3 cm. thickness was used the emergence radiation of tellurium seemed to be nearly zero: the substance had stopped almost as much as it generated. It can easily be seen from what fol- lows that tellurium should probably have less emergence radia- tion than any other substance, yet it ought to approach half the value for carbon; and this would imply that the value of the constant was about 300 for the hard rays, and perhaps rather mcre for the soft. On the other hand, c—a, the inci- dence radiation, is too large, because the plate that is placed on top of the chamber at ¢,q not only gives rise to the inci- dence radiation to be measured, but also turns back to a greater or less extent the 8 rays striking it from below. This effect increases with the atomic weight, and must be of some importance in the case or Sn and Pb. As it is clear that these corrections will increase the want of symmetry, already obvious enough, and as we are hardly in a position as yet to make the corrections with accuracy, and as we hope to dimi- nish our experimental errors in the future, we have for the present left these figures uncorrected. In the first of these papers we showed that the incidence radiation should be somewhat less than p times the emergence radiation where p is the reflection constant of the substance _ in question for B rays. The above table does indeed show that the ratio of the two radiations increases with the atomic weight, and therefore with p; but the quantitative comparison appears poor. But it is to be remembered that (1) corrections yet to be made will alter the figures somewhat, making, for example, the emergence radiation of Pb greater, and the incidence radiation smaller; (2) the quantity p is somewhat indefinite. It is true that McClelland has made careful mea- 40 surements of p for various substances; so also has H. W. Schmidt ; and the two sets of results do not agree very well. This is not to be wondered at, for the quality of the secon- dary radiation due to B rays is different to that of the inci- dent, and depends on the nature of the reflector. For in- stance, there 1s some very soft radiation, of which half is absorbed in 25 cm. of air. The experimental value of p will therefore depend on how close the ionization-chamber which receives the secondary radiation is placed to the reflecting- surface. It will be largest if the surface is actually within the chamber ; and this is effectively the case in these present experiments. Again, the incidence radiation should be somewhat less than p times the emergence radiation; and the words itali- cized should apply specially to the case of the lighter atoms. Referring back to the argument of our previous paper, it was there pointed out that the cathode radiation, which originated in any layer of the plate and was turned back, was scattered and softened in the process. In determinations of p this effect causes the result to be too high, because slow B rays produce more ions per cm. than fast ones. At the same time, such rays contribute less to the incidence radiation than they would have done if they had possessed the same penetrative powers as the B rays which go on and emerge from the plate. This applies particularly to the lighter atoms, for it is in their case that this scattering and softening effect is so pronounced. (Quality of secondary radiation due to B rays. Trans. Roy. Soc. of S.A., Oct., 1907, p. 300.) This seems a reasonable explanation of the very large differences between the emer- gence and incidence radiations of the lighter atoms. It is interesting to observe that the figures for the inci- dence radiations were obtained by the use of a stream of y rays fairly free from 8 rays. So far as we can discover, this condition has not been realized previously. When we have successfully applied the corrections described above, the results — should be of considerable interest. Having carried these experiments sufficiently far to show clearly the want of symmetry between the secondary radia- tions on the two sides of the plate, we put them aside for the time, in order to compare the emergence radiations of plates of different substances. At the beginning of this paper it was stated that emergence radiations would be the same for all substances, if we could arrange to have (1) homoge- neity of the y rays; (2) a density law of absorption for the — y rays; (3) a density law of absorption for the B rays. All these conditions cannot be realized; but we can go a long way towards satisfying the first two. Wigger has shown that 41 rays which have passed through 2°8 cm. of lead are then absorbed by different substances according to a density law simply: they do not recognize atomic groupings. We may safely assume that the first condition is then effectively rea- lized also. We therefore placed a Jead plug (1°61 cm. in thickness) in the conical opening (see fig. 1), and hoped to find that the emergence radiation, which we then proceeded to measure, would depend only on the absorption of the B rays. For according to our theory equal quantities of y rays. would be converted into 6 rays in equal weights of different substances ; and the subsequent emergence of these 8 rays into the ionization-chamber would be governed only by their abi- lity to penetrate the layers intervening between their place of origin and the chamber. It is, perhaps, important to ob- serve that we are implicitly making another assumption, viz., that the 8 rays originating in different substances have the same speed. On the material theory of the y rays the assump- tion is natural; it is justified by the general nature of our results, and by special experiments to be described later. Since the absorption of 8 rays by substances of small atomic weight is much less than in the case of the large atomic No Plug ”. i 2000 Ofmer WRadi< fo) SEmergencehRadiation®-—» 400 ® c ais*® Fecuzn ®° ag ¥e w 00, Atomic Weight of Screen—» Fig. 2. 42 weight, weight for weight of screen; or, in the usual phrase- ology, since A/p is smaller for light atoms than for heavy atoms, we expected the emergence radiations of C and Al to be much greater than those of, say, W and Pb. Fig. 2 shows that this expectation was realized ; the results are shown gra- phically along the curve AA. The representative points do not lie closely on a smooth curve. ‘T'o some extent, no doubt, this is due to experimental error, for the measured quantities are very small, But we are inclined to think that the departures from regularity are to some extent real. We hope to settle this point partly by improving our apparatus, and so attaining greater accuracy of measurement, and partly by obtaining better knowledge of the corrections to be applied to the observations. For our present purpose, it is enough to draw a smooth curve such as AA, and to ignore the variations from it. The figure shows a rapid decrease in the emergence radia- tions as we proceed from C to Te. There is then a small rise to W and Pb. This is easily explained, and exemplifies a very important feature of the problem. We must remember, not only that A/p is fairly constant for the heavy atoms, but also that the lead screen did not completely remove the soft rays; in other words, that the pencil of y rays was not quite homogeneous. This will be clearly understood by comparing the curve AA with the curve 4B, which represents the results we ob- tained when the lead plug was removed and the y rays had passed through only the wall of the vessel containing the radium before entering the chamber. There was therefore a quantity of soft radiation in the stream of y rays; the effect was to increase considerably the emergence radiation of Pb and W relatively to that of the other substances. This was as it should have been. We know that hard y rays pay no attention to atomic structure, but that soft rays distinguish between atoms of different weight. In the table given by Wigger (Jahrbuch der Radioaktivitat, 1905, p. 432) the values of A/p for thin sheets of Pb and Zn are ‘068 and ‘039 re- spectively ; but when the rays have been hardened by passing through 2°8 cm. of lead, each co-efficient has become nearly ‘02. Thus, the hard rays treat lead and zinc alike, but softer rays are more absorbed by the former than the latter, weight for weight. When a stream of y rays is passed through a lead plate, the soft rays are rapidly converted into B rays. Consequently, a thin lead plate produces a large quantity of emergence radiation, due principally to the slow B rays pro- duced by the soft y rays. The effect is further discussed later on in the paper. But this is rapidly used up; conse- 43 quently, the radiation measured on the far side of a lead plate is relatively large when the plate is thin, and falls off more quickly at first than it does subsequently, the plate being gradually thickened. The logarithmic curve of Pb has a rapid initial fall, as several observers have shown. But there is a difference in the case of Al or any substance of small atomic weight. The soft y rays give rise to much less secondary radiation, and, moreover, they are not used up so fast. Both these causes operate to make the logarithmic ab- sorption curve of Al more nearly a straight line, as is actu- ally the case. It appears that a screen of any material absorbs the soft rays faster than the hard. Consequently, for example, a zinc screen or a lead screen may be used indifferently in order to reduce the ratio of the emergence radiation of lead to that of zinc. But a screen of large atomic weight acts more rapidly. If the screens of lead and zinc are chosen of such thicknesses that they absorb hard rays to an equal extent, then the former absorbs more of the soft rays than the latter. The curve CC (fig. 2) shows the results which were obtained when a zinc plug of 2:05 cm. thickness was placed in the con1- eal opening. In both CCU and AA the value for Sn is a little too small; we were not aware at the time that our Sn plate 2000 ~~ SemergenceNRadiati anee | Ager TW £ HAKATA FT linn 12) Atomic Weight of Screen—>» Fig. 3. 44 was rather too thin. In fig. 3 are drawn several curves, each showing the result of using some particular plug. In order to avoid confusion the representative points are not marked. The effect under discussion is clearly seén on comparing, for example, the curve for 1°61 cm. of Pb with that for 3 cm. of Zn. Kleeman was the first to show that the distinction made | by the y rays between different atoms in regard to the amount of secondary radiation produced by them could be modified by screening (Phil. Mag., Nov., 1907). Our-results agree with his to this extent, but they do not show any true selective absorption, such as he supposes. We may add that when using a different specimen of radium, with which we were able to allow the y rays to act with a minimum of previous screening, the emergence radia- tion of Pb was greater than that of C: It would appear pro- bable that with very soft rays other atoms lighter than Pb would surpass C in the same way, and that it is quite con- ceivable that the emergence radiations should increase with the atomic weight throughout the whole range. Ina letter to “Nature” (April 2, 1908, p. 509) Cooksey shows that in the case of X-rays the emergence radiations are greater than the incident, thus proving the parallel to our own results in the case of y rays. He also finds that the emergence radiation increases with the atomic weight. This is the opposite to what we have found true of the y rays in most cases; but it is clear that it can be quite in accord with our theory. When the screen through which the y rays pass on their way into the chamber is gradually increased in thickness, the emergence radiation rises rapidly to a maximum, and then slowly decreases. The rise is due to increasing f radiation from the thickening screen ; the decrease to the absorption of the y rays by the screen. There is a maximum when the two effects balance. This was clearly shown by Wigger (loc. cit., p. 429). If we determine the thickness which gives half the maximum value, we obtain an easy and fairly accurate mea- sure of the penetration of the secondary 8 rays. It is easily shown that this particular thickness is also that which would absorb half the equally penetrating radiation from a radio- active layer, assuming an exponential law, which it is per- missible to do with sufficient accuracy. The results are shown graphically in figs. 4 to 8. In each case the curve A represents the result of an experiment in which the lead plug, 1°61 cm. in thickness, was used to screen the y rays. The curve B shows the result with the plug removed. From each curve can be determined the thickness of screen, which gives half the full value of the emergence radiation ; the points are marked on the diagrams. The re- ¥ i 45 ee 8 bis 2S] eae Emergence Rad fation—+ ~ o ° *imn. “200 ‘ena *$muu. *omm. “Grud. *7mu. Oma. *Omm. Thickness of Screen—> Smergence Aadiation+@ 0 70 80 90 100 Radiation—@® 20 Emergence é Thickness of Screen— Emergence Radiation —> lmnm. Thickness of Screen — — S gence Radiation Emer wv fo} fe) L- dbiiekste ss aor Sereen—> Fig. 8. sults for the hard rays are collected and shown in the second column of the following table: — De, : : a Substance. Thickness of Screen A Calculated A for Br to give half-value from II., in (McClelland ‘ana in mm. cem—1 Hackett). Lead eee eee | rite 84 nel 93 Tin nity SBE Mie ee 50 me: 52 Copper a, te owe af pil ae. 5D Aluminium ... °50 ay 14 af 14 Celluloid A oS mt — — — —— AT The third column shows the values of A calculated from the results in the second column. The fourth column shows the values of A for the primary B rays of radium, as given by McClelland and Hackett. (Trans. Roy. Soc. Dub., March 22, 1907, p. 49.) A comparison of the two last columns shows clearly that the secondary 8 rays excited by the y rays possess nearly the same velocity, no matter in what substance they are excited, and that this velocity is the same as that of the primary 8 rays. Only hard y rays have been used to excite the 8 rays in these experiments, while the values of McClel- land and Hackett refer to 8 rays of ordinary heterogeneity. It is scarcely possible in the present state of knowledge to estimate what allowance should be made for this difference, but it is clear that the main conclusion cannot be affected by it. The value of A varies rapidly with the speed of the B par- ticle, and there is room for considerable alteration of the values in the table without any important alteration in the associated speed. Nor does much error arise from neglect of the correction discussed above, which makes the emergence radiations too small. The various curves of figs. 4 to 8 should really run a little way past the point taken as origin of co- ordinates. If we consider the corresponding values for the soft rays, or rather, soft together with hard rays, we find, as expected, that the 8 rays which they produce are of a much less pene- trating character. Also, the difference between the curves A and B is most marked in the case of lead and tin, a re- sult which is in agreement with what has gone before. For these metals the thicknesses of screen required to give half the full emergence radiation are ‘030 mm. and ‘048 mm. re- spectively, which may be compared with the values ‘083 and ‘141 obtained when hard rays were used. The amount of soft radiation is so large that we may consider the effect of the hard radiation mixed with it as a correction to be allowed for. The effect of the hard radiation which has been passed through the plug, 1°61 cm. of lead, is, of course, shown by the curve A. It is a little difficult to say precisely what it would have been if the rays had not gone through the plug, since the absorption co-efficient for y rays varies so much with the hardness. From ‘8 cm. Pb to 1°25 cm. Pb, the value of A is given by McClelland as 44 cm.—'; from 2°8 cm. Pb onwards Wigger gives ‘241 cm.—'. We have taken a value between these, towards the harded side, and drawn the curve A’ for each metal, derived from A by increasing the ordinates of A by two-thirds, a factor calculated from the absorption co- efficient chosen. Subtracting A’ from B, we obtain 5’, a curve which may be taken as representing approximately the beha- 48 viour of soft y rays alone. The form of the curve for both Pb and Sn seems to suggest that the operation has been a success. The half-values are now 024 and ‘029 respectively. Thus the 8 rays due to these soft y rays have only one-quarter the penetration of those derived from the harder y rays. Pos- sibly we have here an association with the facts stated by H. W. Schmidt (Ann. der Phys., Bd. 21, p. 654), viz., that the B rays emitted by RaC consist of two groups, of which one has four times the penetration of the other. The thickness of Al screen necessary to reduce the harder set to half-value was ‘53, which agrees with the ‘50 given in the table above; for the softer rays the value was ‘131, nearly a quarter of the other. If there are two main groups of B rays we should cer- tainly expect to find two corresponding groups of y rays. Kleeman has also argued in the same direction, though for different reasons. As will be seen from figs. 6 to 8 we have made the same attempt to sort the soft from the hard rays in respect to Cu, Al, and celluloid as in the case of Pb and Sn. The propor- tion of soft y rays converted into 8 rays is now much less relatively. The results for soft rays are therefore of less accuracy, and depend appreciably on the allowance made for the hard rays. Nevertheless, they are of considerable interest. They show clearly the difference between the effects of hard and soft rays, and the varying proportion of soft to hard from substance to substance. It may be gathered from consideration of all these curves that secondary y rays play a very small part in ionizing the air within the chamber. If there were any appreciable amount of it we should expect a gradual rise long after the effect of the secondary 8 rays had reached its maximum value. § II. We may now give a short summary of the results of this and our previous paper : — (1) When y radiation is diminished in quantity in con- sequence of its passage through matter, B radiation appears in its place, moving at the outset in the ori- ginal direction of the y radiation, and subsequently undergoing scattering in the ordinary manner of B rays. (2) The speed and penetration of the 8 radiation thus produced increase with the penetration of the y radiation to which it is due. (3) The speed of the B radiation does not depend on the nature or condition of the atom in which it arises. (4) In the case of radium the speed of the 8 radiation 3 cd 49 produced is nearly equal to the speed of the B rays emitted by radium itself. In the case of uranium, thorium, and actinium there are indications that the law holds good also, but no exact measurements have yet been made. (5) When very hard y rays traverse matter the absorp- tion and the consequent production of B rays are almost independent of the atomic structure of the matter, and a density law follows. Softer rays are affected by atomic structure, in that the heavier atoms are more absorbent than the lighter, weight for weight ; and the softer the rays are the more pro- minent this effect becomes. (6) If there are secondary y rays, the ionization which they produce is negligible compared with that pro- duced by the secondary 8 radiation, at least within a moderate distance (say 100 cm. of air) of the radiator. | § III. Various hypotheses have been suggested as to the mode in which the secondary B radiation is produced by the interac- tion of the y (or X-) ray and the atom. It is convenient to divide them into three classes, and to consider to what extent each class is able to furnish an explanation of the properties set out in the summary just given. To the first class belong those hypotheses which suppose both the energy and the material of the B radiation to be furnished by the atom alone ; the y ray is a pulse which merely pulls the trigger. In its most recent form this idea is put for- ward by W. Wien (Gottingen Nachrichten, 1907, p. 598). Secondly, it may be supposed that the energy of the B radiation comes from the y ray, but the material from the atom. The y ray is a bundle of electric energy, possessing mass, which impinges on the atom and drives out the elec- tron before it. This is the view now held by J. J. Thomson (Camb. Phil. Soc. Proc., vol. xiv., pt. iv., p. 417). Thirdly, both the energy and the material of the B ray may be supposed to be derived from the y ray. The latter is not a pulse but a neutral pair, positive and negative ; in pass- ing through some atom the bonds are dissolved, and the nega- tive flies on. (Trans. Roy. Soc. of S.A., May, 1907; Phil. Mag., Oct., 1907.) Consider first the theory which considers that the whole of the energy of the expelled electron comes from the internal energy of the atom. It is to be supposed that the pulse as it widens finds an atom here and there which is in an explosive 50 condition, and that in some unknown way it precipitates a catastrophe. There is, of course, one point which is imme- diately cleared up by such a hypothesis, viz., that the speed of the expelled electron is independent of the intensity or quantity of the primary radiation. But here we stop short, for we have also to explain why the speed of the electron is not independent of the quality of the primary radiation. Why should the speed be great when the primary y rays are hard, and small when they are soft? Why should the velo- city of the shot depend on the way in which the trigger is pulled? We might get out of the difficulty by supposing an atom to be like a battery which contained a number of diffe- rent kinds of guns, and that the pulses were selective, each pulling the trigger of its own particular gun. But even if we have presumed some highly artificial arrangement of this kind, we have greater difficulties still to face. How is it that the | pulses always find the guns pointing in the direction in which they are travelling themselves, so that the motion of the shot is a continuation of their own line of flight? For if the speed of the electron is independent of the strength of the pulse, then, so to speak, the touch on the trigger must be very light indeed, and can have nothing to do with the laying of the gun. We might perhaps suppose that there were guns in the battery pointing in all directions, and that the pulse only fired the one which pointed in that direction in which it was travel- ling itself; but this would require a special atomic structure to meet the case, and it would be out of all proportion to frame such a hypothesis to explain the observed effect. Nor do our difficulties end here. For if the expulsion of the elec- tron is the result of an atomic disintegration, should we not expect the velocity of the electron to vary from atom to atom, as it does in the case of the radio-active substances? It is in- conceivable that the explosion of a light atom should result in the expulsion of an electron with exactly the same speed as in the case of the heavy atom. And, further, assuming the same hypothesis, how can the production of B rays, in the case of the hard y rays, be absolutely independent of atomic structure in all respects whatever ? Thus, after its first small success, the theory breaks down at every point. It is true that Wien makes a tentative appli- cation of a theory of Planck, viz., that energy emitted from atoms is divided into definite units, the size of which is in- versely proportional to the associate wave length. He thence deduces the law v?A=constant, where v is the velocity of the ejected electron, and A the thickness of the X- -ray pulse which he is considering. He thus passes by the need of explaining certain of the difficulties just discussed, and arrives at a for- . 1g 51 mula from which the second and third properties in the above summary may be derived. Even then his theory fails to ex- plain the first and fourth properties. It seems to us to be clear that the application of Planck’s theory is not justified. And, generally, we conclude that the energy of the secondary B ray does not come from the atom. We now come to the second case. In this there is no sug- gestion of trigger action ; the energy of the 8 radiation is sup- posed to be entirely derived from that of the ether pulses. As already mentioned, this theory has lately been maintained by J. J. Thomson (Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc., vol. xiv., pt. iv., p. 417). It is also discussed by N. R. Campbell (“Modern Elec- trical Theory’). Since an ether pulse of the orthodox form spreads its energy over wider and wider surfaces as it radiates from its origin, and since the energy of the ejected secondary particle is immensely greater than can be imparted to it during the passage of the weak, and always weakening, pulse, it becomes a necessity on this hypothesis to concentrate the energy of the pulse along radial lines, having their centre at the place where the primary cathode particle is suddenly stopped or accelerated. Thomson speaks of “bundles of energy” occupying only a very small portion of the wave- front, the rest of the front being blank. Of course this at once suggests explanations of some of the difficulties of the y and X-rays, such as the ionization of only a few of the atoms swept over by the wave, and the absence of relation be- tween the velocity of the secondary electron, on the one hand, and, on the other, the intensity of the radiation and the nature of the atom. Also, it makes provision for a concentration of momentum. This theory, however, postulates a very special and complicated structure of the ether. And, in the second place, it does not even then offer an explanation of all the phenomena. If a “bundle of energy” provides the energy with which the secondary cathode particle leaves the atom, then the energy-content of the bundle must be greater than the energy of the particle. If, on the other hand, as in the case of the X. rays, the energy of the bundle is derived from that of the arrested cathode particle, the former must be less than the latter. Now, it seems quite clear that the energy of the secondary electron is at least nearly as great as that of the primary cathode particle. For in the case of the X-rays the velocity of the secondary electron is nearly 107°, and is there- fore much the same as that of the cathode rays in the bulb. And we have shown above, in the analogous case of y rays, that the velocity of the secondary 8 ray, produced by the y ray, is practically the same as that of the primary £6 ray, which is- sues with the y ray. We must, therefore, conclude on this 52 hypothesis that the energies of the primary electron, the bundle, and the secondary electron are all equal. The whole of the energy of the cathode particle in the X-ray tube is converted into one energy bundle. This darts away from the anticathode, and sooner or later causes the ejection of an electron from some atom which it traverses, handing over to the electron the whole of its own store of energy. Replace the bundle of energy by a neutral pair, and the whole affair seems simple enough. But surely the complications of the ether structure increase the more closely we examine the pro- cess under which rapidly moving electrons in the X-ray tube disappear, and similar electrons, moving at the same rate, ap- pear elsewhere, if we are to consider that the only links be- i tween them are little bundles of energy moving with the — speed of light. It might be said, perhaps, that one bundle contains the energy of several arrested electrons; but in that case we should have bundles of all sizes and secondary electrons of all speeds: or that several bundles might pile up their ener- gies in one atom until there was enough for the ejection of -one secondary electron ; but then we should return to the dif- ficulty of explaining why the speed is independent of the na- ture of the atom. A cathode particle cannot give all its energy to a pulse unless its arrest is brought about in a very sudden and spe- cial way. The thickness of the pulse must not be greater than the diameter of the electron or corpuscle (“Cond. of Elect.,” p. 660). If the pulse is thicker than this, only a pro- portional fraction of the energy of the cathode particle can be converted into the energy of the pulse. Now it is gene- rally believed that the phenomena of the X-rays require a pulse many thousands of times as thick as the diameter of an electron. It does not seem possible to reconcile these op- posite requirements. The bundle must be excessively small. If it is larger than an atom, or even than an electron, the whole of its energy cannot be given up to one electron on which it im- pinges. There would not be time for the energy to move in from the outskirts of the bundle to the place where it is being transformed into the motion of the electron. It must not expand or contract its borders as it moves, or else its effect will vary as it travels. The difficulties of this theory are exactly those which would naturally arise in the attempt to transfer the proper- ties of a material particle to an immaterial disturbance. Let us now consider the third form of hypothesis, ac- cording to which both the energy and the material of the 53 secondary electron are derived from the primary ray. In our previous paper on this subject, and in papers on “The Properties and Natures of Various Electric Radiations” (Trans. Roy. Soc. of S.A., May and June, 1907; Phil. Mag., Oct., 1907), it was shown that the hypothesis offered a rea- sonable explanation of all the phenomena known to date. It is only necessary now to show to what extent it fits with the properties of the y rays enumerated in § II. of this paper. We will take the properties in turn. As regards (1) we have simply to suppose that the nega- tive and positive, passing united into an atom, are separat- ed if they happen to traverse a very strong field anywhere therein; the negative flies on and the positive becomes in- effective. The second property is also an obvious consequence of the hypothesis. The faster the y particle 1s moving the greater the initial speed of the negative. The third is readily explainable: the electric field of the atom merely dissolves the bonds that connect the pair. It is not able to affect the speed of the negative set free. The fourth may be taken to imply that the radio-active atom (say RaC) ejects electrons at certain speeds, some of which start off in company with a positive counterpart, some without. The former constitute the y rays, the latter the B rays. When the y rays break up, the negatives so produced have the same speed as the primary 8 rays. The fifth would show that there are stronger fields in- side heavy atoms than light ones, and that the chance of separation of a pair increases with (a) the strength of the field, (b) the time taken to cross it. This is all the explanation that is necessary. We can at least claim that it is much simpler and more complete than any explanation which the ether-pulse theory seems likely to afford, even in its latest form. It is true that the neutral - pair hypothesis requires the existence of a positive counterpart to the negative electron. In a previous paper it was suggested that this might be an a particle; the results of this paper seem rather to suggest that its mass is only small, and that it may really be a posi- tive electron. Now the positive electron has hitherto been re- ceived with little favour; but the argument has been not s0 much against its existence as against its presence in metals in a free state, The latter is not at all necessary to our hypo- thesis. We require only that the positive shall exist, that it can be torn from its attachment and carried away by a passing negative electron, and, again, that it can be left behind in some atom which the pair subsequently traverses: 54 The recent determination by Cooksey of the want of symmetry between the emergence and incidence radiations due to X-rays is the last experiment required to show that all the properties in the summary of § II. are true for X-rays as well as for y rays, mutatis mutandis. All the properties except the first have been already shown to be true (see our first paper on this subject). The complete parallelism be- tween X- and y rays stands out more strongly than ever. In conclusion, there is one aspect of the problem which seems to invite a little further consideration. The charac- teristics of the secondary 8 ray are independent, as we have seen, of the nature of the atom in which it arises, and de- pend only on the nature of the y ray to which it is due. This is all the more remarkable when we consider that the characteristics of primary B rays are peculiarly dependent on the nature of the atoms whence they emerge, and are ab- solutely independent of physical agencies acting from with- out. In the one case, that of secondary B radiation, we can determine that a given material shall emit 8 rays of definite speed and direction, and can carry out our determination by the use of suitable agencies and dispositions. In the other case, that of primary 8 radiation, the whole process is com- pletely beyond our control. It is one example of this con- trast that the radio-active substances do not emit secondary radiations to an abnormal extent. It is clear that there is a sharp line of distinction between the emission of an elec- tron from an atom as a primary B ray, and the emergence of an electron from an atom as a secondary 8 ray. On our hypothesis the origin of the distinction is simply that in the former case the electron was part of the atom which ejected it; in the latter case, it was no part of the atom: it came in with the exciting ray. All the experimental evidence ac- cords with this view. We come very close to the complete realization of an anticipation made twelve months ago (Trans. Roy. Soc. of S.A., May 7, 1907, pp. 84, 85), ‘All secondary radiation, other than the 8 rays, seems to be in general a rough reflection or scattering of the primary . . . The only cases in which a secondary radiation appears, that is neither 5 radiation nor reflected primary rays, are those in which B rays are produced at the impact of X- or y rays, and in which X-rays are produced by cathode rays. . ok may well be that further research will bring these cases into better agreement with the rest.” On the neutral-pair hypo- thesis the exceptions mentioned here practically disappear. There remains a broad generalization, which, with all the faults natural to its kind, seems to us to be applicable to every case of which we have knowledge, and to be an import- ant principle of the theory of secondary radiation. 55 NEW AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA OF THE FAMILIES NOCTUIDZ AND PYRALIDEA. By A. JEFFERIS TurNnER, M.D., F.E.S., Brisbane. [Read April 7, 1908.] Family NOCTUIDZ:. Subfamily AGARISTIN A. ARGYROLEPIDIA EZTHRIAS, 0. sp. (dthria, the sky.) 3, 39 mm. Head blackish, a pair of spots on crown and sides of face yellowish-white. Palpi yellowish-white, terminal joint, and a spot on external surface of second joint before apex, blackish. Antennz blackish. Thorax blackish with some whitish scales ; posterior edge and two longitudinal lines on patagia yellowish-white. Abdomen grey; tuft, ex- cept on dorsum, and under-surface orange. Legs blackish, irrorated, and tarsi annulated with white; anterior cox yel- lowish-white ; middle tibiz orange on external surface. Fore- wings triangular, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, ter- men bowed, slightly oblique; blackish; basal area strigu- lated and spotted with greenish-white; a squarish greenish- white spot on dorsum before middle; succeeded by a small spot, constricted in middle, beyond mid-dorsum; a_ small bluish-white spot in cell; an outwardly-oblique yellowish- white spot from costa beyond middle, constricted beneath costa; beyond and beneath this a larger spot of the same colour, divided posteriorly into three obtuse teeth; a sub- terminal series of pale-blue spots; cilia blackish, on apex and tornus white. Hindwings with termen rounded, irregularly dentate ; blackish; a large triangular basal area pale metallic blue; cilia white. This attractive species is nearest A. nove-hiberme, Badv. Type in Coll. Turner. N.Q., Cape York; one specimen. Section AGROTIN A. PROTEUXOA LOXOSEMA, DN. sp. (Loxosemos, obliquely marked.) 3 2, 35-40 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax dark-reddish- brown. Antenne fuscous, towards bases whitish; in ¢ minutely ciliated (4) with slightly longer bristles. Abdomen pale fuscous. Legs grey, mixed with whitish and brownish. 56 Forewings elongate-oblong, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen rounded beneath; dark-reddish-brown; veins obscurely marked by fuscous and pale-grey irroration; orbicular represented by a minute white dot, reniform by an outwardly oblique, rather irregularly shaped, white bar; a dark oblique subterminal shade, sometimes outlined with whitish, nearly straight, but with small subcostal tooth; beyond this ground colour is paler; cilia dark-grey, mixed with pale-grey. Hindwings with termen rounded, slightly wavy ; pale-fuscous ; cilia whitish, with a fuscous median line. Type in Coll. Drake. V., Leopold, Gisborne, Beaconsfield, in March and April; four specimens received from Dr. Drake and Mr. G. Lyell. PROTEUXOA SPODIAS, N. sp. (Spodos, ashes.) 3, 34 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax whitish-grey. An- tenne pale- grey; in 3g minutely ciliated (4), with slightly longer bristles. Abdomen pale-grey. Legs whitish. Fore- wings elongate, costa straight, except close to base and apex, apex rounded, termen rounded beneath ; whitish-grey ; orbicu-. lar and reniform faintly indicated in darker grey; a barely perceptible line of grey dots parallel to termen, midway be- tween that and reniform; cilia pale-grey. Hindwings with termen rounded, somewhat wavy; pale-grey; cilia whitish, with a grey median line at apex. Type in Coll. Drake. V., Black Rock, near Melbourne, in March ; one specimen received from Dr. Drake. Section HADENIN. CIRPHIS ORTHOMITA, Ni. sp. (Orthomitos, with straight threads.) 3¢ @,38 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax whitish-ochreous. Antenne pale-fuscous, towards base whitish-ochreous; in dg serrate with moderate cilia (1) arranged in fascicles. Abdo- men with dense lateral tufts; whitish-ochreous. Legs whitish- ochreous; three terminal tarsal joints dark-fuscous. Fore- wings elongate, costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen rounded beneath; whitish-ochreous; a slender blackish line from base along fold to 4; a shorter, similar line immediately above submedian in posterior part of cell, extending slightly beyond cell; a terminal series of blackish dots between veins; cilia whitish-ochreous, apices barred with dark-fuscous. Hind- wings with termen rounded, sinuate; grey ; some fuscous ter- minal dots; cilia ochreous-whitish. 57 Type in Coll. Lyell. _ V., Leopold, in April; two specimens received from Mr. G Lyell. Section CUCULLIAN A. EUMICHTIS MESOPHA. (Mesophaios, dusky in the middle.) Eumichtis mesophea, Hmps., Cat. Lep. Phal. VI., p. 343. 6, 32-34 mm. Head and palpi brown-fuscous. Anten- ne fuscous; in ¢ simple with short ciliations (4). Thorax with a bifid posterior crest; brown-fuscous, an inwardly oblique whitish streak on each patagium. Abdomen with two or three dorsal crests and dense lateral tufts; fuscous. Legs brown-fuscous, tarsi annulated with whitish. Forewings not elongate, costa scarcely arched, apex rounded, termen crenu- late, rounded beneath ; brown-fuscous ; markings dark-fuscous ; seven short costal strigule between base and 3; three minute whitish costal dots on apical 4+; a triangular spot above 4 dorsum ; an irregular discal blotch narrower towards dorsum, much expanded towards costa, including orbicular and reni- form as transversely elongate, medially constricted, pale areas ; posterior edge of reniform outlined with ferruginous; a dentate subterminal line mixed with ferruginous; a fine interrupted terminal line; cilia fuscous, base pale ferruginous. Hindwings with termen rounded, obtusely dentate; fuscous ; cilia ochreous-whitish with a fuscous median line not reaching tornus. Type in Coll. Drake. V., Beaconsfield, in January; two specimens. Section ACRONYCTIN Ai. PROMETOPUS POLIOPHRACTA, Ni. Sp. (Poliophraktos, grey-bordered.) g, 32-34 mm. Head grey: upper half of face dark-fus- cous. Palpi whitish; basal % of external surface dark-fus- cous. Antennz fuscous, towards base whitish; in ¢c serrate and shortly ciliated (4) in tufts. Thorax whitish-grey ; bases of tegule fuscous. Abdomen pale-grey. Legs whitish, irro- rated with dark-fuscous; tarsi fuscous, with whitish annula- tions. Forewings elongate, costa slightly arched near ex- tremities, apex rounded, termen rounded beneath; whitish- prey, with scattered fuscous scales; lines dark-fuscous; an incomplete line near base; a strongly dentate line, partly double, from + costa to 4 dorsum; some brownish suffusion basal to this line; a circular brownish dot edged with dark- fuscous representing orbicular; reniform represented by a 58 short transverse brownish streak, to the posterior edge of which is closely applied acrescentic whitish streak, edged pos- teriorly with dark-fuscous; a fine dentate posterior trans- verse line; some dark-fuscous suffusion in mid-disc and again beyond posterior line, the latter containing some blackish streaks and brownish scales, and forming a sharp wavy sub- terminal edge; terminal area whitish-grey ; a fine fuscous ter- minal line; cilia grey, with a fine basal brownish line. Hind- wings with termen rounded, slightly sinuate ; grey ; cilia white with a grey antemedian line, on apex and dorsum grey. Type in Coll. Drake. V., Black Rock, near Melbourne, in March; two speci- mens. CaRADRINA CRYPHA, Ni. sp. (Kruphaios, hidden.) 3 9, 32-36 mm. Head and thorax fuscous or brownish- fuscous. Palpi dark-fuscous, apex of second joint more or less whitish. Antenne pale-fuscous; in ¢ serrate and shortly ciliated (4). Abdomen grey, sometimes mixed with whitish- ochreous. Legs fuscous, tarsi annulated with whitish; pos- terior, femora, and tibie clothed with long whitish hairs. Forewings elongate, costa scarcely arched, apex rounded, ter- men rounded beneath ; whitish-grey, with some brownish suf- fusion, especially towards termen, or grey mixed with ochre- ous-whitish ; basal line obsolete, represented by two fuscous dots on costa; a fine dentate transverse line at 4, sometimes double; orbicular obsolete, sometimes a transverse fuscous median shade, from mid-costa obliquely outwards, then bent inwards and again bent to dorsum beyond middle; reniform faintly indicated by a brownish or pale-ochreous suffused spot; a finely dentate postmedian line from #2 costa to 2 dor- sum, succeeded by some dark streaks on veins; a dark sub- terminal shade sharply defined posteriorly ; a terminal series of indistinct dark-fuscous dots, sometimes obsolete ; cilia con- colorous. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish, to- wards termen suffused with fuscous; cilia fuscous at apex, becoming whitish towards tornus. Type in Coll. Lyell. V., Gisborne, Castlemaine, and Murtoa, in March and April; a series received from Mr. G. Lyell. . CARADRINA LEUCOSTICTA, Nl. Sp. (Leucostiktos, white-spotted.) Q, 26-28 mm. Head and thorax brown; lower edge of face ochreous-whitish. Palpi dark-fuscous; terminal joint - 59 and apex of second joint ochreous-whitish, with a few fus- cous scales. Antenne fuscous. Abdomen brown-whitish, ir- rorated with brown. Legs fuscous, irrorated, and tarsi annu- lated, with ochreous-whitish; posterior pair paler. Fore- wings elongate-oblong, costa straight, apex rounded, termen rounded beneath; brown with a few scattered whitish and dark-fuscous scales; a fine transverse, rather wavy dark-fus- cous line at 4; a white spot at 4, representing reniform, some- times preceded by a similar spot representing orbicular ; imme- diately succeeded by an interrupted dark-fuscous transverse _ line; a terminal series of white dots; cilia brown mixed with fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded ; ochreous-whitish ; cilia ochreous-whitish. | Type in Coll. Drake. V., Black Rock, near Melbourne; three specimens. CARADRINA MELANOGRAPHA, 0D. sp. (Melanographos, inscribed with black.) 3, 27-29 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous, irro- _ rated with fuscous. Palpi dark-fuscous; apex of second joint whitish; terminal joint whitish, with a few dark-fuscous scales. Antenne dark-fuscous; in ¢ shortly ciliated (3). Abdomen ochreous-whitish, irrorated with pale fuscous. Legs dark-fuscous, tibie and tarsi annulated with ochreous-whit- ish ; posterior pair mostly ochreous-whitish. Forewings elong- ate-oblong, costa straight, slightly arched near _ base and apex, apex rounded, termen rounded beneath; ochreous- whitish, irrorated with brownish-fuscous ; a blackish line from eosta near base, not reaching dorsum; a white, black-edged dot in disc at 4; a dentate transverse blackish line at +: a second white black-edged dot at 4; five or six fuscous dots on apical half of costa; a fine blackish dentate line from 3 costa, bent outwards in disc, to 3 dorsum; a dark subterminal shade, twice dentate: a terminal series of black dots; cilia pale-fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish, with fuscous suffusion; a crescentic fuscous mark at end of cell; a fine fuscous terminal line; cilia whitish. Ab. Fore- wings suffused with dark-fuscous, white discal dots sometimes obsolete, subterminal shade edged by an ochreous-whitish line. Type in Coll. Drake. V., Black Rock, near Melbourne; four specimens, includ- ing two of the dark form. CARADRINA AMATHODES, Nn. sp. (Amathodes, sandy.) 3692, 34 mm. Head and thorax pale-ochreous. Palpi dark-fuscous, terminal joint and apical third of second joint 60 ochreous-whitish. Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Legs pale- ochreous; tarsi fuscous, with ochreous-whitish annulations. Forewings elongate, costa. slightly arched near base, then straight, apex rounded, termen rounded beneath ; pale-ochre- ous; a dark-fuscous dot on costa near base; another at 4, in a line with one at mid-disc, and another above dorsum at 4; a dot on costa beyond middle, from which proceeds a row of fine dots obliquely outwards, then curved downwards to # dorsum ; orbicular obsolete, reniform represented by a faint crescentic fuscous streak ; a darker subterminal shade, sharply outlined posteriorly, with a subcostal tooth; a fine, inter- rupted fuscous terminal line; cilia pale-ochreous. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish-ochreous: cilia -whitish-ochre- ous. Type in Coll. Drake. V., Black Rock, near Melbourne, in February ; two speci- mens. CARADRINA NYCTERIS, N. sp. (Nukteris, a night-bird.) 2, 32 mm. Head, thorax, palpi, and antennz fuscous. Abdomen fuscous, irrorated with whitish. Legs fuscous, irro- rated, and tarsi annulated with whitish ; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings elongate-oblong, posteriorly dilated, costa scarcely arched, apex rounded, termen somewhat obliquely rounded ; fuscous, with some paler scales; an indistinct dark- fuscous dentate line from + costa to 4 dorsum; orbicular in- dicated by a minute whitish dot; reniform obscure, dank fus- cous; a very indistinct outwardly- curved pale line at #; an irregular interrupted pale subterminal line preceded by a darker shade of fuscous ; a terminal series of minute whitish dots; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded, some- what sinuate beneath apex ; fuscous ; cilia fuscous, Type in Coll. Turner. N.S.W., Emu Plains, near Sydney ; one specimen received from Mr. G. A. Waterhouse. CARADRINA BASISTICHA, Nl. Sp. (Basisterkos, with basal streak.) 3,28 mm. Head pale brownish-ochreous. Palpi dark- fuscous, apex and internal surface pale brownish-ochreous. Antenne fuscous; in